IG76 ImpressGuide

Copyright
This document is Copyright © 2023 by the LibreOffice Documentation Team. Contributors are
listed below. This document maybe distributed and/or modified under the terms of either the GNU
General Public License (https://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html), version 3 or later, or the Creative
Commons Attribution License (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/), version 4.0 or later.
All trademarks within this guide belong to their legitimate owners.
Contributors
Contributors for this edition:
Peter Schofield
Contributors for previous editions:
Claire Wood Hazel Russman Michele Zarri Samantha Hamilton
Dave Barton Jean Hollis Weber Olivier Hallot T. Elliot Turner
Dimona Delvere Kees Kriek Peter Hillier-Brook Vasudev Narayanan
Felipe Viggiano Linda Worthington Peter Schofield
Gary Schnabl Low Song Chuan Rachel Kartch
Feedback
Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to the Documentation Team
mailing list: [email protected].
Note
Everything sent to a mailing list, including email addresses and any other
personal information that is written in the message, is publicly archived and
cannot be deleted.
Publication date and software version

Published October 2023. Based on LibreOffice 7.6 Community.
Other versions of LibreOffice may differ in appearance and functionality.
Documentation for LibreOffice is available at https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/

Contents
Copyright....................................................................................................................................2
Preface.............................................................................................................................. 7
Who is this user guide for?.........................................................................................................8
What is in this user guide?..........................................................................................................8
What is LibreOffice?...................................................................................................................8
Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice..............................................................................8
How to get LibreOffice................................................................................................................8
Installing LibreOffice...................................................................................................................9
Setting up and customizing LibreOffice......................................................................................9
Extensions and add-ons.............................................................................................................9
Where to get more help..............................................................................................................9
What you see may be different.................................................................................................12
Using LibreOffice on macOS....................................................................................................13
Who wrote this user guide?......................................................................................................14
Frequently asked questions......................................................................................................14
What is new in LibreOffice 7.6?................................................................................................15
Chapter 1, Introducing Impress....................................................................................17
Introduction...............................................................................................................................18
Opening Impress......................................................................................................................18
Main Impress window...............................................................................................................20
Workspace views......................................................................................................................27
Creating presentations..............................................................................................................30
Running a presentation.............................................................................................................38
Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates........................................................41
Designing a presentation..........................................................................................................42
What are master slides?...........................................................................................................42
Working with master slides.......................................................................................................43
Working with styles...................................................................................................................61
Working with templates.............................................................................................................66
Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.......................................................................73
Introduction...............................................................................................................................74
Working with text boxes............................................................................................................74
Inserting text.............................................................................................................................88
Formatting text..........................................................................................................................91
Creating lists.............................................................................................................................96
Text callouts............................................................................................................................101
Tables.....................................................................................................................................103
Using fields.............................................................................................................................112
Using hyperlinks......................................................................................................................113
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images................................................................117
Introduction.............................................................................................................................118
Impress Guide 7.6 | 3

Images....................................................................................................................................118
Gallery themes........................................................................................................................120
Formatting images..................................................................................................................122
Creating image maps..............................................................................................................134
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects.......................................................................137
Introduction.............................................................................................................................138
Drawing toolbar.......................................................................................................................138
Creating lines and shapes......................................................................................................144
Grouping objects.....................................................................................................................149
Positioning and resizing graphic objects................................................................................151
Applying special effects..........................................................................................................155
Aligning objects.......................................................................................................................160
Using grid or snap functions...................................................................................................160
Using Helplines.......................................................................................................................165
Arranging objects....................................................................................................................166
Connectors and gluepoints.....................................................................................................167
Working with 3D objects.........................................................................................................173
Converting objects..................................................................................................................175
Interaction with objects...........................................................................................................176
Fontwork.................................................................................................................................177
Animations..............................................................................................................................180
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.....................................................................189
Introduction.............................................................................................................................190
Working with lines...................................................................................................................190
Using area fills........................................................................................................................197
Working with area fill types.....................................................................................................200
Working with shadows............................................................................................................216
Working with transparencies...................................................................................................218
Text in objects.........................................................................................................................219
Formatting connectors............................................................................................................222
Working with drawing styles...................................................................................................223
Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects.....................................227
OLE objects............................................................................................................................228
Spreadsheets..........................................................................................................................230
Charts.....................................................................................................................................241
Audio and video......................................................................................................................247
Formulas.................................................................................................................................249
Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects..................................................................250
Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts.......251
Working with slides.................................................................................................................252
Creating slides from an outline...............................................................................................257
Formatting slides....................................................................................................................259
Presentation notes..................................................................................................................265
4| Impress Guide 7.6

Inserting comments................................................................................................................272
Printing handouts....................................................................................................................273
Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums...............................................................275
Introduction.............................................................................................................................276
Creating slide shows...............................................................................................................276
Slide transitions......................................................................................................................282
Animations..............................................................................................................................284
Using interactions...................................................................................................................291
Slide shows.............................................................................................................................292
Photo albums..........................................................................................................................296
Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting......................301
Saving slide shows.................................................................................................................302
Printing....................................................................................................................................303
Printing examples...................................................................................................................314
Emailing..................................................................................................................................316
Exporting.................................................................................................................................317
Redaction................................................................................................................................322
Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress....................................................325
Introduction.............................................................................................................................326
LibreOffice options..................................................................................................................326
Impress options......................................................................................................................331
Customizing user interface.....................................................................................................336
Adding extensions..................................................................................................................337
Chapter 12, User Interface Variants............................................................................339
Introduction.............................................................................................................................340
Selecting a user interface.......................................................................................................340
Standard Toolbar....................................................................................................................341
Tabbed....................................................................................................................................341
Single Toolbar.........................................................................................................................347
Sidebar...................................................................................................................................347
Tabbed Compact.....................................................................................................................347
Groupedbar Compact.............................................................................................................348
Contextual Single....................................................................................................................348
Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts...............................................................................349
Introduction.............................................................................................................................350
macOS keyboard shortcuts....................................................................................................350
Impress keyboard shortcuts...................................................................................................351
Menu keyboard shortcuts.......................................................................................................355
Toolbar keyboard shortcuts....................................................................................................359
Appendix B, Toolbars..................................................................................................365
Introduction.............................................................................................................................366
Using toolbars.........................................................................................................................366
Toolbars..................................................................................................................................369
Impress Guide 7.6 | 5

Sub-toolbars...........................................................................................................................385
6| Impress Guide 7.6

Impress Guide 7.6
Preface
Who is this user guide for?
Anyone who wants to quickly acquire knowledge on LibreOffice Impress and is new to
presentation software, or may be familiar with another office suite, will find this user guide very
useful.
LibreOffice is an open-source office productivity software suite containing capabilities for word
processing, spreadsheets, presentations, graphics, databases, and formula editing. LibreOffice
Impress is used as a visual aid and is the presentations application for LibreOffice and is
compatible with a wide range of formats, for example, Microsoft PowerPoint (.ppt,. .pptx).
Presentations can be exported in several file formats, for example, PDF, HTML, and numerous
graphic formats.
What is in this user guide?

This user guide introduces the main features of Impress, the presentations (slide show) module
of LibreOffice. Impress slides can contain text, bulleted and numbered lists, tables, charts, clip
art, and other objects. Also, Impress comes with prepackaged styles, slide backgrounds, and
templates to help in creating presentations.
What is LibreOffice?
LibreOffice is a freely available, fully-featured, open source office productivity suite that is
compatible with other major office suites and is available on a variety of platforms. The native file
format used is Open Document Format (ODF). However, LibreOffice can also open and save
documents in many other formats, including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office.
For more information, see the Getting Started Guide.
Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice

LibreOffice 7.6 requires one of the following operating systems:
Linux x64 (deb) and Linux x64 (rpm)
Mac OS X (Aarch64/Apple Silicon)
macOS x86_64 (10.14 Mojave or higher)
Windows x86_64 (Windows 7 or newer required)
For a detailed list of requirements and operating systems supported, see the LibreOffice website,
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/system-requirements/.
How to get LibreOffice

Computers and laptops
Versions of LibreOffice for Windows, Linux, and macOS are freely available and can be
downloaded from the LibreOffice website at https://www.libreoffice.org/download.
Linux users will find LibreOffice included free with many of the latest distributions, for example
Ubuntu. Linux versions may differ in a few features from the descriptions used in this user guide.
LibreOffice is also available for Windows in the Microsoft Store and for macOS in the Apple App
Store at a low and attractive price. These versions are free software (as in open source), but this
small charge covers the cost of putting Libreoffice in the app stores. The profits from this sale of
LibreOffice are invested to support the development of the LibreOffice project.
8 | Impress Guide 7.6

Tablets, iPads and Chromebooks
To use LibreOffice on tablets, iPads, or Chromebooks a LibreOffice based app has to be
downloaded and installed. The app is called Collabora Office, which uses the same technology
as LibreOffice and is very similar in operation to LibreOffice. For more information, go to the
Collabora Office website at https://www.collaboraoffice.com.
Installing LibreOffice
Information on installing LibreOffice on the various supported operating systems can be found at
this web page: https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/install-howto/. When LibreOffice is acquired
through official app stores, follow the installation instructions provided by the store.
Setting up and customizing LibreOffice

After installation, to change the default settings (options) in LibreOffice to suit working
requirements and preferences, go to Tools > Options on the Menu bar (mac OS LibreOffice >
Preferences).
Tip
Some settings are intended for power users and programmers. If it is difficult to
understand what an option does, LibreOffice recommended leaving the option on
its default setting unless instructions in this user guide recommend changing the
setting.
Settings are described in LibreOffice Help and the Getting Started Guide. These two sources
provide information on how to customize menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts in LibreOffice
Impress, add new menus and toolbars, and assign macros to events. Some settings specific to
Impress are covered in Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress.
Extensions and add-ons

Functionality can be added to LibreOffice with extensions and add-ons. Several extensions are
installed with the program and other extensions from the official extensions repository,
https://extensions.libreoffice.org/ or from other sources. See the Getting Started Guide for more
information on installing extensions and add-ons.
Where to get more help

This user guide, the Help system, and user support systems assume that users are familiar with
computers and basic functions such as starting a program, opening and saving files.
Help system
LibreOffice comes with an extensive Help system and is used as the first line of support.
Windows and Linux users can choose to download and install the offline Help for use when not
connected to the Internet. Offline Help is installed with the MacOS version of LibreOffice.
To display the LibreOffice Help, press F1 or go to Help > LibreOffice Help on the Menu bar. If
the offline help is not installed on a computer, but connected to the Internet, a dialog opens giving
the option to Read Help Online. Select this option and the default web browser opens at the
LibreOffice online help pages in the LibreOffice website.
Preface | 9
The Help menu includes links to other LibreOffice information and support facilities. The Help
menu also includes links to other LibreOffice information and support resources.
What's This?
For quick tips when a toolbar is visible, place the cursor over a tool icon to see a small
tooltip box with a brief explanation of the tool function. For a more detailed explanation,
select Help > What's This? Also Extended Tips can be activated by going to Tools >
Options > LibreOffice > General > Help (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > General > Help) on the Menu bar and selecting the option Extended Tips.
Extended tips provide a brief description about tools and commands. To display an
extended tip, use the keyboard Shift+F1, then point to a tool or command.
User Guides
Opens the default browser at the Documentation page of the LibreOffice website
https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/english-documentation/. This page gives access
to the LibreOffice User Guides and other useful information that can be opened in the
default browser. Also, the User Guides are available in PDF format as a free download or
to buy as printed copies.
Show Tip of the Day
Opens a small window with a random tip on how to use LibreOffice.
Search Commands
Opens a window where typing a few letters, or the name of a Menu bar command, for
example, quickly finds where the command is located. Clicking on a command in the
resulting list may open a relevant dialog or have other effects.
Get Help Online
Opens the default browser at the Ask LibreOffice forum of questions and answers from
the LibreOffice community, https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions/.
Send Feedback
Opens the default browser at the Feedback page of the LibreOffice website
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/feedback/. From this page, bugs can be reported, new
features suggested and communicated with other users in the LibreOffice community.
Restart in Safe Mode
Opens a dialog window giving options to restart LibreOffice and reset the software to its
default settings. Restarting in safe mode also provides an opportunity to restore
LibreOffice from a backup.
Get Involved
Opens the default browser at the Get Involved page of the LibreOffice website,
https://www.libreoffice.org/community/get-involved/. Choose a topic of interest to help
improve the program.
Donate to LibreOffice
Opens the default browser at the Donation page of the LibreOffice website,
https://donate.libreoffice.org/ providing an opportunity to make a donation to support
LibreOffice.
License Information
Outlines the licenses under which LibreOffice is made available.
Check for Updates
Opens a dialog and checks the LibreOffice website for updates to version of the software.
The dialog provides an opportunity to download and install any updates to LibreOffice.

About LibreOffice
Opens a dialog and displays information about the version of LibreOffice and the
operating system being used. This information is often requested if the community is
asked for help or assistance with the software (on macOS, this option is found under
LibreOffice on the Menu bar}.
Other free online support

The LibreOffice community not only develops software, but provides free, volunteer-based
support. See Table 1 and the web page https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/. For comprehensive
online support from the community, look at mailing lists and the Ask LibreOffice website,
https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions/. Other user websites also offer free tips and tutorials.
Table 1: Free support for LibreOffice users
Free LibreOffice support
Answers to frequently asked questions
FAQs
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Faq
Free community support is provided by a network of experienced
Mailing lists users
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/mailing-lists/
Free community assistance is provided in a Question & Answer
formatted web service. Search similar topics or open a new one in
Questions & Answers
https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions
and
Knowledge Base The service is available in several other languages; just replace
/en/ with de, es, fr, ja, ko, nl, pt, tr, and many others in the web
address above.
The LibreOffice website in various languages
https://www.libreoffice.org/community/nlc/
Native language Mailing lists for native languages
support https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Local_Mailing_Lists
Information about social networking
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Website/Web_Sites_services
Information about available accessibility options.
Accessibility options
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/accessibility/
Another forum that provides support for LibreOffice, among other
OpenOffice Forum
open source office suites. https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/
Paid support and training

Support and training is available through service contracts from a vendor or consulting firm
specializing in LibreOffice. For information about certified professional support, see The
Document Foundation website: https://www.documentfoundation.org/gethelp/support/.
For schools, educational and research institutions, and large organizations, see
https://www.libreoffice.org/download/libreoffice-in-business/.
Preface | 11
Figure 1: Options LibreOffice — General page
What you see may be different

Illustrations
LibreOffice runs on Windows, Linux, and macOS operating systems, each of which has several
versions and can be customized by users (fonts, colors, themes, window managers). The
illustrations in this guide were taken from a variety of computers and operating systems.
Therefore, some illustrations will not look exactly like what is seen on a computer display.
Also, some of the dialogs may differ because of the settings selected in LibreOffice. Either use
dialogs from the computer system (default) or dialogs provided by LibreOffice. To change to
using LibreOffice dialogs:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > General) on the Menu bar to open the dialog page for general options
(Figure 1).
2) Select the option Use LibreOffice dialogs in Open/Save dialogs to display the LibreOffice
dialogs on a computer display.
3) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.
Icons
The LibreOffice community has created icons for several icon sets, for example Breeze, Colibre,
Elementary, and Sifr. Each user can select a preferred set of fonts to use. The icons used to
illustrate some of the many tools available in LibreOffice may differ from the ones used in this
guide. The icons in this user guide have been taken from a LibreOffice installation that has been
set to display the Colibre set of icons.
Change the icon set used in a LibreOffice installation as follows:
1) On Linux and Windows operating systems, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > View
(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > View) on the Menu bar to open the
dialog page for view options (Figure 2).

Figure 2: Options LibreOffice dialog — View page
2) In Icon Theme, select a font from the options available in the drop-down list.
3) In Icon Size, select the required size from the drop-down lists for Toolbar, Notebookbar
and Sidebar.
4) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.
Notes
Some Linux operating systems, for example Ubuntu, include LibreOffice as part of
the installation and may not include the required icon set. This icon set can be
downloaded from the software repository for the Linux operating system being
used.
Some of the previously included icon sets are now available only as extensions;
see https://extensions.libreoffice.org/?Tags%5B%5D=49 or search for specific
ones. For example, the People Gallery is available from
https://extensions.libreoffice.org/en/extensions/show/people-gallery.
Using LibreOffice on macOS

Some keystrokes and menu items are different on macOS from those used in Windows and
Linux. Table 2 below gives some common substitutions used in this user guide. For more
information on keyboard shortcuts, see LibreOffice help and Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts in
this user guide.
Table 2: Example of macOS keyboard shortcuts
Windows or Linux macOS equivalent Effect

Tools > Options on LibreOffice > Preferences
Access to setup options
Menu bar on Menu bar
Ctrl+click and/or right-click
Right-click depending on computer Opens a context menu
setup
Preface | 13
Windows or Linux macOS equivalent Effect
⌘ and/or Cmd or Command,
Ctrl or Control Used with other keys
depending on keyboard
⌥ and/or Alt or Option
Alt Used with other keys
depending on keyboard
Open the Styles deck in the
F11 ⌘+T
Sidebar
Who wrote this user guide?

This user guide was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community. Profits from sales of
the printed edition are used to benefit the community.
Frequently asked questions

How is LibreOffice licensed?
LibreOffice is distributed under the Open Source Initiative (OSI) approved Mozilla Public
License (MPL). See https://www.libreoffice.org/about-us/licenses/.
It is based on code from Apache OpenOffice made available under the Apache License
2.0 but also includes software that differs from version to version under a variety of other
Open Source licenses. New code is available under LGPL 3.0 and MPL 2.0.
Can LibreOffice be distributed to anyone?
Yes.
Can LibreOffice be sold?
Yes.
Can LibreOffice be used in a business?
Yes.
How many computers can LibreOffice be installed on?
As many as required.
Is LibreOffice available in different languages?
LibreOffice has been translated (localized for more than 80%, both UI and Help) into over
46 languages, so a required language is probably supported. Localization is well under
way for another 30+ languages (50-80%) and for another 50+ languages help is more
than welcome. In addition, over 70 spelling, hyphenation, and thesaurus dictionaries are
available for languages and dialects that do not have a localized program interface. The
dictionaries are available from the LibreOffice website at: www.libreoffice.org.
How can LibreOffice be freely available?
LibreOffice is developed and maintained by volunteers and has the backing of several
organizations. LibreOffice also relies upon donations from its users. To make a donation,
go to the following web page: https://www.libreoffice.org/donate/.
Can the programming code from LibreOffice be used when developing a software
application?
Yes, but follow the parameters set in the MPL and/or LGPL. Read the licenses:
https://www.mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
Why is Java required to run LibreOffice? Is it written in Java?
LibreOffice is not written in Java; it is written in the C++ language. Java is one of several
languages that can be used to extend the software. The Java JDK/JRE is only required
for some features. The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine.

Java is available at no cost. More information and download links to the appropriate
edition for an operating system can be found at: https://java.com/en/download/manual.jsp
Note
If the LibreOffice features that require Java are to be used, it is important that the
correct 32-bit or 64-bit edition matches the installed version of LibreOffice. If Java
is not to be used, nearly all of the LibreOffice features can still be used.
How can users contribute to LibreOffice?

Users can help with the development and user support of LibreOffice in many ways, and
there is no need to be a programmer. To start, check out this webpage:
https://www.libreoffice.org/community/get-involved/. An interactive web page that guides
users in contributing with their best skills available at https://whatcanidoforlibreoffice.org.
Can the PDF copy of this user guide be distributed, or printed and copies sold?
Yes, as long as requirements are met for one of the licenses in the copyright statement at
the beginning of this user guide. There is no need to request special permission.
LibreOffice requests that users share with the LibreOffice project some of the profits made
from sales of user guides, in consideration of all the work that LibreOffice volunteers have
put into producing user guides.
Donate to LibreOffice: https://www.libreoffice.org/donate/.
What is new in LibreOffice 7.6?

The LibreOffice 7.6 Release Notes are available at this link
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/ReleaseNotes/7.6. Also available at this link, the release
notes for earlier versions of LibreOffice are located giving more information on the features that
are included in LibreOffice. Noticeable improvements or enhancements to this version include the
following:
• A new set of application and mime types icons as shown in Figure 3. The icon groups
are, from left to right, standard (apps), standard (mime types), macOS specific.
• Support for dark and high contrast operating system themes on Windows, macOS and
Linux is improved.
• The Start Center can now filter recent documents by type.
Figure 3: New application icons
Preface | 15
Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 1,
Introducing Impress
Presentations in LibreOffice
Introduction
Impress is the presentation (slide show) module included in LibreOffice for creating presentations
using the Open Document Presentation (ODP) format. Using Impress allows the creation of
professional presentations that can include charts, drawing objects, text, multimedia and a variety
of other items. Presentations created in ODP format can be opened by other presentation
software (for example Microsoft PowerPoint), or exported in different presentation formats (for
example PPT).
Slides created for presentations can contain many different elements, including animation, slide
transitions and multimedia are a few of the techniques available in Impress. Using these
techniques can make a presentation look more professional and interesting for an audience.
Several views are available when designing and creating a presentation. For example, the Slide
Sorter displays an overview of slides in thumbnail form, while the Handout page contains both
the slide and the notes for distribution to audiences. Also Impress has a Presenter Console that
is used when rehearsing a presentation and to show the presentation to an audience.
Using graphics in a presentation does require some knowledge of drawing and it is
recommended to refer to the LibreOffice Draw Guide for more information on how to create
graphics, including 3D animation.
Notes
When LibreOffice is installed on a computer, a menu entry for each module is
added to the system menu. The exact name and location of these menu entries
depends on the operating system and graphical user interface being used.
The New icon displayed on the Standard toolbar depends on which LibreOffice
module is open when creating a new document, presentation, spreadsheet, or
drawing.
Opening Impress
From the LibreOffice Start Center when no other LibreOffice module is open.
• Click on Impress Presentation to create a new presentation.
• Click on Open File and navigate to the folder that contains an existing presentation.
• Click on Remote Files and navigate to the remote server and folder that contains an
existing presentation.
From the system menu using a standard menu from which most applications are started. Details
vary with the operating system. See the Getting Started Guide for more information, some
examples are listed below:
• Start menu in Windows.
• Applications menu in Linux with a Gnome desktop.
• Applications menu in macOS.
From any open module of LibreOffice.
• Go to File > New > Presentation on the Menu bar.
• Click on the triangle ▼ next to New on the Standard toolbar and select Presentation
from the drop-down menu.

Figure 4: Main Impress window
1) Slides pane 2) Workspace 3) Sidebar
Figure 5: Select a Template dialog
Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 19

When starting Impress, the main Impress window (Figure 4) opens and, by default, the Select a
Template dialog (Figure 5) also opens. Templates included with Impress are designed to fit the
two standard sizes of presentation slides: 4:3 and 16:9 ratios. However, templates will adapt to
other sizes that are available and can be selected by going to Slide > Slide Properties > Paper
Format on the Menu bar, or Format in the Slide panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
Tips
To start Impress without the Select a Template dialog opening, deselect the option
Show this dialog at startup in the lower left of the dialog. Alternatively, go to
Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > General (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General)on the Menu bar and deselect
Start with Template Selection in New Document.
The Slides pane and/or Sidebar can be closed by clicking the X in the upper right
corner of each pane, or go to View > Slide Pane or View > Sidebar on the Menu
bar to deselect. To reopen a pane, select View > Slides pane or View > Sidebar
on the Menu bar.
To maximize the Workspace area click on the Hide/Show marker in the middle of
the vertical separator line (highlighted in Figure 4). Using the Hide/Show marker
hides the Slides pane or Sidebar, but does not close them. To restore the Slides
pane or Sidebar, click again on its Hide/Show marker.
Main Impress window

The main Impress window (Figure 4) has three main sections: Slides pane, Workspace, and
Sidebar. At the top of the main window is the Menu bar and toolbars. Toolbars can be displayed
or hidden during the creation of a presentation.
Menu bar
The Menu bar, at the top of the main window, provides several menus common to all LibreOffice
modules. The commands may differ between each LibreOffice module for File, Edit, View,
Insert, Format, Tools, Window, and Help. Impress has two extra menus for Slide and Slide
Show. When a menu is selected, a submenu opens to show the available commands. The Menu
bar can be customized and for more information, see the Getting Started Guide.
Workspace
The Workspace opens in Normal view by default and normally in the center of the main window.
The Workspace has four standard views, which are Normal, Outline, Notes, and Slide Sorter.
Each view is opened by clicking on the tab at the top of the Workspace (Figure 6). For more
information on workspace views, see “Workspace views” page 27.
If master slides are being used, then master views become available: Master Slide, Master
Notes and Master Handout. There are no tabs for master views and these are selected by going
to View on the Menu bar. For more information on master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide
Masters, Styles, and Templates.
Figure 6: Workspace view tabs

Slides pane
The Slides pane displays thumbnail images of slides in a presentation in the order in which the
slides are shown. Clicking on a slide image in the Slides pane selects it and places the slide in
the Workspace where changes are made to the displayed slide. The slide show order can be
changed, see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums for more information.
• To display or close the Slides pane, go to View > Slide Pane on the Menu bar.
• To close the Slides pane, click on the X in the right top corner of the Slides pane.
• To display or hide the Slides pane, use the Hide/Show marker on the left of the
Workspace.
Several additional operations can be carried out on one or more slides in the Slides pane. Also,
these additional operations are available from a context menu when right-clicking on a slide in
the Slides pane.
• Add new slides to a presentation.
• Duplicate a slide.
• Rename a slide.
• Hide a slide so that it will not show in a presentation.
• Delete a slide from a presentation.
• Move a slide to another position in the slide order by dragging and dropping it to the
desired position.
• Change the layout for a slide, or a group of slides.
• Navigate to select slides in the presentation.
• Move a slide to another position in the slide sequence.
• Change slide properties by opening the Slide Properties dialog.
Sidebar
The Sidebar, normally located on the right side of the Workspace, is similar to the Sidebar in the
other LibreOffice module and consists of eight decks. To display or hide the Sidebar, use one of
the following methods:
• Go to View > Sidebar on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F5 (macOS ⌘+F5).
• Use the Hide/Show marker on the right of the Workspace.
• To hide the Sidebar, click on the X in the right top corner of the Sidebar.
• To display the Sidebar, click on one of the Sidebar icons to open a deck.
To open a Sidebar deck, use one of the following methods:
• Click on its icon on the right side of the Sidebar.
• Click on Sidebar Settings at the top of the Sidebar and select a deck from the
drop-down list.
• Use one of the available keyboard shortcuts for Sidebar decks.

Properties
The Properties deck (Ctrl+Alt+1, macOS ⌘+⌥+1) has ten panels, allowing changes to slide
layout and objects formatted on a slide.
• When a slide is selected and appears in the Workspace, the Properties deck opens with
the Slides and Layouts panels available.
• When an object on a slide is selected, the following panels in the Properties Deck
become available: Character, Lists, Paragraph, Area, Shadow, Line, Position and
Size, Columns, Effect, and Image. Actual panels displayed depends on the type of
object selected.
Styles
In the Styles deck (Ctrl+Alt+2, macOS ⌘+⌥+2), drawing and presentation styles are applied
to a selected object, new styles created for drawing and presentation, and both types of styles
can be modified. When saving changes to a style, the changes are applied to all of the elements
formatted with that style in the presentation. For more information on styles, see Chapter 2,
Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates.
Gallery
Using the Gallery deck (Ctrl+Alt+3, macOS ⌘+⌥+3), an object is inserted into a
presentation either as a copy or as a link. A copied object is independent of the original object.
Changes to the original object have no effect on the copy. A link remains dependent on the
original object. Changes to the original object are also reflected in the linked object.
Navigator
The Navigator deck (Ctrl+Alt+4, macOS ⌘+⌥+4) displays all objects contained in a
presentation. It provides a convenient way to move between slides in a presentation, or select an
object on a slide. It is recommended to give slides and objects in a presentation meaningful
names for easy identification when using the Navigator. For more information, see “Navigator” on
page 25.
Shapes
The Shapes deck (Ctrl+Alt+5, macOS ⌘+⌥+5) provides panels for quick selection of basic
shapes that are available on the Drawing toolbar: Lines and Arrows, Curves and Polygons,
Connectors, Basic Shapes, Symbol Shapes, Block Arrows, Flowchart, Callout Shapes,
Stars and Banners, and 3-D Objects.
Slide transition
The Slide Transition deck (Ctrl+Alt+6, macOS ⌘+⌥+6) provides a selection of slide
transitions used in a presentation. There are controls to adjust transition speed, automatic or
manual transition, and how long a selected slide is shown (automatic transition only). For more
information on transitions, see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.
Animation
The Animation deck (Ctrl+Alt+7, macOS ⌘+⌥+7) is used to add, change, or remove
animations for different elements or objects on a slide and adjust how objects appear during a
slide show. For more information on animation, see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.
Master slides
The Master Slides deck (Ctrl+Alt+8, macOS ⌘+⌥+8) provides access to slide designs for
presentations and several designs of master slides are available. The default master slide is
blank, but the remaining master slides have backgrounds and styled text. For more information
on master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates.

Figure 7: Rulers showing object size
Figure 8: Changing ruler units
Rulers
Rulers are positioned on the upper and left-hand sides of the Workspace. If the rulers are not
visible, go to View > Rulers in the Menu bar. Rulers show the size of a selected object on the
slide using double lines (highlighted in Figure 7). Rulers are also used to manage object handles
and guide lines when positioning objects.
To change the measurement units, right-click on a ruler and select the measurement unit from
the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 8 for the horizontal ruler. The horizontal and vertical rulers
can be set to different measurement units.
The page margins in the drawing area are also represented on the rulers. The margins are
changed directly on the rulers by dragging them with the cursor. The margin area is indicated by
either a grayed out area on the rulers or borders around the unused area of the ruler. This margin
indication depends on computer setup and operating system.
Note
The sizes are given in the current measurement unit and might not be the same
as the ruler units. The measurement unit on the Status bar is defined in Tools >
Options > LibreOffice Impress > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences
> LibreOffice Impress > General

Figure 9: Status Bar
1) Slide number 5) Object size 9) Fit slide
2) Information area 6) Unsaved changes 10) Zoom slider
3) Master slide 7) Digital signature 11) Zoom percentage
4) Cursor position 8) Text language
Status bar
The Status Bar (Figure 9), located at the bottom of the Impress main window, contains useful
information for working with a presentation. To hide the Status Bar, go to View on the Menu bar
and deselect Status Bar.
Slide number
The slide number currently displayed in the Workspace and the total number of slides in
the presentation.
Information area
This changes depending on the object selected on the slide. Examples of the information
displayed are shown in Table 3.
Table 3: Examples of information on Status Bar
Example selection Examples of information shown

Text area Text Edit: Paragraph x, Row y, Column z
Charts, spreadsheets Embedded object (OLE) “ObjectName” selected
Graphics Bitmap with transparency selected
Master slide
The master slide associated with the slide or notes page currently displayed in the
Workspace. Right-click to open a list of available master slides and select one to apply it
to the selected slide. Double-click to open the Available Master Slides dialog. For more
information on master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide Masters, Styles and Templates.
Cursor position/Object size
Shows different information depending on whether objects are selected or not. When an
object is selected, clicking in either of these areas opens the Position and Size dialog.
– When no object is selected, the position numbers show the current position (X and Y
coordinates) of the cursor.
– When an object is selected and resized using the cursor, the object size numbers
show the size of the object (width and height).
– If an object is selected, the position numbers show X and Y coordinates of the object
upper left corner and the object size number pair displays the size of the object.
These numbers do not relate to the object itself, but to the selection outline, which is
the smallest possible rectangle that can contain the visible part or parts of an object.

Unsaved changes
Indicates if there are any unsaved changes in the presentation. Clicking on the icon saves
the document. If the presentation has not been saved before, the Save As dialog opens
giving the opportunity to save the presentation.
Digital signatures
Indicates if the presentation has a digital signature.
Text language
Indicates the language used for any text on a presentation.
Fit slide
When this icon is clicked on, the slide in the Workspace zooms to fit in the Workspace.
Zoom slider
When moved, the slide changes its viewing zoom in the Workspace.
Zoom percentage
Indicates the zoom level of the slide displayed in the Workspace. Clicking on zoom
percentage opens the Zoom & View Layout dialog where the settings for zoom factor and
view layout are adjusted.
Navigator
The Navigator displays all objects contained in a presentation providing a convenient way of
moving within a presentation and locating objects in the presentation.
To open the Navigator dialog (Figure 10) go to View > Navigator on the Menu bar
(Ctrl+Shift+F5, macOS ⌘+Shift+F5). Alternatively, click on Navigator in the Sidebar
(Ctrl+Alt+4, macOS ⌘+⌥+4) to open the Navigator deck. This Sidebar deck is similar in
appearance and function as the Navigator dialog.
The Navigator is more useful if slides and objects (pictures, spreadsheets, and so on) are given
meaningful names, instead of leaving them with default names, such as “Slide 1” and “Shape 1”
and so on (as shown in Figure 10). Using meaningful names allows for slides or objects to be
easily identified and located in a presentation.
Figure 10: Navigator dialog

Toolbars
Toolbars provide several tools that are used for creating slides for a presentation. To display or
hide the various toolbars in Impress, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select the
required toolbar from the submenu that appears. For example, Standard and Drawing toolbars
are displayed by default, but Line and Filling, and Text Formatting toolbars are not normally
displayed and have to be selected.
To change tools available on any toolbar, right-click in an empty area on the toolbar and select
Visible Buttons from the context menu. Installed tools are indicated by a check mark next to the
tool name, or the tool icon is highlighted, depending on the computer operating system. Click on
a tool name to hide or show it in the toolbar. For more information, see Chapter 11, Setting Up
and Customizing Impress, Appendix B, Toolbars, and the Getting Started Guide.
Note
The appearance of toolbar icons varies depending on the computer operating
system, and the selection of icon size and style in Tools > Options > LibreOffice
> View (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Options > LibreOffice > View).
For more information about working with toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars and
the Getting Started Guide.
The following toolbars are normally used when creating a presentation:

Standard toolbar
The Standard toolbar (Figure 11) is similar for all LibreOffice modules and is not described
in detail in this user guide. By default, it is docked and positioned below the Menu bar at
the top of the Workspace.
Figure 11: Standard toolbar

Drawing toolbar
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 12) contains all necessary functions for drawing various
geometric and freehand shapes, and for formatting objects in a slide. By default, the
Drawing toolbar is docked and positioned on the left of the Workspace. For more
information on using drawing tools, see Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects.
Figure 12: Drawing toolbar

Line and Filling toolbar
The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 13) provides tools for modifying the properties of a
selected object, for example line color, line style, line width, fill color and style, and other
properties. If the selected object is a text box, the Line and Filling toolbar is automatically
replaced by the Text Formatting toolbar.

Figure 13: Line and Filling toolbar
Text Formatting toolbar
The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 14) is similar to the Formatting toolbar in LibreOffice
Writer and only appears when a text object has been selected in a presentation,
automatically replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
Figure 14: Text Formatting toolbar
Workspace views
The Impress Workspace has four standard views Normal, Outline, Notes, and Slide Sorter.
Each Workspace view is designed to make it easier to complete certain tasks. The different views
can be selected using one of the following methods:
• Click on a tab at the top of the Workspace. If the tabs are not displayed, then go to View
> Views Tab Bar on the Menu bar.
• Go to View on the Menu bar and select a Workspace view from the options in the
submenu.
The Impress Workspace also has three master views available for creating master slides in a
presentation. There are no tabs for master views and are opened by selecting the required option
in View on the Menu bar. The options available are Master Slide, Master Notes, and Master
Handout. For more information on master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide Masters, Styles,
and Templates.
Note
When selected, each Workspace view displays a different set of toolbars
providing a default set of tools for each view.
Normal view
Normal view is the main standard view for creating individual slides in a presentation. In Normal
view slides are designed, text or graphics added and formatted, and any animation effects added
to text or graphics.
To place a slide in Normal view of the Workspace, either click on the slide thumbnail in the Slides
pane, or click on the slide name in the Navigator dialog or Navigator deck in the Sidebar.

Figure 15: Example of Workspace Outline view
Figure 16: Outline toolbar
Outline view
Outline view in the Workspace (Figure 15) displays all the presentation slides as a sequential list.
It shows topic titles, bulleted lists, and numbered lists for each slide in outline format. Only text
contained in the default text boxes in each slide is shown. If text boxes or graphic objects have
been added to the slides, then these objects are not displayed. Slide names are not included.
Outline view can be used for the following:
• Making changes in the text of a slide.
• Adding or deleting text in a slide as in Normal view.
• Moving a paragraph up or down by using the movement arrows on the Outline toolbar
(Figure 16).
• Changing outline level of a paragraph in a slide using the left and right arrow buttons on
the Outline toolbar.
• Comparing slides with an outline, if an outline has been prepared in advance. If another
slide is required, it can be created directly in Outline view, or Normal view.
Notes view
Use Notes view in the Workspace (Figure 17) when adding notes to a slide. Notes are not seen
when the presentation is shown to an audience on an external display connected to a computer.
1) Click on Notes in the Workspace to open Notes view.
2) Select a slide in the Slides pane so that the slide appears in the Workspace.
3) In the text box below the displayed slide, click on the words Click to add notes and enter
the required notes for the selected slide.

Figure 17: Example of Workspace Notes view
Figure 18: Example of Slide Sorter view
Figure 19: Slide View toolbar

The Click to add notes text box can be resized using the resizing handles which appear when the
border of the box is selected. Move or change the size of the box click on and drag a selection
handle on the box border.
When text is inserted in the Click to add notes text box, it is automatically formatted using the
predefined Notes style in Presentation Styles in the Styles deck on the Sidebar. The Notes style
can be formatted to presentation requirements. For more information, see Chapter 8, Adding and
Formatting Slides, and Notes.
Slide Sorter view

The Slide Sorter view in the Workspace (Figure 18) contains thumbnails of each slide used in a
presentation. Use Slide Sorter view to work with one slide or a group of slides.
Customizing Slide Sorter view

1) Go to View > Toolbars > Slide View on the Menu bar to show the Slide View toolbar
(Figure 19).
2) Adjust the number of slides in the Slides per Row box, up to a maximum of 15.

Changing slide order
To change the slide order in a presentation of a single slide or a group of slides using Slide
Sorter view is as follows:
1) Select a slide or a group of slides.
2) Drag and drop the slide or group of slides at the new position in the presentation.
Selecting a slide group

To select a group of slides in Slide Sorter view, use one of the following methods:
• Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) — click on the first slide and, while holding the Ctrl key, select
the required slides. The selected slides do not have to be next to each other.
• Shift key — click on the first slide, and while pressing the Shift key, select the final
slide for the group. This selects all of the slides between the first and the last slide
selected.
• Click and drag — position the cursor slightly to one side and outside the first slide, then
click and hold dragging the cursor until all of the slides required for the group are
selected.
Working in Slide Sorter view

Working with slides in Slide Sorter view is similar to working with slides in the Slides pane. To
make changes, right-click on a slide in Slide Sorter view and choose one of the following
commands from the context menu:
Table 4: Slide Sorter commands
Command Action
Cut Removes the selected slide and saves it to the clipboard.
Copy Copies the selected slide to the clipboard without removing it.
Paste Inserts a slide from the clipboard after the selected slide.
New Slide Adds a new slide after the selected slide.
Creates a duplicate of the selected slide and places the new slide
Duplicate Slide
immediately after the selected slide.
Rename Slide Renames the selected slide.
Hide Slide Any slides that are hidden are not shown in the presentation.
Delete Slide Deletes the selected slide.
Layout Allows changes to the layout of the selected slide.
Move Allows moving or repositioning of the slide in the presentation order.
Creating presentations
By default, Impress opens with the Select a Template dialog displayed to select a template for a
new presentation. To create a new presentation without a template, click on Cancel in the Select
a Template dialog and a blank slide opens in the Workspace and Slides pane.
To prevent the Select a Template dialog from opening by default, go to Tools > Options >
LibreOffice Impress > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress >
General) on the Menu bar to open Options LibreOffice Impress General dialog (Figure 20) and
deselect the option Start with Template Selection.

Figure 20: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — General page
Figure 21: Presentation toolbar

For more information on creating presentations, slide show options, and presentation settings,
see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums and Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing
Impress.
Tip
Decide on the purpose of a presentation and plan accordingly. Having an idea of
audience type, structure, content, and how a presentation is delivered saves a lot
of time from the start.
New presentation
When creating a new presentation, Impress shows only one slide in the Slides pane and
Workspace.
Inserting new slide

A new slide is inserted into a presentation using one of the following methods.
• Go to Slide > New Slide on the Menu bar.
• Right-click in the Slides pane and select New Slide from the context menu.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+M (macOS ⌘+M).
• Go to Slide Sorter view in the Workspace, right-click on a slide and select New Slide
from the context menu.
• Click on New Slide in the Presentation toolbar (Figure 21). If the Presentation toolbar is
not visible, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Presentation from the
submenu.

Note
A new slide is inserted after the selected slide in the presentation. If a slide is not
selected, then the new slide is inserted as the last slide in the presentation.
Duplicating slides
To duplicate a slide, select a slide for duplication in the Slides pane and use one of the following
methods. A duplicate slide is inserted after the selected slide in the presentation.
• Right-click on a slide in the Slides pane and select Duplicate Slide from the context
menu.
• Go to Slide Sorter view in the Workspace, right-click on a slide and select Duplicate
Slide from the context menu.
• Go to Slide > Duplicate Slide on the Menu bar.
• Click on Duplicate Slide on the Presentation toolbar.
Slide format
Click on Properties on the Sidebar and open the Slide panel (Figure 22) to display the format
options available for a presentation. The Slide panel allows for quick formatting of all slides
included in a presentation and selecting master slides for a presentation. For more information on
formatting slides and using master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide Masters, Styles, and
Templates and Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides and Notes.
Slide layout
By default in Impress, the Title Slide layout is used for the first slide when a new presentation is
created. The layouts included in Impress range from a blank slide to a slide with six contents
boxes and a title. For more information on slide layouts, see Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting
Slides, and Notes.
Figure 22: Slide panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

The first slide in a presentation is normally a title slide. The layouts Title Slide, which also
contains a section for a subtitle, or Title Only are the most suitable layouts for the first slide in a
presentation. For the remaining slides, select the most suitable layout to use for the slide
contents.
Impress does not have the functionality to create custom layouts. However, the different
elements in a slide layout can be resized and moved. For more information, see “Modifying slide
elements” on page 35.
Selecting slide layouts

The available layouts are shown in the Layouts panel on the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
After selecting a slide, select the slide layout using one of the following methods:
• Go to the Properties deck on the Sidebar to open the Layouts panel (Figure 23).
• Click on Slide Layout in the Presentation toolbar and open a pop-up dialog displaying
the slide layouts available.
• Click on Slide > Layout on the Menu bar to open a submenu displaying the layouts
available.
• Right-click on the selected slide and select Layouts to open a context menu displaying
the layouts available.
Figure 23: Layouts panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 24: Example slide using content boxes
Note
The icons in the center of a content box allow, if necessary, the insertion of tables,
charts, images, audio, or video into a content box.
Changing slide layout

After selecting a slide in a presentation, change the slide layout using one of the following
methods:
1) Select a slide in the presentation.
2) Select a new layout for the slide using one of the methods available in “Selecting slide
layouts” above.
Slide contents
Several layouts can contain one or more content boxes, as shown by the example in Figure 24.
After selecting a content box, it can be configured to contain the following elements:
Slide title
Click on Click to add Title and type a title in the text box. Impress enters text editing mode
and the Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens. For more information on formatting
text, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
Text
Click on Click to add Text and type the contents into the text box. Impress enters text
editing mode and the Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens. For more information
on formatting text, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
Table
Click on Insert Table in the center of the content box to open the Insert Table dialog.
Enter the number of columns and rows, then click OK. The dialog closes and a table is
inserted into the content box. For more information on inserting tables, see Chapter 3,
Adding and Formatting Text.
Chart
Click on Insert Chart in the center of the content box and the Impress default chart is
placed in the slide. The Chart Type panel opens in the Properties deck on the Sidebar
allowing editing of the chart to the presentation requirements. For more information on
using charts, see Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects.

Image
Click on Insert Image in the center of the content box and a file browser opens. Navigate
to the location of the required image. Select the file and click on Open. The image is
placed into the slide and the file browser closes. The Image panel opens in the Properties
deck on the Sidebar allowing editing of the image file. For more information on using
images, see Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images, and Chapter 7, OLE,
Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects.
Audio or Video
Click on Insert > Audio or Video in the center of the content box and a file browser
opens. Navigate to the location of the required audio or video file. Select the file and click
on Open. The audio or video file is placed into the slide and the file browser closes. The
Media Playback toolbar opens allowing operation of the audio or video file. For more
information, see Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects.
Note
Text and graphic elements can be readjusted at any time when creating a
presentation. However, changing slide layout that already has contents can have
a dramatic effect. If the layout is changed after contents have been added, the
contents are not lost, but they may need to be reformatted.
Modifying slide elements

When a slide is inserted into a presentation, it contains elements that were included in the
selected slide layout. However, it is unlikely that the predefined layouts suit all requirements for a
presentation. Elements required maybe removed or objects inserted such as text and/or
graphics.
Although Impress does not have the functionality to create new layouts, it allows for the resizing
and moving of the slide elements. It is also possible to add slide elements without being limited to
the size and position of content boxes.
Note
It is recommended that changes to slide elements in the layouts included in
Impress are only made using Normal view. Attempting any changes to a slide
element when in Master Slide view is possible, but may result in unpredictable
results and requires extra care as well as a certain amount of trial and error.
Moving contents box

1) Click on the outer frame of the contents box so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Place the cursor on the frame so that the cursor changes shape. This is normally a
clenched hand, but depends on the computer setup and operating system.
3) Click and drag the contents box to its new position on the slide, then release.
Resizing contents box

1) Click on the outer frame so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Place the cursor on a selection handle the frame so that the cursor changes shape.
3) Click and drag the selection handle on the frame to resize the contents box, then release.
– Top and bottom selection handles change the height of a contents box.
– Left and right selection handles change the width of a contents box.
– Corner selection handles change width and height of a contents box.

Removing elements
1) Click a contents box or an element to highlight it and the selection handles are displayed.
2) Press the Delete (macOS Ctrl+D) or Backspace key to remove the contents box or
element.
Adding text
There are two ways of adding text to a slide – contents box or text box. For more information on
text, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
Contents box
Click Click to add Text in the contents box and type the text. Outline styles are
automatically applied to the text as it is inserted. If required, change the outline level of
each paragraph as well as its position within the contents box by switching to Outline
view and using the arrow buttons on the Outline toolbar.
Text box
Click on Insert Text Box on the Standard toolbar or Drawing toolbar to select text mode,
then click on the slide. A text box is created and the Text Formatting toolbar automatically
opens. Type the text and click outside the text box to end text mode.
Adding images or objects

To add images or objects to a slide, for example a picture, clipart, drawing, photograph, or
spreadsheet, click on Insert on the Menu bar and select in the drop-down menu the image or
object type required. For more information on adding objects, see the following chapters:
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects
Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects
Modifying slide appearance

To change the background and other characteristics of all slides in a presentation, the master
slide has to be modified, or a different master slide selected.
A master slide has a specified set of characteristics that acts as a template and is used as the
starting point for creating other slides. These characteristics include slide background, objects in
the background, formatting of any text used, and any background graphics.
Impress has a range of master slides, found in the Master Slides deck on the Sidebar. Additional
master slides can be created or and saved, or added from other sources. See Chapter 2, Using
Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates for information on creating and modifying master slides.
For example, to change the background of an individual slide or a master slide:
1) Right click on a slide or master slide and select Slide Properties from the context menu
to open the Slide Properties dialog (Figure 25).
2) Select Background and then select the type of background to use from None, Color,
Gradient, Bitmap, Pattern, and Hatch.
3) Make a selection from the various properties available for each type of background.
4) Click OK to apply save the changes and close the dialog.

Figure 25: Slide Properties dialog — Background page
Note
Inserting and correctly formatting background is beyond the scope of this chapter.
For more information, see Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
Modifying presentations
By default, a presentation displays all the slides in the same order as they appear in Slide Sorter
view on the Workspace. It is recommended to review the entire presentation before finally
creating and saving the presentation. Run the presentation at least once (see “Running a
presentation” on page 38), then answer the following questions. Also there maybe more
questions after running a presentation for the first time.
• Are the slides in the correct order? If not, position of some of slides has to be changed.
• Is the information well spaced and visible to all members of an audience in a large room?
The audience may not be able to see information at the bottom of a slide, so redesign
the presentation to fit the top three-quarters of a screen.
• Would an additional slide make a particular point clearer? If so, create another slide.
• Are some of the slides unnecessary? Hide or delete the slides not required.
• Would animations help some of the slides? This is considered an advanced technique.
• Should some of the slides have a different slide transition than others? The transition of
those slides should be changed.

Once the questions have been answered, make the necessary changes. Making changes can be
carried out in Slide Sorter view on the Workspace.
Tip
If one or more slides are unnecessary, hide the slide or slides, then view the slide
show again to make sure they are not required. To hide a slide, right-click the
slide in the Slides pane and select Hide Slide from the context menu. Do not
delete a slide until this is done or the slide may have to be created again.
Slide order
Change the slide order in a presentation using one of the following methods:
• In Slide Sorter view, click on the slide that has to be moved and drag it to its new
position in the presentation.
• In the Slides pane, click on the slide that has to be moved and drag it to its new position
in the presentation.
Animations
If animations are going to be added to slides in a presentation, click on Animation on the Sidebar
to open the Animation deck giving access to the various animation options as follows:
Animation category.
Animation effect.
How the animation starts.
Animation direction, duration and delay.
Automatic preview.
Animation is an advanced technique and is beyond the scope of this chapter. For more
information on animation, see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.
Slide transitions
To give a presentation a professional look, it is recommended to add transitions between each
slide in a presentation. Click on Slide Transition on the Sidebar to open the Slide Transition
deck giving access to the various transition options as follows:
Transition type.
Modify the transition.
How the slide advances in the presentation.
Automatic preview.
Adding slide transitions is an advanced technique and is beyond the scope of this chapter. For
more information on slide transitions, see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.
Running a presentation
When a presentation is completed, it is recommended to test run the presentation and make sure
that everything is correct before showing the presentation in front of an audience. To display a
presentation in front of an audience, a Presenter Console is available in LibreOffice Impress.
However, the Presenter Console does require multiple displays to be connected to the computer
for it to function.

Figure 26: Presenter Console
For more information and details about running a presentation and showing it to an audience,
see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.
Single displays
1) Start the slide using one of the following methods:
– Go to Slide Show on the Menu bar and select Start from First Slide from the
submenu or use the keyboard shortcut F5.
– Go to Slide Show on the Menu bar and select Start from Current Slide from the
submenu or use the keyboard shortcut Shift+F5.
2) To display each slide in the presentation during the slide show, use one of the following
methods:
– Press the spacebar to advance to the next slide in the presentation.
– Press the arrow keys to show the next or previous slide in the presentation.
– If the option Change slide by clicking on background has been selected in Slide Show
Settings, position the cursor on the slide and click to move to the next slide.
3) When the slide show has ended or to exit the slide show before it has finished, press the
Esc key to close the slide show and return to Impress.
Multiple displays
When multiple displays are connected to a computer, the Presenter Console (Figure 26) in
LibreOffice Impress becomes available providing extra control over a presentation as follows:
• On multiple displays, the audience sees the current slide in the presentation.

• The current slide, next slide in the presentation, slide notes, and a presentation timer are
displayed on the computer display providing control of how the slide show is presented to
the audience.
• Starting a slide show using Presenter Console and multiple displays is similar to running
a slide show on a single display. For more information and details about using the
Presenter Console, see Chapter 9 Slide Shows & Photo Albums.

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 2,
Master Slides, Styles, and
Templates
Designing a presentation
Designing and planning of a presentation is important. Slide appearance can be changed as the
presentation is developed, but planning ahead saves time in the long run. Before a presentation
is created, it is recommended to create an outline to determine some of the requirements for the
appearance of the slides. For example:
• What color combinations (background and text) look good and also be easy for an
audience to read?
• Would an image help an audience understand the contents better?
• Is there any particular text and image that has to appear on all the slides? For example a
company name and logo.
• Would an audience benefit from having the slides numbered allowing quickly reference to
a slide?
• Is a background graphic or gradient required? If so, select something that does not
interfere or clash with content, such as colors used in charts.
• How many master slides are required?
• Will one slide design suit all presentation content?
What are master slides?

A master slide is a slide that is used as the starting point for creating slides. It is similar to a page
style in LibreOffice Writer as it controls the basic formatting of all slides based on it. A
presentation can have more than one master slide.
Master slides have a defined set of characteristics that are automatically placed onto a slide
being created for a presentation. This may include, for example, background color, graphics, or
gradients. Also objects (for example, logos, decorative lines), headers and footers, placement
and size of text frames, and text formatting can all be included on a master slide.
All characteristics of master slides are controlled by styles. The styles of any new slide created
are inherited from the master slide from which it was created. In other words, the styles of the
master slide are available and applied to all slides created from that master slide. Changing a
style in a master slide results in changes to all the slides based on that master slide. It is,
however, possible to modify each individual slide without affecting the master slide.
Master slides have two types of styles associated with them: presentation styles and drawing
styles. Presentation styles can be modified, but new presentation styles cannot be created.
Drawing styles can be modified and new drawing styles can be created. For more information,
see “Working with styles” on page 61.
Notes
It is recommended to use master slides whenever possible. However, there are
occasions where manual changes are required for a particular slide. For
example, editing a slide to enlarge the chart area when the text and chart layout
is used.

Figure 27: Master Slides deck on Sidebar
Working with master slides

Impress comes with a collection of master slides and these are shown in the Master Slides deck
of the Sidebar (Figure 27). This deck has three panels Used in This Presentation, Recently
Used, and Available for Use. Click the expand marker next to the name of a panel to show
master slide thumbnails, or click the collapse marker to collapse the panel and hide the
thumbnails.
Used in This Presentation
Displays the master slides from a presentation template that are being used in the
presentation that is being created.
Recently Used
Displays the master slides from presentation templates that have been recently used in a
presentation.
Available for Use
Displays the master slides that from the default presentation templates that were installed
with LibreOffice, or installed from other sources. For example, the presentation templates
available on the LibreOffice website at https://www.libreoffice.org/discover/templates-and-
extensions/. For more information on presentation templates, see “Working with
templates” on page 66.
If a new presentation is being created without using a template, then a default template and
default master slide are available (see Chapter 1, Introducing Impress for more information). This
default template and default master slide are a good starting point for creating presentations. An
example of the default master slide is shown in Figure 28.
Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 43

Figure 28: Example of default master slide
Figure 29: Master View toolbar
Figure 30: Rename Master Slide dialog
Creating master slides

1) Go to View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open Master View in the Workspace. The
Master View toolbar also opens (Figure 29). If the Master View toolbar does not open, go
to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Master View.
2) Create a new master slide using one of the following methods and a new master slide
appears in the Slides pane:
– Click on New Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Right-click on a master slide in the Slides pane and select New Master from the
context menu.
– Go to Slide > New Master on the Menu bar.
3) Rename the new master slide using one of the following methods to open the Rename
Slide dialog (Figure 30):
– Click on Rename Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Right-click on the new master slide in the Slides pane and select Rename Master
4) Enter a memorable name for the new master slide in the Name text box, then click on OK
to save the changes and close the dialog.

5) Make sure the new master slide is selected in the Slides pane and add all the text,
graphics and master elements that are required for the new master slide. The chapters in
this user guide give more information on adding, editing, formatting and managing the
different types of objects on a master slide.
6) When finished creating a new master slide, use one of the following methods to return to
Normal View:
– Click on Close Master View on the Master View toolbar.
– Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.
7) Save the presentation file before continuing.
Applying master slides

To apply a master slide to all slides or selected slides in a presentation:
1) Click on Master Slides to open the Master Slides deck on the Sidebar.
2) Right-click on the required master slide in the Used in This Presentation panel in the
Master Slides deck on the Sidebar.
3) Select Apply to All Slides or Apply to Selected Slides from the context menu.
Loading additional master slides

In a presentation, it maybe necessary to mix multiple master slides that belong to different
templates (for more information, see “Working with templates” on page 66). For example, use a
different layout for the first slide of the presentation, or add a slide from a different presentation.
1) Select the slide or slides in the Slides pane where the master slide is to be changed.
2) Go to Slide > Change Slide Master on the Menu bar to open the Available Master Slides
dialog (Figure 31).
Figure 31: Available Master Slides dialog

Figure 32: Load Master Slide dialog
3) To add master slides, click on Load to open the Load Master Slide dialog (Figure 32).
4) In Categories, select the template category to use, then in Templates, select the
template to use for master slides.
5) Click OK to close the Load Master Slide dialog and the master slides from the selected
template appear in the Available Master Slides dialog.
6) Select the master slide required in Select a Slide Design box.
7) To apply the selected master slide to all slides in a presentation, select Exchange
background page.
8) To apply the slide design to selected slides only, deselect Exchange background page.
9) Click OK to apply the selected master slide and close the Available Master Slides dialog.
Editing master slides

The following items can be changed on a master slide:
• Background (color, gradient, hatching, or bitmap) — for more information, see “Selecting
and applying backgrounds” on page 48.
• Background objects (for example, a logo or decorative graphics) — for more information,
see “Adding images” on page 50; Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Pictures; Chapter 5,
Managing Graphic Objects; and Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
• Size and placement of default frames for slide titles and content — for more information,
see “Adding text and fields” on page 56.
• Text attributes for the main text area and notes — for more information, see “Adding text
and fields” on page 56 and Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.

Figure 33: Example of Master Slide View
Figure 34: Slide Properties dialog — Slide page

• Size, placement, and contents of header and footer elements to appear on every slide —
for more information, see “Adding text and fields” on page 56 and Chapter 3, Adding and
Formatting Text.
Editing
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar. This also opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select a master slide for editing in the Slides pane so that it appears in the Workspace
(Figure 33).
3) Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar or right-click in the Workspace and
select Slide Properties from the context menu to open the Slide Properties dialog
(Figure 34).
4) Use the various options in the Slide, Background, Transparency, and Theme pages in
the Slide Properties dialog to make changes to the master slide format.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Slide Properties dialog.

6) Select an object on the master slide, then right-click on the object to open a context
menu.
7) Select one of the options from the context menu to edit the object. Selecting an option
may open another context menu, a dialog, an application or file browser window to make
the necessary changes to a selected object.
8) Click on Close Master View on the Master View toolbar or go to View > Normal on the
Menu bar to exit from editing master slides.
9) Save the presentation file before continuing.
Note
Any changes made to a master slide in Master Slide view appear on all slides
using the same master slide. Always make sure to close Master Slide view and
return to Normal view before working on any of the presentation slides.
Direct formatting
Any changes made directly or manually to any object on a slide in Normal view (for example,
changes to bullet point style, color of the title area, and so on) are not overridden by subsequent
changes made to the master slide used for that slide. However, where it is desirable to revert the
formatting of a directly formatted object on a slide to the style defined in the master slide, select
the object on the slide and use one of the following methods to change the formatting:
• Go to Format > Clear Direct Formatting on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on an object and select Clear Direct Formatting from the context menu.
Note
The title and text boxes inherit the properties of a master slide, but if the position
of these text boxes in the master slide has changed, the layout may appear
corrupted. Some of the layout elements may have to be horizontally and/or
vertically repositioned on a slide.
Selecting and applying backgrounds

Backgrounds can be applied to a number of elements in Impress (for example: slide, default text
area, image and so on). The procedure is similar when applying a background to a master slide,
a slide, or an object on a slide.
Using slide properties

2) Select a master slide in the Slides pane so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar or right-click in the Workspace and
select Slide Properties from the context menu to open the Slide Properties dialog.
4) Select the Background tab to open the Background page on the Slide Properties dialog
(Figure 35).
5) Select the type of background required from Color, Gradient, Image, Pattern and Hatch.
See Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on how to use the
options available for each type of background selected.
6) When satisfied with the slide background, click OK to save the changes and close the
Slide Properties dialog.

Figure 35: Slide Properties dialog — Background Color page
Figure 36: Styles deck on Sidebar
Tip
Custom fills can be created for each type of background. See Chapter 6,
Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on creating custom fills for each
type of background.
Using background style

2) Select a master slide in the Slides pane so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Click on Styles on the Sidebar to open the Styles deck.
4) Click on Presentation Styles on the Styles deck to open the Presentation Styles list
(Figure 36).

5) Right-click on Background style and select Modify from the context menu to open the
Background dialog. This dialog only has an Area tab and offers the same options as the
Background page in the Slide Properties dialog.
6) Select the type of background required from Color, Gradient, Image, Pattern and Hatch.
See Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on how to use the
options available for each type of background selected.
7) When satisfied with the background, click OK to save the changes and close the
Background dialog.
Adding images
When the same image appears on every slide of a presentation, for example a company logo,
the recommended solution is to use a master slide. This saves time creating a presentation and
allows modification or repositioning of the image on all slides. If the same image is added to each
slide manually, modification and repositioning have to be carried out on each individual slide in a
presentation which may create errors. In addition to images, other objects can be added to the
background, for example decorative lines, text, shapes, and company logos.
LibreOffice supports a large number of image and graphic formats. For more information on
working with images, see Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Pictures; Chapter 5, Managing
Graphic Objects; and Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
For example, one of the most common actions in preparing a presentation is to add an image to
the master slide. To insert an image already available on the computer, follow these steps:
2) Select the master slide where the image is to be added.
3) Select Insert > Image on the Menu bar to open the file browser.
4) Navigate to the directory where the image is located and select it.
5) Click Open to close the file browser and the image is placed centrally into the master
slide.
6) Modify and/or reposition the image on the master slide as required.
7) Right-click on the image and select Arrange > Send to Back from the context menu. This
moves the image to the background so that any information added to the slide when
creating a presentation appears over the background image.
Note
LibreOffice can insert an image as a link to a file rather than embedding it in a
presentation. This is useful when a presentation is not intended for distribution
onto other computers and remains in the same directory structure and computer.
For example, creating a presentation on a notebook computer to give a
presentation to a group of clients. However, if the presentation file is to be
distributed to other computers, the image must be embedded to avoid the
“missing image” syndrome when the presentation is used on a different computer.
Default text areas

When a master slide is opened for editing, it contains five default text areas as follows:
Title area for AutoLayouts. Object area for AutoLayouts.
Date area. Footer area.
Slide number area.

Quick positioning and resizing
Click in an area to display the selection handles around the text area. Use the selection handles
to modify the size and position of a text area.
1) Select the text area for repositioning so that the selection handles are visible.
2) Move the cursor toward the border of the text area, not on a selection handle, and the
cursor changes shape. Normally this is a clenched hand, but the shape is dependent on
the computer setup and operating system.
3) Click, hold, and drag the text area to the required position. Release when the text area is
in position.
4) Position the cursor over a left or right selection handle and the cursor changes shape.
5) Click, hold, and drag the left or right selection handle to change the width of the text area.
Release when the text area is at the required width.
6) Position the cursor over a top or bottom selection handle and the cursor changes shape.
7) Click, hold, and drag the top or bottom selection handle to change the height of the
default text area. Release when the text area is at the required height.
8) Position the cursor over a corner selection handle and the cursor changes shape.
9) Click, hold, and drag the corner selection handle to change both the height and width of
the default text area at the same time. Release when the required width and height for the
text area are reached.
Note
The cursor shape usually changes when positioned over a selection handle giving
a clear visual indication of how the text area shape is affected when a selection
handle is moved.
Tip
Keep the Shift key pressed while moving a selection handle to maintain the
width and height dimension ratio of the text area.
Controlled positioning and resizing

To accurately control the shape, size and position of a text area, it is recommended to use the
Position and Size dialog, or the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
1) Select the text area by clicking on its border.
2) Use one of the following methods to access position and size options for a text area:
– Go to Format > Object and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar to open the
Position and Size dialog (Figure 37).
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4 to open the Position and Size dialog.
– Right-click on the border of the text area and select Position and Size from the
context menu to open the Position and Size dialog.
– Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then open the
Position and Size panel (Figure 38).

Figure 37: Position and Size dialog
Figure 38: Position and Size panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Only short descriptions of the most important functions are provided below. For more information
on Position and Size options see the Draw Guide.
Position
Specifies the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) position of the text area. The values represent
the distance of the selected base point from the default position at the top left corner of
the slide.
Base point
Available in the Position and Size dialog only. Allows selection of a point on the
rectangular area surrounding an object and is used when repositioning an object. The
default setting for the Base point is the top left corner means that the top left corner of
the object is used to reposition the rectangular area.
Size
Specifies the width and height of the text area.
Base point
Available in the Position and Size dialog only. Allows selection of a point on the
rectangular text area that does not move while resizing. The default setting of top left
corner means that the position of the top left corner of the text area does not change
during resizing.
Rotation
Rotates the text area. For example, after positioning a footer text area at the side of a
slide then rotate the footer text area by 90 degrees to create a more modern slide layout.
In general, it is preferable to use only horizontal or vertical orientation for ease of editing,
although the program does not impose restrictions on the values that can be used.
Slant & Corner Radius
Adds a corner radius to a text box border. A corner radius is only visible if a visible line
style is selected. Slant options are only available for images or shapes and not text
boxes.
Background
Change the type of area fill used for backgrounds in a default text area using one of the following
methods. The options available depend on the type of area fill selected. See Chapter 6,
Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on changing backgrounds.
Figure 39: Area dialog — Color page

• Go to Format > Object and Shape > Area on the Menu bar to open the Area dialog
(Figure 39).
• Right-click on the text area and select Area from the context menu to open the Area
dialog.
• Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then open the Area
panel (Figure 40).
Figure 40: Area panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Figure 41: Line dialog — Line page

Figure 42: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Border
Change the line type used for borders in a text area using one of the following methods. The
options available depend on the selected line type. See Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects
for more information on changing borders.
• Go to Format > Object and Shape > Line on the Menu bar to open the Line dialog
(Figure 41).
• Right-click on the object and select Line from the context menu to open the Line dialog.
• Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then open the Line
panel (Figure 42).
Alignment
Change the alignment of a text area in relation to its position on a master slide, or the alignment
between a text area and other objects on a master slide using one of the following methods. See
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects for more information on changing alignment of default text
areas.
• Go to Format > Align Objects on the Menu bar and select the type of alignment from
the options available in the context menu.
• Right-click on the object and select Align Objects from the context menu, then select the
type of alignment from the options available in the context menu.
• Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Align Objects on the Line and Filling toolbar and
select the type of alignment from the options available.
• Select the required alignment tool in the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck
on the Sidebar.

Arrangement
Arrange the position of an object on a slide in relation to other objects on a slide using one of the
following methods. See Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects for more information on changing
position of default text areas in relation to other objects.
• Go to Format > Arrange on the Menu bar and select the type of arrangement from the
options available in the context menu.
• Right-click on the object and select Arrange from the context menu, then select the type
of arrangement from the options available in the context menu.
• Click on the required arrangement tool on the left end of the Line and Filling toolbar.
• Select the required arrangement tool in the Position and Size panel on the Properties
deck on the Sidebar.
Adding text and fields

Adding text and fields to a master slide allows placing of information that will appear on all the
slides in a presentation. For example, presentation title, company name and logo, date, and slide
number. For more information on adding and formatting text and fields, see Chapter 3, Adding
and Formatting Text.
Text
Text objects can be placed anywhere on the master slide and will appear on every slide in a
presentation. Text objects can also be placed in the footer if the default fields in the footer of a
presentation are not going to be used.
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open the master slide view. This also
opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select the master slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Switch text editing mode on using one of the following methods. The Text Formatting
toolbar (Figure 43) automatically opens replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Select Insert Text Box on the Standard or Drawing toolbar.
– Go to Insert > Text Box on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F2.
4) Click once on the master slide so that a text box is created and there is a flashing cursor
inside the text box.
5) Type or paste the text into the text object, then format the text. See Chapter 3, Adding and
Formatting Text for more information.

6) Click outside the text object to close the Text Formatting toolbar and reopen the Line and
Filling toolbar.

7) Click Close Master View on the Master View toolbar or go to View > Normal on the
Menu bar when adding and formatting text to a master slide is completed.
Default footer sections

By default, a slide footer consists of three sections with each section containing a default field as
follows:
Left section
Date and time, labelled Date Area. Field name is <date/time>.
Centre section
Footer text, labelled Footer Area. Field name is <footer>. This section is used for the
presentation title, file name and so on.
Right section
Slide number, labelled Slide Number Area. Field name is <number>.
Header and Footer dialog

The default footer fields are set up using the Header and Footer dialog (Figure 44). The following
procedure is an example for creating footer fields:
3) Go to Insert > Header and Footer on the Menu bar to open the Header and Footer
dialog.
4) Select Date and Time for the date and time to appear in the left section of the footer.
– For a fixed date and time in the left footer section, select Fixed and enter the date to
use in the text box.
Figure 44: Header and Footer dialog

– For a variable date and time in the left footer section, select Variable, then select the
format and language to use from the Format and Language drop down lists. Using a
variable date and time means that each time the presentation is opened, the date and
time are updated.
5) To place text in the footer centre section, select Footer and then type or paste the
required text into the Footer text box.
6) To place the slide number in the right section of the footer, select Slide number.
7) If the footer is not going to appear on the first slide of a presentation, select Do not show
on the first slide. The first slide is normally the title slide of a presentation.
8) Click Apply to save the changes and close the Header and Footer dialog.
9) To format the text used for the footer fields, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for
more information.
Menu bar when setting up the footer fields is completed.
Note
It is possible to format, resize, and reposition footer sections. See “Default text
areas” on page 50 and Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for more
information.
Custom footer sections

The default fields in a footer section can be replaced with text or manual fields as follows:
3) Highlight the default field in the footer section and press the Delete or Backspace key.
A flashing text cursor appears in the footer section and the Text Formatting toolbar
automatically opens replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
4) Type in the text or insert a manual field into the footer section. For more information on
manual fields, see “Manual fields” below.
5) Format the text or manual field placed in the footer section. See Chapter 3, Adding and
Formatting Text for more information.
6) Click outside the footer section to close the Text Formatting toolbar and reopen the Line
and Filling toolbar.
Menu bar when setting up a custom footer section is completed.
Manual fields
Manual fields, for example date or slide number, can be added as text objects on a master slide
or replace one of the default footer fields. The fields used in Impress are as follows:
• Date (fixed).
• Date (variable) – updates automatically each time the presentation is opened.
• Time (fixed).
• Time (variable) – updates automatically each time the presentation is opened and each
time a slide is opened more than once during a presentation.

• Author – first and last names listed in the LibreOffice user data.
• Slide number.
• Slide Title.
• Slide Count.
• File Name.
Inserting field
3) Click anywhere on the master slide without selecting an object.
4) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select the required field from the context menu.
By default, the field is placed in the centre of the master slide.
5) Reposition the field text box to the desired position on the master slide. See “Default text
areas” on page 50 for more information.
6) Format the text placed in a field, see Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Text for more
information.
Menu bar when inserting a field is completed.
Replacing default fields

1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open the master slide view.
3) Highlight all of the characters used in the default field being replaced in the footer.
4) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select the required field from the context menu.
5) Format the text placed in the field, see Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Text for more
information.
Menu bar when replacing the default footer fields is completed
Tip
To change the number format (1, 2, 3 or a, b, c or i, ii, iii, and so on) for the slide
number, go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar to open the Slide
Properties dialog. In Layout Settings, select the number format to use from the
Slide numbers drop down list.
Master slide color themes

Color themes can be created as follows and used for Impress master slides. A color theme is
applied to text and changes the background color, text color, and accents to make text readable
against a background.
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open the master slide view.
2) Select a master slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar to open the Slide Properties dialog
(Figure 45).

Figure 45: Slide Properties dialog — Theme page
4) Click on the Theme tab to open the Theme page.
5) In General, enter a name for the color theme being created in the Name text box.
6) In Color Set, enter a name for the color set being created in the Name text box.
7) Click on the triangle ▼ and select a color from the available color palettes or create a
custom color for the required options for Background, Text, Accent, Hyperlink and
Followed Hyperlink.
8) Click on OK to save the color theme and close the Slide Properties dialog.
Note
When specifying custom colors for the Accent options, make sure the colors are
dark enough so that light text is still readable when the custom colors are applied.
The options available on the Theme page of the Slide Properties dialog are as follows:
General
Specifies a name for this master page theme.
Color Set
Specifies a name for the color set being created.
Background — Dark 1 and Dark 2
Specifies the first and second dark colors to be used as dark background.

Text — Light 1 and Light 2
Specifies the first and second light colors to be used as light text.
Accent 1 thru Accent 6
Specifies of up to six custom colors. These are typically dark enough so that light text is
readable when the custom colors are used as background colors.
Hyperlink
Specifies the color used for non-followed hyperlinks.
Followed Hyperlink
Specifies the color used for when a hyperlink has been selected and followed.
Working with styles

A style is a set of formats that are applied to selected elements such as slides, text, lists, frames,
borders, lines and area fills in a presentation. Applying a style means applying a group of formats
at the same time providing a consistent look to a presentation. For example, to manually change
an attribute on the same object type on every slide in a presentation is time consuming and
prone to errors. Using styles reduces time and provides greater accuracy.
Impress has two types of styles available for formatting text and graphic objects – presentation
styles and drawing styles.
• For information on formatting text, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
• For information on formatting graphic objects, see Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects
and the Draw Guide.
• More information on styles used in LibreOffice can be found in the Getting Started Guide.
Note
The presence of text and title styles both in the presentation and drawing styles
may seem confusing. This duplication is required because Impress uses special
text boxes (auto layout boxes) when adding structured text to slides using
presentation styles. The title and other text styles in drawing styles are used on
any other text boxes, or text associated with shapes or lines.
Presentation styles
Presentation styles in Impress are used when creating a presentation using one of the Impress
slide layouts. These presentation styles are divided into four categories.
Background and Background objects
Used to format objects on the default master slide such as icons, decorative lines, and
shapes.
Notes
Formats the text used in presentation notes.
Outline 1 thru Outline 9
Used for the different levels of the outline to which they belong. For example, Outline 2 is
used for the sub-points of Outline 1, Outline 3 is used for the sub-points of Outline 2 and
so on.
Subtitle and Title
Formats the text used for any titles or subtitles used on slides.

Note
As with the Heading styles in Writer, the Outline styles in Impress are
hierarchically linked. For example, changing an attribute in the Outline 1 style
cascades through all the other styles for Outline levels.
The default master slide and slide layouts in Impress use auto layout boxes. Presentation styles
can only be used within these auto layout boxes. An example of text using these presentation
styles is shown in Figure 28 on page 44.
Presentation styles cannot be created or deleted, but can be formatted, modified or updated to
the presentation requirements. Also, the presentation style used for an object cannot be changed
to another presentation style. For example, text using Outline 2 style cannot be changed to
Outline 3 style.
Notes
Normal view is used for changing outline levels using the Tab key or Shift+Tab
key combination, or the Promote and Demote tools on the Outline toolbar. See
Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for more information.
Any text added to a slide using text tools is automatically placed in a standard text
box and allocated the Default Drawing Style from Drawing Styles. For more
information on formatting text, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
Drawing styles
Drawing styles in Impress define the characteristics of graphic and text objects placed on a slide.
These styles include attributes for line, area, shadowing, transparency, text, connectors and
dimensioning.
For example, when creating organization charts in a presentation, create objects with a
consistent appearance, such as line style, font type, shadow, and so on. The easiest way to
achieve this is to use a drawing style for the objects and apply it to each object. The benefit is
that if there is a change to the background color of objects for example, all that is required is to
modify the style rather than each individual object.
Drawing styles included with Impress cannot be deleted, but can be formatted, modified, and
updated. New or custom drawing styles can be created, see “Custom styles” on page 64. Any
custom style created is only available in the presentation where it was created.
Accessing styles
Use one of the following methods to access styles available in Impress.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F11 (macOS ⌘+T) and open the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
• Go to Format > Styles on the Menu bar and select an option from the submenu that
opens.
• Click on Show the Styles Sidebar (F11) (macOS Show the Styles Sidebar (⌘+T)) on
the Line and Filling toolbar and open the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
• Click on Styles on the Sidebar to open the Styles deck.

Figure 46: Example dialog for formatting Title style
Editing styles
Formatting presentation and drawing styles is carried out in either Normal or Master Slide view.
Formatting options are available in dialogs for each style or using Format on the Menu bar. For
more information on formatting text and objects, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text and
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
Dialog formatting
1) Select an object on a slide or master slide and its style is highlighted in the Styles deck on
the Sidebar.
2) Go to Format > Styles > Edit Style on the Menu bar, or right-click on the highlighted
style in the Styles deck on the Sidebar to open the formatting dialog for the selected style.
An example dialog for the Title style is shown in Figure 46.
3) Use the various options available in the tabbed pages of the dialog to format the style.
4) Click OK to save the formatting changes and close the dialog.
Note
Clicking on Reset before clicking OK removes all formatting changes made in the
style formatting dialog.
Format menu
1) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar. See “Accessing styles” on page 62 for more
information.

2) Click on Presentation Styles or Drawing Styles at the top left of the Styles deck and
select a style from the displayed list.
3) Go to Format on the Menu bar to open a submenu with various formatting options
available. Depending on the object selected, some formatting options will not be available
and are greyed out.
4) Select a formatting option from the submenu. Depending on the option selected, another
submenu may open giving further formatting options or a formatting dialog opens.
Modifying
information.
select a style from the displayed list.
3) Right-click on the style selected and select Modify from the context menu to open the
formatting dialog for the style selected.
4) Make the necessary changes to the selected style using the various options available in
the dialog that has opened.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.
Updating
Updating a presentation or drawing style is similar to modifying, but changes to the text or object
are carried out first. Updating styles can only be carried out in Normal view.
1) Select the text or object on a slide in Normal view.
2) Use the various tools on the Text Formatting toolbar, Line and Filling toolbar, or the
options in Format on the Menu bar to format the selected object.
information.
select a style from the displayed list. The style used for the selected object is already
highlighted.
5) Click on Update Style at the top right of the Styles deck and the style is updated to
include the formatting changes made to the selected object.
Custom styles
In Impress, only custom drawing styles can be created. Custom presentation styles cannot be
created. When a custom drawing style is created, it is only available for the presentation being
created.
1) Create or select an object on a slide to create a custom drawing style.
2) Format the object to the presentation requirements using the various formatting options
available in the Text Formatting toolbar, Line and Filling toolbar, or the options in Format
on the Menu bar.
information.
4) Click on Drawing Styles at the top left of the Styles deck to open the drawing styles list.
5) Click on New Style from Selection at the top right of the Styles deck and the New Style
from Selection dialog opens (Figure 47).

Figure 47: New Style from Selection dialog
6) Enter a name for the custom drawing style in the Enter new style name text box.
7) Click OK to close the New Style from Selection dialog. A custom drawing style is created
and appears in the drawing styles list in the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
Direct formatting
Direct formatting overrides any formatting applied to an object when a style is used. Direct
formatting cannot be removed from an object by applying a style to it. To remove any direct
formatting, select the object so that the selection handles are visible, then use one of the
following methods to clear any direct formatting:
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+M (macOS Shift+M).
• Go to Format > Clear Direct Formatting in the Menu bar.
• If the object is a text object, highlight the text and click on Clear Direct Formatting on
the Text Formatting toolbar.
• If the object is a text object, highlight the text, right-click on the selected text and select
Clear Direct Formatting from the context menu.
Linked styles
Impress styles support linking or inheritance. This allows a style to be linked to another (parent)
style so that it inherits all the formatting settings of the parent, creating families of styles.
For example, for multiple boxes that are identically formatted, but only differ in color, define a
style for the box including borders, area fill, font, and so on. Then create a number of styles that
are hierarchically dependent, but differ only in the fill color attribute. For example, if the font size
or the thickness of the border needs to be changed, only change the parent style and all the
other linked (child) styles change accordingly.
Assigning styles keyboard shortcuts

LibreOffice provides a set of predefined keyboard shortcuts allowing quick application of styles
while working with a presentation. These shortcuts can be redefined or custom shortcuts created.
For more information, see Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts and the Getting Started Guide.

Figure 48: Select a Template dialog
Working with templates

A template is used as a starting point when creating presentations. For example, create a
template for business presentations so that new presentations have the company logo, name
and information on the first slide and the remaining presentation slides only show the company
logo and name. For more information on templates and how to use them, see the Getting Started
Guide.
Templates can contain anything that presentations can contain, such as text, graphics, a set of
styles, and user-specific setup information such as measurement units, language, default printer,
and toolbar and menu customization.
All document types created using LibreOffice are based on templates. Specific templates can be
created for any document type (text, spreadsheet, drawing, presentation). If a template is not
specified when creating a new document, then the default template for that type of document is
used. The default templates are installed with LibreOffice and can be changed, see “Setting
default template” on page 68 for more information.
Impress normally starts with the Select a Template dialog (Figure 48), unless one of the options
Start with Template Selection in the Options LibreOffice dialog, or Show this dialog at startup in
the Template dialog have been turned off.
When creating a presentation and the template dialog is active, several templates are available
as a starting point for a presentation. If Select a Template dialog is turned off for new
presentations, LibreOffice uses the LibreOffice default template for presentations. For more
information on the presentation default template, see “Setting default template” on page 68.

LibreOffice presentation templates
Impress comes with a set of predefined templates. These templates only contain backgrounds
and background objects, providing a starting point to create presentations, or templates.
Any templates created are located in the My Templates folder after the template has been saved
as a presentation template. These templates appear in the LibreOffice startup window and the
Select a Template dialog the next time LibreOffice is started.
Use one of the following methods to create a new presentation using a template:
• Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Templates in LibreOffice start up window and then
select Impress Templates from the context menu to display the available presentation
templates. Select a template and a new presentation opens.
• Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar to open the Templates dialog (this dialog
is similar to the Select a Template dialog). Select Presentations from the Filter
drop-down list to display presentation templates. Select a presentation template and click
OK. The dialog closes and a new presentation opens.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N) to open the
Templates dialog (this dialog is similar to the Select a Template dialog). Select
Presentations from the Filter drop-down list to display presentation templates. Select a
presentation template and click OK. The dialog closes and a new presentation opens.
Creating templates
1) Open a presentation or presentation template as a starting point for a new template.
2) Add and format the content and styles as required for the new presentation template.
3) Go to File > Templates > Save As Template on the Menu bar to open the Save as
Template dialog (Figure 49).
4) Enter a name for the new template in the Enter Template Name text box.
5) Select a template category for the new template.
Figure 49: Save As Template dialog

6) If required, select the option Set as default template to use as the default template the
next time LibreOffice is opened and no template is selected. See “Setting default
template” below for more information.
7) Click on Save to save the new template and close the Save as Template dialog. The
template appears in the LibreOffice startup window and the Select a Template dialog the
next time LibreOffice is started.
Note
When saving a new template, it is important to save the template in one of the
categories given in the Save as Template dialog. This allows LibreOffice to find
the new template and use it for creating new presentations.
Setting default template

If a new presentation is being created and no template is selected, LibreOffice creates the
presentation from the default Impress template. This is normally a blank template. However, any
presentation template can be set as the default template. The template has to be located in a
category displayed in the Save as Template dialog so that LibreOffice can find it. The default
template can always be reset to the original LibreOffice default template.
Changing default template

1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog. The Templates dialog is similar to the Select a Template
dialog.
2) Select the template to use as the default LibreOffice presentation template.
3) Right-click on the selected template and select Set as Default from the context menu.
4) Click on Open and a new presentation opens using the new default template and sets the
default presentation template in LibreOffice. The next time a new presentation is created
and a template is not selected, the presentation is created using the new default
presentation template.
Note
The new default template is indicated in the Templates dialog. The icon indicating
the default template depends on computer setup and computer operating system.
Resetting default template

bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Select the presentation template that is indicated as the default presentation template in
the Select a Template dialog.
3) Right-click on the template and select Reset Default from the context menu.
4) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog. The next time that a new presentation is
created and a template is not selected, the presentation is created using the original
default LibreOffice presentation template.
Editing templates

2) Right-click on the template to be edited and select Edit from the context menu and the
template opens in Impress in read only mode.
3) Click on Edit Document at the top of the Workspace to start editing the template.
4) Make the necessary formatting changes to the styles, text and/or objects on the selected
template.
5) Go to File > Save on the Menu bar or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+S (macOS ⌘+S)
to save the changes.
6) Close the template or create a presentation using the edited template.
Notes
Any presentation created from the template before editing can be updated to
show the changed template settings the next time the presentation is opened. A
confirmation dialog opens asking if the updated styles are to be used or keep the
old styles. If keep the old styles is selected, then the presentation continues to
use the old styles without any confirmation.
When editing templates, it is recommended NOT to edit and save templates
supplied and installed with LibreOffice. Editing and saving these LibreOffice
templates may cause problems with presentations that already use one of these
templates.
Organizing templates
LibreOffice can only use templates that are in LibreOffice template categories (template folders).
New LibreOffice template categories can be created and used to organize LibreOffice templates.
For example, separate template categories for different projects or clients. Templates can also be
imported and exported.
Tip
The location of folders used LibreOffice template categories varies with computer
operating systems. To learn where the template folders are stored on a computer,
go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Paths (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice > Paths).
Creating custom categories

2) Click on Manage at the top right of the Template dialog and select New Category from
the context menu.
3) Enter a category name in Enter new category name box in the New Category dialog that
opens.
4) Click OK to save the new category and the category appears in the Filter drop-down list
for categories at the top of the Select a Template dialog.
Deleting custom categories

2) Select the custom category for deletion from the drop-down list of categories at the top of
the Templates dialog.

Figure 50: Select Category dialog
3) Click on Manage at the top right of the Template dialog and select Delete Category from
the context menu.
4) Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the custom category.
Note
Template categories supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension
Manager cannot be deleted. Only custom template categories can be deleted.
Moving templates
2) Right-click on the template that is going to be moved and select Move from the context
menu.
3) In the Select Category dialog (Figure 50), select a category from the displayed list of
categories, or select Create a New Category to create a new category for the template.
4) Click OK to move the template to its new category and close the Select Category dialog.
Note
Only custom templates can be moved between template categories. Templates
supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager cannot be
moved.
Deleting templates
2) Right-click on the template being deleted and select Delete from the context menu.
3) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.

Note
Templates supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager
cannot be deleted. Only templates that have been created in Impress or imported
from other sources can be deleted.
Renaming templates
2) Right-click on the template being renamed and select Rename from the context menu.
3) Enter a new template name in the text box that has opened, then click on OK to save the
new template name.
Note
Templates supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager
cannot be renamed. Only templates that have been created in Impress or
imported from other sources can be renamed.
Importing templates
If a template is in a different location on the computer, then the template must be imported into a
LibreOffice category for LibreOffice to recognize the template.
2) Click on Manage at the top right of the Template dialog and select Import from the
context menu to open the Select Category dialog.
3) Select a category from the displayed list or select Create a New Category in the Select
Category dialog.
4) In the file browser window that opens, navigate to the folder where the template is located
on the computer.
5) Select the template and click Open. The file browser window closes and the template
appears in the selected category.
Exporting templates
2) Right-click on the template being exported and select Export from the context menu.
3) Navigate to the folder where the template is to be exported to and click on OK. The
template is exported to the selected location and the file browser window closes.

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 3,
Adding and Formatting Text
Introduction
Any text used in slides is contained in text boxes and this chapter describes the following:
• Creating, modifying, using, and deleting text boxes.
• Creating, modifying and formatting the various types of text that can be inserted.
• Inserting ordered (numbered) or unordered (bulleted) lists, tables, fields, hyperlinks, and
text columns.
Working with text boxes

Adding text boxes to slides is carried out using one of the following methods:
• Use a predefined Impress layout which includes AutoLayout text boxes.
• Create a text box using Insert Text Box for a horizontally aligned text box on the
Standard toolbar (Figure 51) or the Drawing toolbar (Figure 52).
• Create a text box using Insert Vertical Text for a vertically aligned text box on the
Standard toolbar or the Drawing toolbar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F2 to create text boxes for horizontal text.
Note
The Insert Vertical Text tool for creating a vertical text box and inserting vertical
text is only available when Asian and Complex text layout (CTL) options are
enabled. Go to Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages on the
Menu bar (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language Settings >
Languages) and select these options for vertical text to be available in Impress.
AutoLayout text boxes

AutoLayout text boxes are automatically created when one of the slide layouts available in
Impress is selected.
1) Make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide layout using one of the following methods:
– Open the Layouts panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 53)
– Go to Slide > Layout on the Menu bar to open a submenu listing the available slide
layouts.


3) Click on Click to add Title or Click to add Text. This text automatically disappears and is
replaced by a flashing text cursor. The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 54) automatically
opens replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
4) Type or paste text into the AutoLayout text box and, if necessary, format the text to the
presentation requirements.
5) If necessary, copy, resize, and/or reposition the AutoLayout text box.
6) Click outside the AutoLayout text box to deselect it.
Note
AutoLayout text boxes can be moved, resized and deleted in the same way as
text boxes. See “Positioning with cursor” on page 79, “Text positioning” on
page 85, and “Deleting text boxes” on page 88 for more information.
Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 75

Creating text boxes
1) For horizontal text, click on Insert Text Box, or for vertical text, click on Insert Vertical
Text on the Standard toolbar or the Drawing toolbar. The Text Formatting toolbar
automatically opens, replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
2) Create a horizontal text box using one of the following methods:
– Click in the slide and a text box is automatically created with the text cursor flashing in
a single line text box. The text box increases in width as text is entered in a single line
and the text box height does not change. To create multiple lines and increase the
height, use the Enter key to create new single line paragraphs within the text box.
– For multiple line text boxes, click and drag the cursor on the slide to set the width of
the text box. As text is entered, the height of a text box automatically increases as
text wraps creating multiple line paragraphs in the text box.
3) Create a vertical text box using one of the following methods:
– Click in the slide and a text box is automatically created with the text cursor flashing in
a single line text box. The text box increases in height as text is entered in a single
line and the text box width does not change. To create multiple lines and increase the
width, use the Enter key to create new single line paragraphs within the text box.
– For multiple line text boxes, click and drag the cursor on the slide to set the height of
the text box. As text is entered, the width of a text box automatically increases as text
wraps creating multiple line paragraphs in the text box.
4) Type or paste the text into the text box.
5) Click outside the text box to deselect it.
Text box borders

By default, when an AutoLayout text box or a text box is created, the borders of the text box are
only displayed when the text box is selected. Use one of the following methods to create a visible
border around the text box.
Note
When creating a text box border, if the properties of the line style selected are
changed using the Line dialog, then the properties are also changed in the Line
and Filling toolbar, and the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

1) Click on a text box to select and the border is displayed indicating that the text box is in
edit mode.
2) In Line Style on the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 55), select a line style from the
drop-down list to use as a text box border. If the Line and Filling toolbar is not visible, go
to View > Toolbars > Line and Filling on the Menu bar.
3) In Line Width on the Line and Filling toolbar, enter a width for the line style selected for
the text box border.
4) In Line Color on the Line and Filling toolbar, select a color from one of the available color
palettes, or create a custom color.
5) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Line dialog
1) Click on a text box to select it so that the border is displayed indicating that the text box is
in edit mode.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 56) using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the text box border and select Line from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Line on the Menu bar.
– Click on Line to open the Line page.
3) In Style, select a line style from the drop-down list to use as a text box border.
4) In Color, select a color for the line style from one of the available color palettes, or create
a custom color.
5) In Width, enter a width for the line style selected.
6) If necessary, in Transparency, enter a percentage value for the line style.
7) If necessary, in Corner Style, select the type of corner style from the options in the
drop-down list.

Figure 57: Example of text box rounded corners

8) Click OK to save the changes and close the Line dialog.
Note
For a corner style to be clearly visible in a text box border, it is recommended to
set the line width at a thickness above 0.35cm, as shown by the example in
Figure 57.
Line panel in Sidebar

1) Click on a text box to select it so that the border is displayed indicating that the text box is
in edit mode.
2) Click on Properties to open the Properties deck in the Sidebar, then click on Line to open
the Line panel (Figure 58).
3) In Line, select a line style from the drop-down list to use as a text box border.
4) In Width, enter a width for the line style selected.
5) In Color, select a color for the line style from one of the available color palettes, or create
a custom color.

Figure 59: Example of positioning text boxes
6) If necessary, in Transparency, enter a percentage value for the line style.
Positioning and resizing text boxes

Positioning with cursor
1) Click in the text box to select it so that the border is displayed indicating that the text box
is in edit mode.
2) Move the cursor over the border and the cursor changes shape to the move cursor for the
computer operating system (for example, a hand).
3) Click on the border and drag it to move the text box. A dashed outline of the text box
shows where the text box will be placed as shown in Figure 59.
4) Release the cursor when the text box is in the required position.
Resizing with cursor

1) Click in the text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating that
the text box is in edit mode.
2) Move the cursor over a selection handle and the cursor changes shape indicating the
direction the text box will be resized.
3) Click on a selection handle and drag it to resize the text box. A dashed outline appears
indicating the new size of the text box as it is being resized, as shown in Figure 60. The
selection handles are used to resize the text box as follows:
– Corner handles change the width and height of the text box simultaneously.
– Top and bottom selection handles change the height of the text box.
– Right and left selection handles change the width of the text box.

Figure 60: Example of resizing text boxes
4) Release the cursor when the text box is at the required size.
Note
To maintain the proportions of a text box while resizing, press and hold the Shift
key, then click on a selection handle and drag it. Make sure to release the cursor
before releasing the Shift key.
Position and Size dialog

For more accurate control over the size and position of an AutoLayout text box, or text box, it is
recommended to use the Position and Size dialog (Figure 61).
2) Open the Position and Size dialog using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the text box border and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
3) Click on Position and Size to open the Position and Size page.
4) Use the various options available on the Position and Size page to position the text box.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Position and Size dialog.

The options available on the Position and Size page are as follows:
Position
Position X
Specify the horizontal position of the text box. The position values of the text box
represent the distance of the Base point to the top left corner of the slide.
Position Y
Specify the vertical position of the text box. The position values of the text box
represent the distance of the Base point to the top left corner of the slide.
Base point
Position the text box by selecting one of the nine available positions. By default, the
Base point is the top left corner of the text box.
Size
Width
Specify the width of the text box. To maintain the width/height ratio of the text box,
select Keep ratio. The size values represent the distance of the Base point relative to
the top left corner of the slide.
Height
Specify the height of the text box. To maintain the width/height ratio of the text box,
select Keep ratio. The size values represent the distance of the Base point relative to
the top left corner of the slide.
Base point
Position the text box by selecting one of the nine available positions. By default, the
Base point is the top left corner of the text box.

Protect
Prevent modification of the position or size of the text box by selecting Position and/or
Size options.
Adapt
Allow the text box to adjust its height and/or width as text is entered by selecting Fit width
to text and/or Fit height to text.
Position and Size on Sidebar

For more accurate control over the size and position of a text box, the Position and Size panel
in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 62) can also be used. However, there are fewer
options available in the Position and Size panel on the Sidebar than in the Position and Size
dialog.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then click on Position
and Size to open the Position and Size panel.
3) Specify measurement values in the Position X (horizontal) and Position Y (vertical) boxes
to position of the text box on the slide. The position values of the text box represent the
distance between the top left of the text box to the top left corner of the slide.
4) Specify measurement values in the Width and Height boxes to adjust the size of the text
box. To maintain the width/height ratio of the text box, select Keep ratio.
5) When satisfied with the changes, click outside the text box to save the changes and exit
edit mode.

Figure 63: Example of rotating a text box
Rotating text boxes

Using the cursor
1) Click in the text box border to select it so that the selection handles are displayed
indicating that the text box is in edit mode.
2) Click again on the text box border and the selection handles change shape and color, as
shown by the example in Figure 63. A rotation centre appears in the centre of the text
box.
3) Move the cursor over a corner selection handle and the cursor changes shape to indicate
rotation.
4) Click on a corner selection handle and drag it to rotate the text box. A ghosted image of
the text box appears as the text box is being rotated.
5) Release the cursor when the text box has reached the desired rotation angle.
6) If necessary, click and drag the rotation centre to a different position to change the
rotation angle. The rotation centre can be positioned outside of the text box.

For more accurate control over the size and position of an AutoLayout text box or text box, it is
recommended to use the options available on the Rotation page of the Position and Size dialog
(Figure 64).
menu.
3) Click on Rotation to open the Rotation page.
4) In Pivot Point, if required, enter a measurement for Position X and/or Position Y to move
the position of the pivot point.

Figure 64: Position and Size dialog — Rotation page
5) Alternatively, select a pivot point from one of the 9 positions in Default settings.
6) In Rotation Angle, enter the number of degrees for rotation in the Angle text box.
7) Alternatively, in Default settings, click on the rotation angle indicator and drag it to a new
angle. The angle of rotation is displayed in the Angle text box.
8) Click OK to save the changes and to close the Position and Size dialog.
Position and Size panel on Sidebar

2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then click on Position
and Size to open the Position and Size panel (Figure 62 on page 82).
3) In Rotation, enter the number of degrees for rotation in the text box.
4) Alternatively, in Rotation, click on the rotation angle indicator and drag it to a new angle.
The angle of rotation is displayed in the text box.
Corner radius
The Corner Radius option in the Slant & Corner Radius page of the Position and Size dialog
(Figure 65) is only available when a text box has a border. See “Text box borders” on page 76 for
more information on creating text box borders.

Figure 65: Position and Size dialog — Slant & Corner Radius page
Note
The options Slant, Corner Point 1, and Corner Point 2 on the Slant & Corner
Radius page of the Position and Size dialog are not available for text box
borders.
2) Make sure that the text box has a visible border.
menu.
4) Click on Slant & Corner Radius to open the Slant & Corner Radius page.
5) In Corner Radius, enter a measurement in the Radius text box to change the radius of
the corners on the text box.
6) Click OK to save the changes and to close the Position and Size dialog.
Text positioning
1) Click in an AutoLayout text box or text box to select it so that the selection handles are
displayed indicating that the text box is in edit mode.
2) Right-click in the AutoLayout text box or text box and select Text Attributes from the
context menu to open the Text dialog (Figure 66).
3) Use the various options on the Text page to position the text within the text box.

Figure 66: Text dialog — Text page
The options available in the Text dialog are as follows:
Drawing Object Text
Fit width to text
Width of the text box is automatically adjusted to the width of the text.
Fit height to text
Height of the text box is automatically adjusted to the height of the text.
Fit to frame
Text width and height are adjusted to match the width and height of the text box.
Spacing to Borders
Creates margins around the text within the text box.
Text Anchor
Sets the anchor point for the text within the text box. When the Full width option is
selected, the text is automatically positioned in the centre of the text box.
Text animation
Text within an AutoLayout text box or a text box can be animated using the options available in
the Text Animation page in the Text dialog. For more information on the text animation effects,
see Chapter 9, Slide Shows.
Text columns
Text within an AutoLayout text box or a text box can be placed into columns using the options
available in the Text Columns page in the Text dialog (Figure 67), or the Columns panel in
Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 68).

Figure 67: Text dialog — Text Columns page
Figure 68: Columns panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Figure 69: Example of columns in text box

2) Right-click in the text box and select Text Attributes from the context menu to open the
Text dialog.
3) Click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page in the Text dialog, or click on
Columns in Properties on the Sidebar to open the Columns panel.
4) Set the number of columns required in the Number of columns box and the required
spacing between the columns in the Spacing box. An example of columns in a text box is
shown in Figure 69.
5) Save the changes and deselect the text box using one of the following methods:
– On the Text dialog, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog, then click
outside the text box to deselect it.

– On the Columns panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click outside the text
box to deselect it and save the changes.
Note
When text columns are inserted into an AutoLayout text box, or text box, the
whole of the text box has to be used for columns. A mixture of text columns and
plain text cannot be used together in a text box.
Deleting text boxes

1) Click in the text box to select it so that the border and selection handles are displayed
indicating that the text box is in edit mode.
2) Press the Delete or Backspace key to delete the text box.
Inserting text
Pasting text
Text can be inserted into an AutoLayout text box, or text box by copying from another document
and pasting into the text box. However, the text will probably not match the formatting of the
surrounding text or other slides in the presentation. It is recommended to make sure that the
presentation style is consistent and does not become a patchwork of different styles, font types,
bullet points, and so on.
Tip
It is good practice to paste text into a text box without formatting and apply the
formatting later. This reduces the risk of errors in a presentation.
Unformatted text
1) In another document or slide, highlight and copy the text.
2) Create a text box on a slide and make sure the text cursor is flashing in the text box. See
“Opening Impress” on page 18 for more information.
3) Paste unformatted text at the cursor position in a selected text box using one of the
following methods.
– Go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Unformatted Text on the Menu bar.
– Click on the triangle ▼to the right of Paste on the Standard toolbar and select
Unformatted text from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+V (macOS ⌘+Shift+V) and select Paste
unformatted text from the Paste Special dialog that opens.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+V (macOS ⌥+⌘+Shift+V) and
unformatted text is pasted directly into the text box.
4) Format the text to the presentation requirements using the tools on the Text Formatting
toolbar or the options in Format on the Menu bar. Alternatively, but for text boxes only,
apply a Drawing Style to the text.

Note
Presentation styles are used in AutoLayout text boxes cannot be changed by
selecting another presentation style. Make sure the AutoLayout text box uses the
presentation style required. See Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates
for more information. Outline levels and outline styles are changed using the Tab
key or Shift+Tab key combination.
Formatted text
Pasting formatted text into a text box, or AutoLayout text box overwrites any formatting and
replaces the text box style.
1) Highlight and copy the text in another document or slide.
2) Create a text box on a slide and make sure the text cursor is flashing in the text box. See
“Opening Impress” on page 18 for more information.
3) Paste formatted text into the text box. Text is pasted at the cursor position in the text box
and the text format of the pasted text overwrites any style formatting of the text box.
– Go to Edit > Paste on the Menu bar.
– Click on Paste on the Standard toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+V (macOS ⌘+V).
4) If necessary, format the text to to the presentation requirements using the various tools on
the Text Formatting toolbar, or the options available in Format on the Menu bar.
5) To clear any formatting of the pasted text and use the text box style, go to Format >
Clear Direct Formatting on the Menu bar. See Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and
Templates for more information.
Note
Custom drawing styles can be created in Impress and are only available for the
Impress presentation being created. However, custom drawing styles can be
used in a template allowing them to be used in presentations that use the same
presentation template.
Inserting special characters

Special characters can be inserted into text, for example copyright, mathematical, geometric, or
monetary symbols.
1) Click at the position in the text where the special character is to be inserted.
2) Go to Insert > Special Character on the Menu bar to open the Special Characters dialog
(Figure 70).
3) Select the font and character subset from the Font and Character block drop-down lists.
4) Locate and select the special character from the special characters available. The
selected special character appears in the preview box and its name is displayed below
the preview box.
5) Alternatively, select the special character from the display of Recent Characters or
Favorite Characters.
6) Click on Insert to close the dialog and insert the special character at the cursor position in
the text.

Figure 70: Special Characters dialog
7) Alternatively, double-click on the selected special character to insert the special character
at the cursor position in the text. This also closes the dialog.
Tip
If the special character is frequently used, click on Add to Favorites and the
special character is added to the display of Favorite Characters.
Inserting formatting marks

Formatting marks are special characters that can be inserted into text. For example, it may not
be desirable for words that are separated by a space or a hyphen to span over two lines. The
solution is to insert a non-breaking space or non-breaking hyphen.
1) Click at the position where the formatting mark is to be inserted into the text.
2) Go to Insert > Formatting Mark on the Menu bar to open a submenu.
3) Select the formatting mark required and it is inserted into the text at the cursor position.
The formatting marks that are available in Impress are as follows:
Non-breaking space
Inserts a space that keeps two adjacent words or characters together on line breaks.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+Space (macOS ⌘+Shift+Space).
Non-breaking hyphen
Inserts a hyphen that keeps two adjacent characters together on line breaks.
Soft hyphen
Inserts an invisible hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it
becomes the last character in a line.

Narrow no break space
Inserts a narrow space that keeps two adjacent words or characters together on line
breaks. A narrow space has a width that is about 70% of a normal space. It is used to
represent the narrow space occurring around punctuation characters and can also be
used as a numeric group separator. Keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Space
(macOS ⌥+Shift+Space).
No-width optional break
Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the
last character in a line. Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+/ (macOS ⌘+/).
Word Joiner
Inserts a special character preventing hyphenation of a word keeping the word together at
the end of a line.
Left-to-right mark
Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark.
Only available when Complex text layout (CTL) is enabled in Tools > Options >
Language Settings > Languages (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language
Settings > Languages).
Right-to-left mark
Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark.
Only available when Complex text layout (CTL) is enabled in Tools > Options >
Language Settings > Languages (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language
Settings > Languages).
Formatting text
Text formatting can give a presentation a consistent and professional look without any distracting
elements. Understanding of an audience is enhanced by preventing any distracting elements in a
presentation. Text formatting can be applied (for example color, alignment, bullet types) to
characters, words, sentences, paragraphs, and lists.
Text formatting tools are available on the Text Formatting toolbar and drop-down menus in
Format on the Menu bar. For more information on text formatting, see the Writer Guide.
Quick font resizing

After selecting text, the font size can be quickly increased or decreased using the tools Increase
Font Size (Ctrl+]) (macOS ⌘+]) and Decrease Font Size (Ctrl+[) (macOS ⌘+[) on the
Text Formatting toolbar. The amount by which the font size changes depends on the standard
sizes available for the font in use.
Note
AutoLayout text boxes automatically adjust font size as text is inserted. For
example, when a long piece of text is inserted into an AutoLayout text box, the
font size may decrease in size to fit into the AutoLayout text box.
Selecting text
Text must be selected before it can be formatted using one of the following methods. Any
formatting changes applies only to the selected text.
• To format all the text in a text box, click once on the border of the text box to display the
selection handles. Any formatting changes applies to all text in the text box.

• To format only part of the text, select text using one of the following methods:
– Click in the text and drag the cursor over the text to highlight the text.
– Double-click on text to select a complete word, or triple click to select a whole
paragraph.
– Click in the text, then press and hold the Shift key and use the keyboard arrow keys
to select text.
Using styles
When text is entered, either in an AutoLayout text box or in a text box, it is formatted with a set of
predefined attributes known as a style. The style used depends on the type of text box being
used. For more information on using, modifying and updating styles, see Chapter 2, Master
Slides, Styles and Templates.
Sometimes it is quicker and more efficient to apply manual or direct formatting. However, in
situations where the same formatting is required in many different parts of a presentation, style
use is recommended. This creates a consistent look to a presentation and reduces the possibility
of any errors. Impress has two categories of styles – presentation styles and drawing styles.
Presentation Styles
Presentation styles are used in AutoLayout text boxes, master slide backgrounds, and master
slide background objects.
The style applied to the text depends on the type of AutoLayout text box. These styles cannot be
deleted, renamed or changed for another presentation style to change the formatting of the text.
For example, to change an outline style for another outline style, the outline level has to be
changed using the keyboard shortcuts Tab or Shift+Tab.
Presentation styles can be modified to change the text formatting or updated to change the style
after formatting the text.
Note
Unlike LibreOffice Writer, where it is recommended to use styles whenever
possible, manual or direct formatting has to be used more often in Impress. The
reason is that presentation styles in Impress are restricted. For example, it is not
possible to have two different Outline 1 levels using different types of bullet points
for the same outline level. Also, the lack of support for character styles forces the
use of manual or direct formatting to format sections of text when necessary.
Drawing Styles
Drawing styles are used for text in text boxes and any graphic object placed on a slide. For
information on formatting graphic objects, see Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
When text is entered into a text box, the default drawing style is applied to the text. This style can
be changed by selecting another drawing style.
Drawing styles that are part of the LibreOffice installation cannot be deleted or renamed, but can
be modified to change the text formatting, or updated to change the style after formatting the text.
Custom drawing styles can be created, but are only available for the presentation being created.
However, when creating a presentation template, custom drawing styles used in the template are
available for any presentation that uses the same template.

Text formatting
Direct formatting
Direct or manual text formatting can be applied directly to characters, words, sentences, and
paragraphs. Direct formatting overrides any formatting that has been applied to text when using
styles.
1) Format text using one of the following methods. Any formatting applied to text is
immediate.
– Use the formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format on the Menu bar and select a formatting option from the drop-down
menu. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context menu, or dialog, providing
further formatting options.
– Use the options available in the Paragraph and Character dialogs.
– Use the options available in the Paragraph and Character panels in the Properties
deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click outside the text box to deselect the text.
Paragraph dialog
1) Select text in a paragraph, or the whole paragraph. See “Selecting text” on page 91 for
more information.
2) Use one of the following methods and open the Paragraph dialog (Figure 71). Any
formatting applied to a paragraph is immediate.
– Right click on the selected text and select Paragraph from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Paragraph on the Menu bar.
Figure 71: Paragraph dialog — Indents & Spacing page

Figure 72: Paragraph panel panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
3) Use the various options available on the tabbed pages of the Paragraph dialog to format
the text.
Note
For information on the various formatting options available for text in the pages of
the Paragraph dialog, refer to the Writer Guide.
Sidebar Paragraph panel

An alternative method of formatting paragraphs is to use the Paragraph panel (Figure 72) in the
Properties deck on the Sidebar. The formatting options are limited, but are similar in use to the
formatting options in the various pages of the Paragraph dialog. Any formatting applied to a
paragraph using the Sidebar is immediate.
1) Select the text box so that the selection handles and border are displayed.
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Paragraph to open the Paragraph panel.
4) Format the text using the various tools available in the Paragraph panel.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Paragraph
dialog to format text.
Note
For information on the various formatting options available for text in the
Paragraph panel on the Sidebar, refer to the Writer Guide.
Character formatting
Direct formatting
Direct or manual text formatting can be applied directly to characters, words, and sentences.
Direct character formatting overrides any formatting that has been applied to text when using
direct text formatting and presentation or drawing styles.

1) Select the characters or words for formatting. See “Selecting text” on page 91 for more
information.
2) Format characters using one of the following methods.
– Various formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format on the Menu bar. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context
menu or dialog where further formatting options are selected.
– Use the options available in the Character dialog. Clicking OK on the dialog applies
the formatting changes.
– Use the options available in the Character panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar. Formatting applied to character(s) is immediate.
Character dialog
1) Select the characters or words in the text box for formatting. See “Selecting text” on
page 91 for more information.
2) Open the Character dialog (Figure 73) using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the selected text box and select Character from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Character on the Menu bar.
3) Use the various options available on the tabbed pages of the Character dialog to format
the selected characters.
Figure 73: Character dialog — Fonts page

Figure 74: Character panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Note
For information on the various formatting options available for characters in the
pages of the Character dialog, refer to the Writer Guide.
Sidebar Character panel

An alternative method of formatting characters is to use the Character panel (Figure 74) in the
Properties deck on the Sidebar. The formatting options available in the Character panel are
limited, but are similar in use to the formatting options available in the various pages of the
Character dialog.
1) Select the characters or words in the text box for formatting. See “Selecting text” on
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Character to open the Character panel.
4) Format the text using the various tools available in the Character panel.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Character
dialog to format text.
Note
For information on the various formatting options available for characters in the
pages of the Character panel on the Sidebar, refer to the Writer Guide.
Creating lists
The procedure to create an unordered (bulleted) or ordered (numbered) list varies depending on
the type of text box used. The tools to manage and format a list are the same. Creating
unordered or ordered lists in Impress is similar to LibreOffice Writer. For more information on
unordered or ordered lists, see the Writer Guide.

Figure 75: Example of outline unordered list
AutoLayout text boxes

In AutoLayout text boxes and, by default, the outline styles are unordered lists. An example of
these outline styles is shown in Figure 75. These outline styles are presentation styles and
cannot be deleted, but can be modified or updated to the presentation requirements. See
Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates for more information on styles.
Note
In AutoLayout text boxes, promoting or demoting an item in a list changes the
presentation style to match the outline level. For example, second outline level
corresponds to Outline 2 style, third outline level to Outline 3 style, and so on.
Each outline level may change the formatting of a list point.
To customize the list appearance or to change from unordered to ordered, or ordered to

unordered, see “Formatting lists” on page 100 for more information.
1) Create a new presentation and make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
2) Select a layout for the slide using one of the following methods:
– Right-click in a blank area on the slide and select a layout type from the context menu
that opens.
– Go to Slide > Layout on the Menu bar and select a layout from the drop-down list.
– Select a layout from the layouts displayed in the Layouts panel in the Properties deck
on the Sidebar.
3) Click on the text Click to add Text and start typing the first list item.
4) When the first list point is finished, click on Enter to create a new list point.
5) Use the keyboard combination Shift+Enter to create a new line without creating a new
list point. This new line has the same indentation as the text in the list point.
6) To demote the outline level of a list point, use one of the following methods:
– Click on the Tab key.

Figure 77: Lists panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Right Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Right
Arrow).
– Click on Demote on the Outline toolbar (Figure 76).
– Click on Demote on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar
(Figure 77).
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Demote from the submenu.
7) To promote the outline level of a list point, use one of the following methods:
– Use the keyboard shortcut Shift+Tab.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Left Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Left
Arrow).
– Click on Promote on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Promote on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Promote from the submenu.
8) To move a list point lower in the list order without changing the outline level, use one of
– Click on Move Down on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Move Down on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Move Down from the submenu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Down Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Down
Arrow).
9) To move a list point higher in the list order without changing the outline level, use one of
– Click on Move Up on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Move Up on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Move Up from the submenu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Up Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Up Arrow).
10) To change the type and appearance of a list, see “Formatting lists” on page 100 for more
information.

Note
Do not change the outline style of a list point by selecting the list point and then
selecting another outline style. In Impress it is not possible to change
presentation styles used in outline levels.
Text boxes
1) Create a text box on a slide and make sure the cursor is flashing in the text box. See
“Opening Impress” on page 18 on how to create a text box.
2) Create a list using one of the following methods:
– Click on Toggle Unordered List or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting
toolbar, or in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Unordered List or Ordered List
from the submenu.
3) When the first list point is complete, click on Enter to create a new list point.
4) Use the keyboard combination Shift+Enter to start a new line without creating a new
list point. This new line has the same indentation as the text in the list point.
5) To increase the indent level of a list point, use one of the following methods:
– Click on the Tab key.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Right Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Right
Arrow).
– Click on Demote on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Demote on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Demote from the submenu.
6) To decrease the indent level of a list point, use one of the following methods:
– Use the keyboard shortcut Shift+Tab.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Left Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Left
Arrow).
– Click on Promote on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Promote on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Promote from the submenu.
7) To move a list point lower in the list order without changing the indent level, use one of the
following methods:
– Click on Move Down on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Move Down on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Move Down from the submenu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Down Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Down
Arrow).
8) To move a list point higher in the list order without changing the indent level, use one of
– Click on Move Up on the Outline toolbar.

– Click on Move Up on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Move Up from the submenu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Up Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Up Arrow).
9) To change the type and appearance of a list, see “Formatting lists” on page 100 for more
information.
Formatting lists
• Change the list type, properties, size, position, and scope for the entire list or for a single
list point using the Bullets and Numbering dialog (Figure 78). Right-click on a list item
and select Bullets and Numbering from the context menu to open the Bullets and
Numbering dialog.
• Change the list type, promote or demote a list point, or move a list point up or down in the
list order using the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• Promote or demote a list point, or move a list point up or down in the list order using the
Outline toolbar.
Figure 78: Bullets and Numbering dialog
Figure 79: More Bullets dialog

Figure 80: More Numbering dialog
• Change the list type using the tools on the Text Formatting toolbar.
• Format the text used in the list. See “Formatting text” on page 91 for more information.
• Click on More Bullets or More Numbering after clicking on the triangle ▼ on the right of
Toggle Unordered List or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting toolbar, or in the
Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. This opens the More Bullets dialog
(Figure 79) and More Numbering dialog (Figure 80).
Note
For more information on the options available in the Bullets and Numbering dialog
for unordered or ordered lists, see the Writer Guide.
Text callouts
A text callout is a short line of text connected by a line to indicate a feature of an illustration or
drawing. Two types of text callouts are available –– Callouts for horizontal text and Vertical
Callouts for vertical text (Figure 81).
The text callouts are a legacy from earlier versions of LibreOffice and are available on the Text
toolbar (Figure 82). These tools can also be installed on other toolbars by customizing a toolbar,
for example Standard or Line toolbar. For more information on customizing toolbars, see
Appendix B, Toolbars or the Getting Started Guide.
Figure 81: Example of horizontal and vertical text callouts
Figure 82: Text toolbar

Note
More callout shapes can be found by selecting Callout Shapes on the Drawing
toolbar, or the Callouts panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar. These callouts
have the same purpose as text callouts, but have different options available.
Creating text callouts

1) Click on Callouts for horizontal text, or Vertical Callouts for vertical text on the Text
toolbar.
2) Click in the slide and drag the cursor to create the callout.
3) Double click in the callout box to enter text mode.
4) Type the required text, then click in a blank space in the slide. The callout box adjusts its
size horizontally and/or vertically to fit the text within the callout box.
5) Select the callout and click on the selection handle at the end of the connector line, then
drag the end of the connector line to the required position.
6) With the callout still selected, click on the callout box and drag it to the required position.
7) Click in a blank space in the slide to deselect the text callout and save the changes.
Editing text callouts

1) Double click in the callout box to enter text mode and, if required, edit and format the text.
2) Click in a blank space in the slide to save the changes to the text.
3) Select the text callout so that the selection handles are displayed.
4) Right click on the selected text callout and select an option from the context menu to
change the attributes for position, size, line, and area of the text callout. For more
information, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects, and Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes.
5) Click on the selection handle at the end of the connector line and drag it to change the
position of the line end or the length of the connector line.
6) Select the text callout and open the Position and Size dialog (Figure 83) using one of the
following methods:
– Right-click on the selected callout and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
Figure 83: Position and Size dialog — Callout page

– Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
Note
The Callout page in the Position and Size dialog shown in Figure 83 is only
available when a text callout has been selected. It is not available for Callout
Shapes that are available on the Drawing toolbar, or in the Callouts panel in the
Shapes deck on the Sidebar.
7) Click on the Callout tab to open the formatting options available for text callouts.
8) Select the style of text callout from Straight Line, Angled Line, or Angled Connector
Line.
9) In Spacing, enter the amount of space required between the end of the callout line and
the callout box.
10) In Extension, select from the drop-down list how the callout line from extends the callout
box.
11) In the By text box, enter a distance value to create a space between the start point of the
connector line and the callout box.
12) In the Position text box, select Top, Middle, or Bottom to position the start point of the
connector line on the callout box.
13) In Length, enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to
the angle point of the connector line.
Note
The By text box is used for Optimal, From top, and From left extensions.
Position text box is used for Horizontal, and Vertical extensions. The Length
option is only available if Angled Connector Line is selected as callout style and
the Optimal check box is not selected.
14) In Optimal, select this option to display the angle point in a connector line at an optimal
distance from the callout box.
15) Click in a blank space on the slide to deselect the text callout and save the changes.
Tables
Tables convey structured information quickly when used in a presentation and are created
directly in a presentation, eliminating the need to embed a Calc spreadsheet, or a Writer text
table. Impress tables do have limited functionality.
Several predefined table designs are available in the Table Design panel in the Properties deck
on the Sidebar (Figure 84). The Table Design panel is only available when a table is selected in
a slide. Also, when working with tables in Impress, the Table toolbar (Figure 85) automatically
opens providing tools for creating and formatting a table.
Inserting tables
When inserting a table into a slide, it is useful to know the number of rows and columns required
as well as an approximate idea of how the table will look. The table can then be formatted after
creation should it be necessary.

Figure 84: Table Design panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Figure 85: Table toolbar
Note
When a table is inserted into a slide, the table is created inside a text box at the
centre of the slide with the default style and settings already applied. The text box
is the same size as the rows and columns of the table. The default table style and
settings are hard coded into LibreOffice. The table is then formatted to the
presentation requirements using the tools and options available.
Insert Table dialog

1) Select a slide and, if necessary, format the slide layout to create space for the table.
2) Go to Insert > Table on the Menu bar to open the Insert Table dialog (Figure 86).
3) Specify the Number of columns and Number of rows in the text boxes.
4) Click OK to insert the table in the centre of the slide and close the dialog.
Table graphic
1) Select a slide and, if necessary, format the slide layout to create space for the table.
2) Click on Table on the Standard or Table toolbar to open the Table graphic (Figure 87).

Figure 86: Insert Table dialog
Figure 87: Insert Table graphic

3) Click, hold and drag the cursor across and down in the table graphic to create the
required number of rows and columns.
4) Release the cursor to insert the table in the centre of the slide and close the Table
graphic.
5) Alternatively, click on More Options in the Table graphic to open the Insert Table dialog
and create the rows and columns required.
Formatting tables
Sidebar Table Design panel
1) Insert a table into a slide or select a table in a slide.
2) Click on Table Design in the Properties deck on the Sidebar to open the Table Design
panel and display the available designs.
3) Select a design for the table and the types of rows and columns from the available
options.

Figure 88: Example of a banded table
Table Design options

Header row
Selected by default. In a table, the first row is normally a header row and is displayed with
a different background from the rest of the table.
Total row
If selected, it changes the background of the last row to make it stand out from the other
rows.
Banded rows
Selected by default. Alternate rows have different backgrounds making it easier to read
data entered into the rows. An example of banded rows is shown in Figure 88.
First column
When selected, highlights the first column of the table using a darker background.
Last column
When selected, highlights the last column of the table using a darker background.
Banded columns
When selected, alternate columns are highlighted with dark and light colors. An example
of banded columns is shown in Figure 88.
Table toolbar
When a table is selected, the Table toolbar automatically opens. If the Table toolbar does not
open when a table is selected, go to View > Toolbars > Table on the Menu bar. The Table
toolbar contains the majority of the tools required to format a table.
Table
Inserts a new table in the selected slide.
Border Style
Opens a drop-down selection of border styles. Select cells in a table, then apply a border
style. If the required border style is not available, use the Borders page in the Table
Properties dialog.
Border Color
Select a color from the color palettes for the borders that are used for selected cells. If the
required border color is not available, use the Borders page in the Table Properties
dialog.
Borders
Opens a drop-down menu where a predefined border configuration can be selected for
cells. If the required border pattern is not available, use the Borders page in the Table
Properties dialog.

Area Style/Filling
Opens a drop-down menu to apply an area style fill to selected cells: None, Color,
Gradient, Hatching, Bitmap or Pattern. Depending on area style selected, the second
drop-down list shows the available fillings for the each area style selected. Refer to
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects for more information.
Merge Cells
Merges the selected cells into one cell. The contents of merged cells are also merged.
Alternatively, right-click on selected cells and select Merge Cells from the context menu,
or go to Format > Table > Merge Cells on the Menu bar.
Split Cells
Splits a selected cell into multiple cells either horizontally, in equal proportions, or
vertically. Make sure that the cursor is positioned in the cell for splitting, then click on Split
Cells to open the Split Cells dialog (Figure 89).
Alternatively, right-click on the selected cell and select Split Cells from the context menu,
or go to Format > Table > Split Cells on the Menu bar.
In the Split Cells dialog, select the number of cells required when splitting a cell and
whether to split the cell Horizontally or Vertically. When splitting horizontally, the selected
cells can be split using Into equal proportions to create cells of equal size. The contents of
the split cell are kept in the original cell (left or top cell).
Optimize
Evenly distributes the selected rows and columns in a table either horizontally or
vertically. Selecting Optimize opens the Optimize sub-toolbar (Figure 90) and contains
the following tools. Alternatively, right-click in selected cells and select the appropriate
Optimize tool from the context menu.
Minimal Column Width
Defines the minimal column width for selected columns and depends on the shortest
entry within a column.
Figure 89: Split Cells dialog
Figure 90: Optimize sub-toolbar

Minimal Row Height
Determines the minimal row height for selected rows and depends on the font size of
the smallest character in the row.
Optimal Column Width
Defines the optimal column width for selected columns and depends on the longest
entry within a column.
Optimal Row Height
Determines the optimal row height for selected rows and depends on the font size of
the largest character in the row.
Distribute Columns Evenly
Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in
the selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
Distribute Rows Equally
Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the
selection.
Align Top, Centre Vertically, Align Bottom
Selects vertical alignment of text in selected cells. Alternatively, right-click in selected cells
and select Align from the context menu or go to Format > Align Text on the Menu bar,
then select the required alignment.
Insert Row Above, Insert Row Below, Insert Column Before, Insert Column After
Select a row or column then click on one of these tool to insert a row or column.
Alternatively, right-click in a selected cell and select Insert from the context menu, then
select one of the insert options from the sub-context menu.
Alternatively, go to Format > Table > Insert Rows or Insert Columns on the Menu bar to
open the Insert Row dialog (Figure 91) or Insert Column dialog (Figure 92). Select
number of rows or columns and the insertion position then click OK to insert.
Delete Row, Delete Column, Delete Table
After selecting a cell, clicking on these tools deletes a single row, a single column, or the
complete table. To delete more than one row or column, highlight cells across the number
of rows or columns as required, then click on Delete Row or Delete Column.
Alternatively, right-click in the selected cells and select Delete > Delete Row, Delete
Column, or Delete Table from the context menu.
Alternatively, after selecting a cell, go to Format > Table on the Menu bar and select
Delete Row, Delete Column, or Delete Table from the submenu.
Figure 91: Insert Rows dialog Figure 92: Insert Columns dialog

Select Table, Select Column, Select Rows
These tools select a complete table, or columns/rows where cells are selected.
By default these tools are not displayed on the Table toolbar. To display these tools,
right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and select Visible Buttons from the context
menu. Click on the tool required from the Visible Buttons list to add it to the toolbar.
Table Design
Click on this tool to open the Table Design panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
See “Sidebar Table Design panel” on page 105 for more information.
Table Properties
Click on this tool to open the Table Properties dialog.
Table Properties dialog

The Table Properties dialog has five tabbed pages that provide formatting options for Font, Font
Effects, Borders, Background, and Shadow. The Table Properties dialog is opened using one
of the following methods:
• Right-click in a table and select Table Properties from the context menu.
• Go to Format > Table > Properties on the Menu bar.
• Click on Table Properties in the Table toolbar.
The formatting options available on each dialog page are as follows:
Font
In Figure 93, select the font from Western, Asian or Complex the Family, Typeface or
Style (Italic, Bold, etc.), Size and Language for text in the selected table. A sample of the
font selected is displayed in the preview box.
Figure 93: Table Properties dialog — Font page

Figure 94: Table Properties dialog — Font Effects page
Figure 95: Table Properties dialog — Borders page

Font Effects
In Figure 94, select the font effect from Font Color, Text Decoration and Effects the
required effects for the text in the selected table. A sample of the font effects applied to
the text is displayed in the preview box.
Borders
In Figure 95, select a border configuration from the options available in Line
Arrangement, Line, and Padding. Refer to Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects for
more information on borders.

Figure 96: Table Properties dialog — Background page
Figure 97: Table Properties dialog — Shadow page

Background
In Figure 96, select a background (area fill) from None, Color, Gradient, Image, Pattern,
or Hatch. The options available change to match the background selected. This page
provides the same functions as Area Style/Filling on the Table toolbar. Refer to Chapter
6, Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on adding backgrounds.
Shadow
In Figure 97, select the properties for the shadow being added to a table. The option Use
shadow must be selected before the other options can set. Refer to Chapter 6, Formatting
Graphic Objects for more information on adding shadows.
Position and size

Tables are placed into text boxes when created and are treated just like any other graphic object
in an Impress presentation. However, only the Position and Size dialog can be used for tables.
See “Position and Size dialog” on page 80 for more information.
Open the Position and Size dialog using one of the following methods after selecting the table:
• Right-click on the table and select Position and Size from the context menu.

• Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
The position of the table text box can also be changed by clicking on the border and dragging to
move the table text box to a new position. Also, the table text box size can be changed by
clicking and dragging on the selection handles. See “Opening Impress” on page 18 for more
information.
Note
When the size of a text box containing a table is changed, the table also
increases or decreases in size to keep the text box filled with the table.
Using fields
Fields allow the automatic insertion of text into a slide. Fields are commonly used when creating
templates and slide masters. For more information, see Chapter 2, Slide Masters, Styles, and
Templates.
Inserting fields
1) Select the slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
2) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select the type of field from the options in the
submenu. The field is placed centrally on the selected slide in a text box.
3) If necessary, position and resize the field text box. See “Opening Impress” on page 18 for
more information.
4) If necessary, format the text used for the field information. See “Formatting text” on
Field types
Date (fixed)
Inserts the current date into a slide as a fixed field. The date is not automatically updated.
Available date formats depends on the language setting in Tools > Options > Language
Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > Language
Settings > Language). Right-click on the date field and select the required date format
Date (variable)
Inserts the current date into a slide as a variable field. The date is automatically updated
each time the file is opened. Available date formats depends on the language setting in
Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice > Language Settings > Language). Right-click on the date
field and select the required date format from the context menu.
Time (fixed)
Inserts the current time into a slide as a fixed field. The time is not automatically updated.
Available time formats depends on the language setting in Tools > Options > Language
Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > Language
Settings > Language). Right-click on the time field and select the required time format

Time (variable)
Inserts the current time into a slide as a variable field. The time is automatically updated
each time the file is opened. Available time formats depends on the language setting in
Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice > Language Settings > Language). Right-click on the time
field and select the required time format from the context menu.
Author
Inserts the first and last names of the author of the presentation. This information is taken
from values entered in the LibreOffice user data. To modify this information go to Tools >
Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice >
User Data).
Slide Number
Inserts the slide number into the current slide. Alternatively, go to Format > Slide
Number on the Menu bar. To add a slide number to every slide, go to View > Master
Slide on the Menu bar and insert the slide number field on the master slide.
Slide Title
Inserts the slide title. The default slide name is Slide # if the slide has not been renamed.
Slide Count
Inserts the total number of slides in the presentation.
File Name
Inserts the name of the file used for the presentation. The file name only appears after the
file has been saved.
Using hyperlinks
When inserting text that can be used as a hyperlink, such as a website address or URL, Impress
formats it automatically, creating a hyperlink, applying color, and underlining. If default settings
are not being used in Impress, then the hyperlink has to be inserted manually.
Tips
To prevent automatically turning website addresses or URLs into hyperlinks, go to
Tools > AutoCorrect Options > Options and deselect URL Recognition.
To change the color of hyperlinks, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice >
Application Colors, scroll to Unvisited links and/or Visited links. Select the
checkboxes, then select new colors from the color palettes for the links and click
OK. Note that this color change changes the color for all hyperlinks across all
components of LibreOffice.
Inserting hyperlinks
1) Select the slide where the hyperlink is going to be inserted.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlinks on the Menu bar or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K
(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog (Figure 98).
3) On the left hand side, select the type of hyperlink for insertion.
4) Create the hyperlink using the Hyperlink dialog, then click Apply to insert the hyperlink
into the slide. The hyperlink is inserted into a text box.
5) Click Close or OK to close the dialog.

Figure 98: Hyperlink dialog — Internet page
Figure 99: Hyperlink dialog — Mail page
Note
The top right part of the dialog changes depending on the hyperlink type. A full
description of all options, and their interactions, is beyond the scope of this
chapter. A summary of the most common choices used in a presentation is given
below.
Hyperlink types
Internet
In Figure 98, select either Web or FTP protocol. Enter the required web address in the
URL text box and a name for the hyperlink in the Text text box.
Mail
In Figure 99, enter email details in Recipient and the subject of the link in Subject.

Figure 100: Hyperlink dialog — Document page
Figure 101: Hyperlink dialog — New Document page

Document
In Figure 100, a hyperlink is created to another document or to another place in a
document, commonly referred to as a bookmark. Enter the details in the Path text box, or
click on Open File to open a file browser. Leave this blank if the link is to a target in the
same presentation.
Optionally, specify a target, for example a specific slide. Click on Target in Document to
open a dialog where a target can be selected. If the name of the target is known, type it
into the Target text box.
New Document
In Figure 101, a hyperlink is created to a new document. Select Edit now to edit the
newly created document immediately or Edit later to only create the hyperlink. Choose
the type of document to create from the File type drop-down list. Click on Select path to
open a file browser so that a directory is selected for the new document.

Further Settings
This section in the Hyperlink dialog is common to all the hyperlink types, although some
choices are more relevant to some types of links.
Frame
Set the value to determine how the hyperlink opens. This applies to documents that
open in a web browser.
Form
Specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button.
Text
Specifies the text that will be visible to the user.
Name
Applicable to HTML documents. It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attribute
in the HTML code behind the hyperlink.
Note
DO NOT click directly on the hyperlink text. Clicking on the hyperlink text will
open the hyperlink.
Formatting hyperlinks
A hyperlink is inserted in the centre of the current slide. To edit the text, the size of a hyperlink
text box, or to reposition the hyperlink on the slide:
1) Click and drag a selection marquee over the hyperlink text to display a text box border
and selection handles.
2) Right-click on the selected hyperlink and select the type of formatting required from the
options available in the context menu.
3) To reposition hyperlink, click and drag on the text border to move the hyperlink on the
slide.
4) Select Position and Size from the context menu or press the F4 key to open the Position
and Size dialog. Options can be selected to move the hyperlink or resize the text box.
See “Opening Impress” on page 18 for more information.

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 4,
Adding and Formatting
Images
Introduction
Images are often used in presentations to convey a large amount of information more quickly
than the written word. Images, such as a company logo for example, can give a presentation a
more professional look. Also, an Impress presentation can consist of only images, such as a
slideshow of holiday snapshots to share with friends.
Images
There are several ways to insert an image from an external source into the presentation. Once
the image has been inserted, it can be formatted extensively.
Inserting images
After inserting an image from a file into a presentation, the image is formatted after it has been
inserted into a slide.
1) Insert a new slide into the presentation, or select a slide in the presentation. See
Chapter 1, Introducing Impress for more information.
2) Select a layout for the slide. See Chapter 1, Introducing Impress for more information.
3) Go to Insert > Image on the Menu bar and the Insert Image file browser opens
(Figure 102).
4) Navigate to the directory containing the required image and select the file. LibreOffice is
compatible with a large number of image formats.
5) If necessary, select Preview and a thumbnail of the selected file is displayed in the
preview pane on the right of the file browser.
6) Click on Open to place the image in the centre of the selected slide and close the file
browser window. The image is displayed with selection handles around the image border.
7) Format the image to the presentation requirements. See “Formatting images” on
Figure 102: Example of Insert Image file browser

Linking image files
To insert a linked image, select Insert as Link in the Insert Image file browser. The selected
image file is then inserted as a link to a file rather than embedding the image file into a
presentation. However, it is preferable to embed images so that a presentation can be copied
and used on other computers. Sometimes, it makes sense to link an image file rather than
embed it and the reasons for linking could be as follows:
• When an image file is large, linking rather than embedding dramatically reduces the file
size of a presentation.
• When the same image file is used in many presentations. For example, using the same
background image for all the presentations created.
• When the linked file is only available when the presentation is opened. For example, if
the presentation is a slide show of holiday photographs.
Inserting scanned images

Inserting an image from a scanner is normally a simple process if the following points are valid
for the computer being used:
• Scanner software driver has been installed on the computer.
• Scanner is supported by the SANE system and the computer operating system is Linux
or other UNIX operating system.
• Scanner is TWAIN compatible for computer operating systems Windows or macOS.
• Scanner is configured on a computer with LibreOffice software installed.
The following scanning procedure is only an example to demonstrate how to insert an image
from a scanner. Actual scanning procedure depends on computer operating system, type of
scanner, and scanner driver software installed.
1) Prepare the image for the scanner and make sure that the scanner is switched on.
2) If the scanner and scanning software have not been used before, go to Insert > Media >
Scan > Select Source on the Menu bar to open a scanner dialog.
3) If the scanner and scanning software is already installed on the computer, then go to
Insert > Media > Scan > Request on the Menu bar to open a scanner dialog.
4) If there is more than one scanner connected to a computer, select the scanner from the
Select Source or Device Used drop-down list.
5) If available, click Create Preview or Preview to create a preview scan of the image and
place it in the preview area.
6) If necessary, crop the scanned image to what is required and make any necessary
scanning adjustments.
7) Click Scan and the image is scanned. Impress then places the scanned image in the
centre of the selected slide.
Inserting Gallery images

The Gallery deck on the Sidebar contains a collection of images for use in a presentation.
Images can also be added to the Gallery, making it an essential tool for creating presentations
quickly. The Gallery is available for all LibreOffice components.
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 119

1) Open the Gallery deck in the Sidebar (Figure 103) using one of the following methods:
– Go to Insert > Media > Gallery on the Menu bar.
– Click on Gallery in the Sidebar.
2) Select a theme from the available themes and the images for that theme are displayed.
3) Scroll through the available images and select the required image.
4) Click, hold and drag the image onto the slide. Release the hold and the image is inserted
centrally into the slide.
Gallery themes
Default themes
Gallery images are grouped in themes, such as Arrows, Bullets, Diagrams and so on. These
default themes are listed alphabetically at the top of the Gallery deck on the Sidebar
(Figure 103). Click on a theme to see its images displayed in the Gallery deck.
Gallery default themes installed with LibreOffice are read-only. No images or graphics can be
added to or deleted from these themes. The default themes are identified by right-clicking on a
theme name and the only available option in the context menu is Properties.
Figure 103: Gallery deck on Sidebar

Figure 104: Properties of New Theme dialog — General page
Custom themes
Custom themes are the only Gallery themes that allow images to be added. Custom themes are
listed alphabetically with the list of default themes at the top of the Gallery deck on the Sidebar.
Custom themes are identified by right-clicking on a theme name and the options available in the
context menu are Delete, Rename, and Properties.
Creating themes
1) Open the Gallery deck in the Sidebar using one of the following methods:
– Go to Insert > Media > Gallery on the Menu bar.
– Click on Gallery in the Sidebar.
2) Click New at the bottom of the Gallery deck and the Properties of New Theme dialog
opens (Figure 104).
3) Click on General and type a name for the new theme in the text box.
4) Click OK to save the new theme and close the dialog. The new theme is displayed in the
list of themes in the Gallery.
Note
The name of the Properties of New Theme dialog changes to show the name of
the newly created custom theme in the Gallery deck.
Adding theme images

1) Right-click on a custom theme name in the theme list on the Gallery deck and select
Properties from the context menu to open the Properties of New Theme dialog.
2) Click on Files to open the Files page (Figure 105), then click on Find Files to open a
Select Path dialog.
3) Navigate to the folder that contains the images required and select the folder.
4) Click OK to close the Select Path dialog. The files contained in the folder appear in the
Properties of New Theme dialog.
5) If necessary, select Preview and any image selected appears in the preview box.
6) Select the files required for the custom theme and click on Add. The added files
disappear from the file list and the images appear in the custom theme on the Gallery
deck.

Figure 105: Properties of New Theme dialog — Files page
7) To add all the files in the list, then click Add All. All the files disappear from the list and the
images appear in the custom theme on the Gallery deck.
8) Click OK and close the Properties of New Theme dialog.
Deleting theme images

Only images added to a custom themes can be deleted.
1) Open the Gallery deck and select a custom theme.
2) Right-click on the image being deleted and select Delete from the context menu.
3) Click Yes in the confirmation message to delete the image.
Note
Images in custom themes are linked files and are deleted from the Gallery only.
The original image files are not deleted.
Updating themes
All images in the Gallery are linked files. It is recommended that any custom themes are updated
on a regular basis to make sure that all the files are still available.
1) Open the Gallery deck and select a new theme that has been created.
2) Right-click on the name of a custom theme that contains at least one image.
3) Select Update from the context menu and the links to all the image files are updated
Formatting images
Moving images
1) Click on an image to select it and display the selection handles.
2) Move the cursor over the image until it changes shape. The cursor shape depends on the
computer operating system, for example a clenched hand.

3) Click, hold and drag the image to the desired position, then release the image when it is
in the required position.
Resizing images
2) Position the cursor over one of the selection handles. The cursor changes shape giving a
graphical representation of the direction of the resizing, as follows:
– Corner selection handles resize both the width and the height of the graphic object
simultaneously.
– Top and bottom selection handles resize the image height.
– Left and right selection handles resize the image width.
3) Click, hold and drag the selection handle to resize the image, then release the image
when it is at the required size.
Notes
For more information on moving, resizing, rotating, slanting or skewing images
and objects, see Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
To retain the original proportions of the graphic, hold down the Shift key, then
click, hold and drag a selection handle. Make sure to release the hold before
releasing the Shift key.
To restrict the rotation angles to multiples of 15 degrees, click on a selection

handle, hold down the Shift key, then drag to rotate, slant or skew. Make sure to
release the selection handle before releasing the Shift key.
Tip
Re-sizing a bitmapped (raster) image affects the image resolution causing some
degree of blurring. It is recommended to use a specialized graphics program to
correctly scale the picture to the desired size before inserting it into a
presentation. LibreOffice recommends Gimp (https://www.gimp.org).
Rotating, slanting or skewing images

2) Select rotation mode using one of the following methods. The color and shape of the
selection handles changes depending on the computer operating system and setup.
– Click on Rotate on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 106).
– Click again on a selection handle.

Figure 107: Example of rotating, slanting and skewing images
1) Rotating mode 3) Slanting image
2) Rotating image 4) Skewing image
3) By default, the central selection handle is the normal rotation point for the selected image.
If required, click, hold and drag this central rotation point to another position (even outside
of the image) to change how the selected image is rotated.
4) Select rotation mode (as shown in Figure 107) using one of the selection handles.
– Corner selection handles rotate the image.
– Left and right selection handles slant the image.
– Top and bottom selection handles skew the image.
5) Click, hold and drag a selection handle to rotate, slant or skew the image. A ghost image
appears while dragging the cursor.
6) Release the selection handle when the required rotation, slant or skew is reached.
Using Image Filters

Image Filter toolbar
When an image is selected, the Image toolbar (Figure 108) and the Image Filter sub-toolbar
(Figure 109) become available to format an image.
1) Select an image on a slide.
2) Go to View > Toolbars > Image on the Menu bar to open the Image toolbar. The Image
toolbar only opens when an image is selected.
3) Click on Filter to open the Image Filter toolbar. The Image Filter toolbar only opens when
an image is selected.
4) Select the required filter and, if necessary, adjust the filter to the required setting. The filter
is applied immediately to the image.

Figure 108: Image toolbar
Figure 109: Image Filter sub-toolbar

5) Alternatively, go to Format > Image > Filter on the Menu bar and select a filter from the
submenu. This applies the image filter at the filter default settings.
6) Click outside the image to deselect it and save the presentation.
Image filters
The effect each image filter has on an image is described below. The best way to judge if a filter
works is to try it. See the Draw Guide for more information on image filters and examples of the
filter effects.
Invert
Inverts or reverses the color values of a color image (similar to a color negative), or the
brightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert to the original
graphic.
Smooth
Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter reducing the contrast between
neighboring pixels and produces a slight lack of sharpness. Selecting this filter opens the
Smooth dialog to set and use the smooth radius parameter.
Sharpen
Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter, increasing the contrast between
neighboring pixels emphasizing the difference in brightness. This accentuates the outlines
and the effect is strengthened if the filter is applied several times.
Remove Noise
Removes noise by applying a median filter comparing every pixel with its neighbor
creating an image that looks smoother. It replaces any pixel with extreme values that
deviate in color by a large amount from the mean value with a pixel that has a mean color
value. The amount of image information does not increase because there are fewer
contrast changes.
Solarization
Solarization is a phenomenon in photography where an image recorded on a negative or
on a photographic print is wholly or partially reversed in tone. Dark areas appear light or
light areas appear dark. Solarization was originally a photochemical effect used during
photographic film development and is now used in the digital world of computing to create
a change or reversal of color. Selecting this image filter opens the Solarization dialog,
where the Threshold value for solarization can be defined. Entering a threshold value
above 70% reverses the color values. Selecting the Invert option causes all the colors to
be inverted.

Aging
Aging creates a look that resembles photographs developed in the early days of
photography. All pixels are set to their gray values. The green and blue color channels are
reduced by the amount specified in Aging degree in the Aging dialog. Red color channel
is not changed. Selecting this image filter opens the Aging dialog, where the Aging degree
can be defined creating an old look to an image.
Posterize
Posterizing reduces the number of colors in an image making it look flatter. When used on
a photograph, posterizing can make the photograph look like a painting. Selecting this
image filter opens the Posterize dialog, where the number of poster colors can be defined
to produce the required effect.
Pop Art
Select this image filter to change the colors of an image to a pop-art format.
Charcoal Sketch
Selecting this image filter displays an image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the
image are drawn in black and the original colors are suppressed.
Relief
This image filter calculates the edges of an image in relief as if the image is illuminated by
a light source. Selecting this image filter opens the Emboss dialog where the position of
the Light source can be selected producing shadows that differ in direction and
magnitude.
Mosaic
This image filter joins groups of pixels and converts them into a rectangular tile in a single
color creating an image that appears to be a mosaic. The larger the individual rectangles
created, the fewer details the mosaic graphic has. Selecting this image filter opens the
Mosaic dialog, where the number of pixels used can be set to create the Width and
Height of each tile created. Selecting Enhanced edges enhances the edges of each tile to
create a sharper definition.
Figure 110: Example of image modes

1) Original 3) Black/White
2) Greyscale 4) Watermark

Changing image mode
The options available for Image Mode tool on the Image toolbar change the color or image mode
of a selected image. The options are as follows and an example of using Image Mode is shown
in Figure 110.
Default
Image color is not changed.
Grayscale
The image is shown in grayscale. A color image becomes monochrome in grayscale.
Color sliders can be used to apply a uniform color to the monochrome graphic object.
Black and White
The image is shown in black and white. All brightness values below 50% appear black, all
brightness values over 50% appear white.
Watermark
In an image, the brightness is raised and the contrast reduced to allow the image to be
used in the background as a watermark.
Figure 111: Example of adjusting color levels

1) Original
2) 25% Red
3) 25% Green
4) 25% Blue
5) 25% Brightness
6) 50% Contrast
7) Gamma Level 5

Figure 112: Color sub-toolbar
Color adjustment
The Color toolbar adjusts individual colors (red, green, blue), brightness, contrast, and gamma of
an image. Increasing the gamma value of an image makes it more suitable for use as a
background or watermark as the image has less interference with a dark text.
Examples of changing the percentage and levels for color, brightness, contrast, and gamma of an
image are shown in Figure 111.
After selecting an image, open the Color sub-toolbar (Figure 112) using one of the following
methods to change the values for color adjustment:
• Click on Color in the Image toolbar.
• Go to Format > Image > Color on the Menu bar.
Replacing colors and transparent areas

The Color Replacer dialog (Figure 113) allows color to be replaced or changed in embedded
images for another color or set a color to transparent. The embedded image must be a bitmap
(for example BMP, GIF, JPG, or PNG), or a metafile (for example WMF). Up to four colors can be
replaced at once. Color Replacer only works on one color in the entire image. Individual areas of
color in an image cannot be selected for color replacement.
The colors available in the Replace with drop-down lists are all contained in color palettes that
are part of the installation of LibreOffice. If any custom colors have been created, then these
colors are available in the custom palette. For more information on creating custom colors, see
the Draw Guide.
Note
The Color Replacer can only be used on embedded images. If the Color Replacer
is used on a linked image, the following error message appears This image is
linked to a document. Do you want to unlink the image in order to edit it?.
Replacing colors
1) Select an embedded image to start using the Color Replacer.

Figure 113: Color Replacer dialog
Figure 114: Example of replacing colors

2) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog.
3) Click on Pipette at the top of the Color Replacer dialog to activate the color selection
mode.
4) Move the cursor over the color being replaced in the selected image and click on the
color. A check box is now marked and the selected color appears in Source color.
5) If necessary, select another three colors in the selected image. A maximum of four colors
can be selected.
6) Enter the amount of tolerance required for replacing the color in the Tolerance box. The
default selection is 10% tolerance.
7) Select a color from the color palettes available in the Replace with drop-down list for each
color selected. Transparent is the default selection.
8) After selecting up to four colors for replacement, click Replace to replace the colors in the
selected image. An example of replacing colors is shown in Figure 114.
9) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is not what is required, select Edit > Undo
in the Menu bar and repeat the color replacement.

Notes
If the Replace button does not become active when replacing colors, then the file
format of the image is not the correct type for LibreOffice Impress.
Using Color Replacer replaces all occurrences of the Source color in the
selected image.
The default selection of Transparent in Replace with removes the selected color
from the image and creates transparent areas in the image.
Replacing transparent areas

1) Select an embedded image to start using the Color Replacer.
2) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog.
3) Select Transparency in the Color Replacer dialog.
4) Select a color from the available color palettes in the drop-down list next to Transparency.
5) Click Replace to replace the transparent areas with the selected color.
6) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is not what is required, select Edit > Undo
in the Menu bar and repeat the transparency replacement.
Tolerance parameter
The Tolerance parameter is used to set how much of the source color in an embedded image is
replaced by another color.
• Replacing colors that are similar to the color being replaced, enter a low value for the
tolerance parameter.
• Replacing a wider range of colors, enter a higher value for the tolerance parameter.
Image transparency
Specifies the transparency in an image. A percentage value of 0% is a fully opaque image and a
percentage value of 100% is a fully transparent image. As with the gamma value of an image,
increasing the transparency makes the image blend more smoothly into the background making
any overlay text easier to read.
Figure 115: Example of changing image transparency

Click on Transparency on the Image toolbar and change the percentage value in the text box to
adjust the image transparency. An example of adjusting the transparency percentage is shown in
Figure 115.
Adjusting shadow settings

Select an image, then click on Shadow on the Image toolbar to apply a shadow to the image.
The shadow applied uses the settings from the Shadow page of the Area dialog (Figure 116). If a
shadow is already applied to the image, clicking on Shadow removes the shadow from the
image.
The preview box in the dialog shows how the shadow looks when the settings are adjusted and
applied as follows:
1) Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Area on the Menu bar to open the Area dialog.
2) Click on Shadow to open the Shadow page.
3) Select the option Use shadow in Properties.
4) Select the shadow position from one of nine positions for casting the shadow from the
image.
5) Select a shadow color from the available color palettes in the Color drop-down list.
6) Enter a distance for the shadow to be offset from the image in the Distance box.
7) Enter a value in the Blur box to create a softer look for the shadow. The higher the setting,
the softer the shadow appears. Value of 0 (minimum), the shadow is sharp. The value of
150 (maximum), the shadow is at its softest.
8) Enter a percentage in the Transparency box. The value of 0% (minimum), the shadow is
opaque. The value of 100% (maximum), the shadow is transparent.
9) Click on OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes to the shadow setting.
Note
After changing shadow settings in the Area dialog, these shadow settings are
applied to an image each time Shadow on the Image toolbar is used to apply a
shadow.
Cropping images
In Impress, images can be cropped using a mouse or a dialog. Mouse cropping is easier, but
dialog cropping provides more precise control.
Figure 116: Area dialog — Shadow page

Figure 117: Image crop marks
Quick cropping
1) Select an image and use one of the following methods to put the image into cropping
mode and crop marks appear around the image (Figure 117):
– Click Crop Image on the Image toolbar.
– Go to Format > Image > Crop on the Menu bar.
– Right click on the image and select Crop from the context menu.
2) Place the cursor over any of the crop marks and the cursor changes shape. Click, hold
and drag the crop mark to crop the image using one of the following options:
– Corner crop marks change width and height of an image.
– Left and right crop marks change the width of an image.
– Top and bottom crop marks change the height of an image.
3) Click outside the image to deactivate cropping mode.
Note
Press and hold the Shift key, then click, hold and drag a crop mark to
proportionally reduce width and height of the image at the same time. Release
the cursor before releasing the Shift key.
Dialog cropping
1) Select an image and go to Format > Image > Crop Dialog on the Menu bar to open the
Crop dialog (Figure 118).
2) Crop the image using the options given in the Crop dialog. A preview of the selected
image and cropping results appear in the dialog.
3) To return to the original size of the image and cancel the cropping, click on Original Size.

Figure 118: Crop dialog
Figure 119: Example of Keep scale cropping
Figure 120: Example of Keep image style cropping
Cropping options
The following options are available in the Crop dialog:
Crop
Adjusts the crop size and type of cropping for an image.
Keep scale
Maintains the original scale of the image when cropped. The size of the image changes
to the cropped size (Figure 119).
Keep image size
Maintains the original size of the image when cropped. The scale of the image changes
(Figure 120). To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative
values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values
in the cropping boxes.

Left
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the image, or a
negative amount to add white space to the left of the image. If Keep image size is
selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the image, or a
negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the image.
Right
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the image, or
a negative amount to add white space to the right of the image. If Keep image size is
selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the image, or a
negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the image.
Top
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the image, or a
negative amount to add white space above the image. If Keep image size is selected,
enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the image, or a negative
amount to decrease the vertical scale of the image.
Bottom
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the image, or a
negative amount to add white space below the image. If Keep image size is selected,
enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the image, or a negative
amount to decrease the vertical scale of the image.
Scale
Changes the scale of the selected image.
Width
Enter the width for the selected image as a percentage.
Height
Enter the height of the selected image as a percentage.
Image Size
Changes the size of the selected image.
Width
Enter a width for the selected image.
Height
Enter a height for the selected image.
Original Size
Returns the selected image to its original size.
Deleting images
Click on an image to display the selection handles and press the Delete or Backspace key.
Creating image maps

An image map defines areas of the image (called hotspots) associated with a URL (a web
address, or a file on the computer). Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks. In
Impress, clicking on a hotspot opens the linked page in the appropriate program (for example,
default browser for HTML pages; LibreOffice Writer for ODT files; PDF viewer for PDF files).
Hotspots can be created in various shapes, such as rectangles, ellipses, and polygons, and
several hotspots can be included in the same image. When clicking on a hotspot, the URL opens
in a browser window, or frame that has been specified. Also, text can be specified to appear
when the cursor hovers over a hotspot.

Figure 121: Image Map dialog
1) Select an image on a slide and go to Tools > ImageMap on the Menu bar and the
ImageMap dialog opens (Figure 121). The main part of the dialog shows the selected
image where hotspots will be defined.
2) Use the tools at the top of the dialog and the fields to define hotspots and their links.
3) Click on Apply to apply the settings.
4) When finished, click on Save to save the image map to a file and open a file browser.
5) Navigate to the folder where the image map is going to be saved and enter a name for
the image map.
6) Click on Save and the file browser closes.
7) Click on Close to close the ImageMap dialog.
The tools available in the ImageMap dialog are as follows:
Apply
Applies any changes made.
Open
Opens a file browser window for navigating to a folder where an image map has been
saved.
Save
Opens a file browser window for navigating to a folder where the image map is to be
saved.
Close
Closes the Image Map dialog. A confirmation window opens asking for confirmation of
what happens to any changes that have been made.

Select
Used to select a hotspot that has been created on an image.
Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon and FreeForm Polygon
Drawing tools for hotspot shapes. These tools work in exactly the same way as the
corresponding tools in the Drawing toolbar. For more information see Chapter 5,
Managing Graphic Objects.
Edit Points, Move Points, Insert Points, Delete Points
Advanced editing tools to manipulate the shape of a polygon hotspot. Select Edit Points
first to activate the other points tools.
Undo
Reverses any previous action taken.
Redo
Carries out any action that has been previously undone.
Active
Toggles the status of the hotspot activating a selected hotspot or deactivating it if active.
Macro
Associates a macro with the hotspot instead of a hyperlink.
Properties
Sets the hyperlink properties and adds the Name attribute to the hyperlink.
Address
Enter the URL address that points to a hyperlink, or to an anchor in a document (for
example a specific slide number). Using an anchor in a document, write the address in
this format: file:///<path>/document_name#anchor_name.
Text
Enter the text that is displayed when the cursor is moved over the hotspot.
Frame
Where the target of the hyperlink opens.
_blank
Opens in a new browser window.
_self
Default selection and opens in the current window.
_top
File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy.
_parent
File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, the
current frame is used.
Tip
The value _self for the target frame works on the vast majority of occasions. It is
not recommended to use the other values, if available, unless absolutely
necessary.

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 5,
Managing Graphic Objects
Introduction
This chapter describes how to rotate, distort, arrange, and position graphic objects on a slide
using the available tools in Impress. However, some of the techniques described in this chapter
can also be applied to images on slides.
Drawing toolbar
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 122) contains the majority of the tools normally used to create
graphic objects. If this toolbar is not visible, select View > Toolbars > Drawing from the Menu
bar. By default, the Drawing toolbar is docked vertically at the left side of the Impress window.
Note
The Drawing toolbar shown in Figure 122 may differ between computer operating
systems and setup. Also, the Drawing toolbar displayed depends on how many
drawing tools have been installed on the toolbar. Right-click in an empty area of
the Drawing toolbar, then select Visible Buttons from the context menu to
display, install and remove available tools. See Appendix B, Toolbars and the
Getting Started Guide for more information on customizing toolbars in Impress.
From left to right, the drawing tools are as follows:

Select
Used to select objects. To select a group of objects, position the cursor above the top left
object, then click, hold and drag the cursor below the bottom right object of the intended
selection. A rectangle identifying the selection area is displayed (also known as a
marquee). Several objects also can be selected by holding down the Shift key while
selecting the individual objects.
Zoom & Pan
Used to zoom out and pan the selected slide in the Workspace. Hold down the Ctrl key
(macOS ⌘) and select the tool to zoom out and reduce the screen display of a slide in
LibreOffice. The current zoom factor is displayed as a percentage value on the Status bar.
Hold down the Shift key and select the tool to move the displayed slide without
changing the zoom percentage.
Insert Text Box
Creates a text box with text aligned horizontally. See Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting
Text for more information on working with text.
Insert Vertical Text
Creates a text box with text aligned vertically. This tool is available only when Asian
language support has been enabled in Tools > Options > Language Settings >
Languages (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language Settings > Languages).
See Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for more information on working with text.

Line Color
Click on the triangle ▼ next to Line Color to open a color palette and select a color for
the line. More colors are available by selecting a different color palette from the
drop-down list at the top of the color palette.
Fill Color
Click on the triangle ▼ next to Fill Color to open a color palette and select a color for the
area fill. More colors are available by selecting a different color palette from the
drop-down list at the top of the color palette.
Insert Line
Draws a straight line from the point where the cursor is dragged to the point where the
cursor is released. Press the Shift key to restrict the angle of the line to multiples of 45°.
Press the Alt key (macOS ⌥) to draw a line from its center. Release the cursor before
releasing the Shift or Alt (macOS ⌥) keys.
Rectangle
Draws a rectangle when the cursor is dragged from the top left to the bottom right corner.
Press the Shift key to draw a square. Press the Alt key (macOS ⌥) to draw a shape
from its center. Press the Shift+Alt keys (macOS ⌥+Shift) to draw a square from
the center. Release the cursor before releasing the Shift or Alt (macOS ⌥) keys.
Ellipse
Draws an ellipse. Press the Shift key to draw a circle. Press the Alt key (macOS ⌥) to
draw a shape from its center. Press the Shift+Alt keys (macOS ⌥+Shift) to draw a
circle from the center. Release the cursor before releasing the Shift or Alt (macOS ⌥)
keys.
Line and Arrows
Draws a straight line ending with an arrowhead. The arrowhead is placed at the end of
the line where the cursor is released. Click the triangle ▼ next to Line and Arrows to
show the available options for lines and arrows (Figure 123). The Shift and Alt
(macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the Insert Line tool. Actual icon displayed
depends on the tool that had previously been selected.
Figure 123: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar

Curves and Polygons
Draws a shape depending on the option that has been selected. Click the triangle ▼ next
to Curves and Polygons to show the available options for curves and polygons
(Figure 124). Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.
Figure 124: Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 139

Connectors
Draws a connector line between two figures. Click the triangle ▼ next to Connectors to
show the available options for connectors (Figure 125). Actual icon displayed depends on
the tool that had previously been selected. For more information see “Connectors and
gluepoints” on page 167.
Figure 125: Connectors sub-toolbar

Basic Shapes
Click the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes to show the available options for basic shapes
(Figure 126). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the
Rectangle tool. Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.
Figure 126: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar

Symbol Shapes
Click the triangle ▼ next to Symbol Shapes to show the available options for symbol
shapes (Figure 127). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the
selected.
Figure 127: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar

Block Arrows
Click the triangle ▼ next to Block Arrows to show the available options for block arrows
selected.
Figure 128: Block Arrows sub-toolbar

Flowchart
Click the triangle ▼ next to Flowchart to show the available options for flowchart shapes
selected.

Figure 129: Flowchart sub-toolbar
Callout Shapes
Click the triangle ▼ next to Callout Shapes to show the available options for callouts
selected.
Figure 130: Callouts sub-toolbar

Stars and Banners
Click the triangle ▼ next to Stars and Banners to show the available options for stars
and banners (Figure 131). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as
the Rectangle tool. Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.
Figure 131: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar

3D-Objects
Click the triangle ▼ next to 3D-Objects to show the available options for 3D objects
selected. Alternatively, go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar to open the
3D-Objects toolbar. For more information on 3D objects, see “Working with 3D objects” on
page 173.
Figure 132: 3D-Objects sub-toolbar

Rotate
Select an object then click on this tool to switch the object in rotation mode. The selection
handles change color and pivot point appears in the center of the object.
Align Objects
Click the triangle ▼ next to Align Objects to show the available options for alignment
tools (Figure 133) for two or more objects. Alternatively, go to View > Toolbars > Align
Objects on the Menu bar to open the Align Objects toolbar. See “Aligning objects” on
Left, Centered, Right
Determines the horizontal alignment of selected objects.

Figure 133: Align Objects sub-toolbar
Top, Center, Bottom
Determines the vertical alignment of selected objects.
Arrange
Changes the stack level of an object. Click the triangle ▼ next to Arrange to show the
available options to arrange the position of selected objects (Figure 134). Alternatively,
select the required positioning tool on the Standard toolbar. See “Arranging objects” on
Figure 134: Position sub-toolbar

Bring to front
Selected object is moved in front of all other objects.
Bring forward
Selected object is moved one level up in the stack.
Send backwards
Selected object is moved one level down in the stack.
Send to back
Selected object is moved behind all other objects.
In front of object
Moves the first selected object in front of the second selected object.
Behind object
Moves the first selected object behind the second selected object.
Reverse
Swaps the stacking order of two selected objects.
Distribute Selection
Changes the distribution between objects by using the horizontal and vertical spacing
between objects. Click the triangle ▼ next to Select at least three objects to distribute
to show the available distribution tools (Figure 135). Alternatively, go to View > Toolbars
> Distribute Selection on the Menu bar to open the Distribute Selection toolbar. A
minimum of three objects have to be selected for the distribution tools to be active.
Figure 135: Distribute Selection sub-toolbar

Horizontally Left
Distributes the selected objects to make the left edges of the objects evenly spaced
from one another.

Horizontally Centre
Distributes the selected objects to make the horizontal centers of the objects evenly
spaced from one another.
Horizontally Spacing
Distributes the selected objects horizontally to make the objects evenly spaced from
one another.
Horizontally Right
Distributes the selected objects to make the right edges of the objects evenly spaced
from one another.
Vertically Top
Distributes the selected objects to make the top edges of the objects evenly spaced
from one another.
Vertically Centre
Distributes the selected objects to make the vertical centers of the objects evenly
spaced from one another.
Vertically Spacing
Distributes the selected objects vertically to make the objects evenly spaced from one
another.
Vertically Bottom
Distributes the selected objects to make the bottom edges of the objects evenly spaced
from one another.
Shadow
Applies a shadow to a selected object using the shadow settings from the Area or Line
dialog.
Crop Image
This tool only becomes active when an image is selected that can be cropped.
Filter
This tool only becomes active when an image is selected and opens the available filter
options on the Image Filter sub-toolbar (Figure 136) for application to an image. For more
information on image filters, see the Draw Guide.

Invert
Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image.
Apply the filter again to reverse the effect.
Smooth
Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
Sharpen
Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
Remove Noise
Removes noise by applying a median filter.
Solarization
Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like
what can happen when there is too much light during photo development.

Aging
All pixels are set to their gray values. The green and blue color channels are then
reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed.
Posterize
Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on the
reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings.
Pop Art
Converts an image to a pop-art format.
Charcoal Sketch
Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black,
and the original colors are suppressed.
Relief
Displays a dialog for creating reliefs. You can choose the position of the imaginary light
source that determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks
in relief.
Mosaic
Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger the
individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has.
Points
Select this tool and then select an object to edit the individual points in the object. The
object must be converted to a curve or polygon first before editing the object points.
Clicking on the keyboard shortcut F8 also selects this tool.
Show Gluepoints Functions
Opens the Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 137) for editing the gluepoints of a graphic object.
Glue points are positions where connector lines terminate or start. See “Gluepoints” on
Figure 137: Gluepoints toolbar
Creating lines and shapes

This section is an introduction to creating lines and shapes for use in presentations. For more
information on working with lines and shapes, see the Draw Guide.
Drawing regular shapes

Regular shapes that are available on the Drawing toolbar are as follows:
Rectangle Symbol Shapes Callouts Shapes
Ellipse Block Arrows Stars and Banners
Basic Shapes Flowchart 3D Objects
Some icons for regular shapes have a triangle ▼ next to the icon that gives access to several
different types of regular shapes. Also, the icons for some of the regular shapes displayed on the
Drawing toolbar show the last tool used for each of these regular shapes.
1) Select the required tool from the Drawing toolbar, or a sub-toolbar after selecting the
triangle ▼ next to the tool icon.

2) Place the cursor on the slide, then click, hold and drag to define an enclosing rectangle.
3) Release the hold and the selected shape is drawn on the slide.
4) Press and hold the Shift key when creating a shape to maintain the ratio between
height and width. For example, using Rectangle or Ellipse to draw a square or a circle.
Release the cursor before releasing the Shift key.
5) Press and hold the Alt key (macOS ⌥) to draw a shape from its center. Release the
cursor before releasing the Alt key (macOS ⌥).
6) Press and hold the Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys when creating a shape to maintain
equal height and width and draw the shape from the center. For example, when using
Rectangle or Ellipse tool to draw a square or a circle. Release the cursor before
releasing the Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys.
7) Press and hold the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) when creating a shape to snap the top left
corner of the shape selection box to the nearest grid point.
Note
If the Snap to Grid option in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid
(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) has been
selected, pressing and holding the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) prevents the top left
corner of the shape selection box snapping to the nearest grid point.
Regular shape adjustment

When creating shapes that are included in Impress, one or more dots maybe displayed in a
different color to the selection handles. These dots perform a different adjustment depending on
the shape and are listed below.
Basic Shapes
Basic shape Shape adjustment function
Changes the radius of the curve used for corners on a rounded
Rectangle, Rounded
rectangle or square.
Changes the radius of the curve used for corners on a rounded
Square, Rounded
rectangle or square.
Parallelogram Changes the internal angles between the sides.
Trapezoid Changes the internal angles between the sides.
Circle Pie Changes the size of the filled sector.
Block Arc Changes both internal diameter and size of the filled area.
Isosceles Triangle Changes the shape and type of the triangle.
Hexagon Changes the internal angles between the sides.
Octagon Changes the internal angles between the sides.
Cylinder Changes the perspective.
Cube Changes the perspective.
Folded Corner Changes the size of the folded corner.
Cross Changes the thickness of the four arms of the cross.
Frame Changes the thickness of the frame.
Ring Changes the internal diameter of the ring.

Symbol Shapes
Symbol shape Shape adjustment function
Smiley Face Changes the smile on the face.
Sun Changes the shape of the symbol.
Moon Changes the shape of the symbol.
Prohibited Changes the thickness of the ring and the diagonal bar.
Square Bevel Changes the thickness of the bevel.
Octagon Bevel Changes the thickness of the bevel.
Diamond Bevel Changes the thickness of the bevel.
Double Bracket Changes the curvature of the bracket.
Left Bracket Changes the curvature of the bracket.
Right Bracket Changes the curvature of the bracket.
Double Brace Changes the curvature of the bracket.
Left Brace Changes the curvature of the brace and the position of the point.
Right Brace Changes the curvature of the brace and the position of the point.
Block Arrows
Block arrows Shape adjustment function
Right Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Left Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Down Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Up Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Left and Right Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Up and Down Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Circular Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
4-way Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Chevron Changes the angle between the sides and the shape.
Pentagon Changes the angle between the sides and the shape.
Striped Right Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Up, Right and Down Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Notched Right Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Up and Right Arrow Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.
Right Arrow Callout Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.
Left Arrow Callout Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.
Down Arrow Callout Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.
Up Arrow Callout Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.
Left and Right Arrow Callout Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.
Up and Down Arrow Callout Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.
4-way Arrow Callout Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.
Up and Right Arrow Callout Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.

Callout Shapes
All Callouts use shape adjustment dots to change the length, position and angle of the pointer.
Stars and Banners

Stars and banners Shape adjustment function
4-Point Star Changes the thickness and shape of the star points.
Vertical Scroll Changes the width and shape of the scroll.
Horizontal Scroll Changes the width and shape of the scroll.
Doorplate Changes the inward curvature of the corners.
Drawing curves, polygons and freeform lines

Curves, polygons and lines on the Drawing toolbar have a triangle ▼ next to the icon. Clicking on
this triangle ▼ opens a sub-toolbar giving access to several different types of curves, polygons
and lines. The icons on the Drawing toolbar show the last tool used for each of these curves,
polygons and lines. If a filled curve, filled polygon, or filled freeform line is selected, Impress
draws a connecting line between the last point and the start point, and fills the inside area with
the default fill color.
Curves
1) Click the triangle ▼ next to Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar.
2) Select either Curve or Curve Filled.
3) Place the cursor on the slide, then click, hold and drag to create the starting point of a
curve.
4) Release the hold and drag the cursor to draw a curve on the slide, bending the line into a
curve.
5) Click to set the end point of the curve and fix the curve on the slide.
6) Drag the cursor to continue drawing a straight line. Each click sets a corner point and
allows drawing of another straight line from the corner point.
7) Double-click to end the drawing of the curve. If Curve Filled was selected, Impress
automatically fills the curve with the default fill color.
Note
Holding down the Shift key when drawing lines with the curve or polygon tools
restricts the angles between lines to 45 or 90 degrees.
Polygons and Polygons 45°

2) Select either Polygon, Polygon Filled, Polygon (45°) or Polygon Filled (45°).
3) Place the cursor on the slide, then click, hold and drag to draw the first line from the start
point. Release the hold and a line between the first and second points is drawn.
4) Move the cursor to draw the next line. Each click sets a corner point and allows drawing
of another line.

5) Double-click to end the drawing of a polygon. If Polygon Filled or Polygon Filled (45°)
was selected, Impress automatically fills the polygon with the default fill color.
Note
If Polygon (45°) or Polygon Filled (45°) were selected, the movement of the
cursor and the angles between lines is restricted to increments of 45°.
Freeform lines
Using Freeform Line or Freeform Line Filled tools is similar to drawing with a pencil on paper.
2) Select either Freeform Line or Freeform Line Filled.
3) Click, hold and drag the cursor to the line shape required.
4) When finished drawing a freeform line, release the cursor and the drawing is completed. If
Freeform Line Filled was selected, Impress automatically fills the drawing between the
start and end points with the default fill color.
Drawing lines and arrows

Straight lines
A straight line is the simplest element or object in Impress to create.
1) Use one of the following methods to draw a line:
– Click Insert Line in the Drawing toolbar.
– Click the triangle ▼ on the right of Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and
select Insert Line from the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar.
2) Click, hold and drag the cursor from the start position for the line, then release the hold at
the end position of the line. A selection handle appears at each end of the line. The
selection handle at the starting point of the line is larger than the selection handle at the
end point.
3) Keep the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) pressed while drawing a line to enable the end of the line
to snap to the nearest grid point.
4) Keep the Shift key pressed while drawing a line to restrict the drawing angle of a line to
multiple of 45 degrees.
5) Keep the Alt key (macOS ⌥) pressed while drawing a line to cause the line to extend
outwards symmetrically in both directions from the start point. This draws lines by starting
from the middle of the line.
Arrows
Arrows are drawn like lines and are classified as a subgroup of lines, that is lines with
arrowheads. Hovering the cursor over each type of arrow that is available shows the type of
endings each tool will draw.
1) Click the triangle ▼ on the right of Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and select
the type of arrow from the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar.
2) Click, hold and drag the cursor at the starting position for drawing the arrow, then release
the hold at the end position of the arrow. The arrowhead(s) is drawn at the end of the line
when the hold is released.

3) Keep the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) pressed while drawing an arrow to enable the end of the
arrow to snap to the nearest grid point.
4) Keep the Shift key pressed while drawing an arrow to restrict the drawing angle of an
arrow to multiple of 45 degrees.
5) Keep the Alt key (macOS ⌥) pressed while drawing an arrow to cause the arrow to
extend outwards symmetrically in both directions from the start point. This draws arrows
by starting from the middle of the arrow.
Note
If the Snap to Grid option in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid
(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) has been
selected, pressing and holding the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) whilst drawing a line or
arrow has the opposite effect and prevents the line or arrow snapping to the
nearest grid point.
Grouping objects
This section gives only a brief introduction to grouping of objects. An example of grouping two
objects together is shown in Figure 138. For more information on working with grouped objects,
see the Draw Guide.
Grouping of objects is similar to putting objects into a container. Objects within a group are
moved together as one object and any changes made are applied globally to the objects within
the group. A group can always be undone and the objects that make up the group can always be
manipulated separately.
Temporary grouping
Temporary grouping is when several objects are selected together. Any changes to the objects
are applied to all of the objects within the temporary group. For example, a temporary group of
objects can be rotated in its entirety. A temporary group is created using one of the following
methods:
• Hold down the Shift key whilst clicking multiple objects on a slide.
• Click, hold and drag the cursor to create a marquee around multiple objects. Release the
hold and all the objects within the marquee are selected.
To cancel a temporary grouping of objects, simply click outside of the selection handles displayed
around the objects.
Figure 138: Example of grouping objects

Permanent grouping
1) Objects are grouped together using one of the following methods:
– Hold down the Shift key whilst clicking multiple objects on a slide.
– Click, hold and drag the cursor to create a marquee around multiple objects. Release
the hold and all the objects within the marquee are selected.
– To select all the objects on the slide, go to Edit > Select All on the Menu bar, or use
the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+A (macOS ⌘+A).
2) With selection handles displayed, use one of the following methods to create a group of
selected objects:
– Go to Format > Group > Group on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+G (macOS ⌘+Shift+G).
– Right-click on an object within the selected group and select Group from the context
menu.
Editing or formatting groups

1) Click on an object in the group to select the group. Any editing or formatting can then be
carried out on all the objects within the group or on individual objects within the group.
2) To edit an individual object within a group, enter the group using one of the following
methods:
– Go to Format > Group > Enter Group on the Menu bar.
– Right-click and select Enter Group from the context menu.
3) After entering a group, select individual objects within the group for editing or formatting.
An example of editing individual objects in a group is shown in Figure 139.
4) When editing or formatting is completed, use one of the following methods to exit the
group and the whole group then becomes selected:
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F3 (macOS ⌘+F3).
– Go to Format > Group > Exit Group on the Menu bar.
– Right-click and select Exit Group from the context menu.
Figure 139: Example of editing inside a group

Ungrouping
1) Click on any one of the objects in the group to select the group.
2) With selection handles displayed, use one of the following methods to ungroup a group of
objects:
– Go to Format > Group > Ungroup on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+G (macOS ⌘+⌥+Shift+G).
– Right-click on the group and select Ungroup from the context menu.
Tip
If group and ungroup commands are regularly used, or any other command,
commands can be added to a toolbar so that they are readily available. See
Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress; Appendix B, Toolbars; and the
Getting Started Guide for more information on customizing the user interface.
Positioning and resizing graphic objects

Using the cursor
Positioning
1) Click on an object or a group of objects to display the selection handles.
2) Move the cursor over a selected graphic object until the cursor changes shape. The
cursor shape depends on the computer setup and the computer operating system.
3) Click, hold and drag the object to the desired position. During movement, a ghost image
of the object appears to help with repositioning (Figure 140).
4) Release the hold when the object is in the desired position.
Note
The arrow keys can also be used to quickly move a selected object or group to a
new position.
Resizing
1) Click on an object or a group of objects to display the selection handles.
2) Move the cursor over a selection handle.
Figure 140: Example of moving objects

3) Click, hold and drag the selection handle to resize the graphic object. During resizing, a
ghost image of the object appears to help with resizing (Figure 141).
4) To maintain the width to height ratio, hold down the Shift key before clicking and
dragging on a selection handle. Remember to release the cursor before releasing the
Shift key.
5) Release the hold when the object is at the desired size.

Positioning
For a more accurate placement of a graphic object on a slide, use the Position and Size dialog
(Figure 142) as follows:
Figure 141: Example of resizing objects

1) Select an object to display the selection handles and open the Position and Size dialog
using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the selected object and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the title bar for the Position and Size panel in
the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click on the Position and Size tab to open the Position and Size page.
3) In the Position section, specify Position X (horizontal) and Position Y (vertical) position of
the object. The values represent the distance from the selected Base point. The default
selection for Base point is relative to the top left corner of the slide.
4) If necessary, in the Protect section of the dialog, select the Position option to prevent the
object from being repositioned.
5) Click OK to save the changes and to close the dialog.
Note
The units of measurement used in this dialog and other Impress dialogs are set in
Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > General (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General).
Resizing
1) Select an object to display the selection handles and open the Position and Size dialog
menu.
2) Click on the Position and Size tab to open the Position and Size page.
3) In Size, select a Base point to use as an anchor when resizing the object. The default
selection of top left corner means that the top left corner of the object will not change
position when resizing.
4) To maintain the proportions between width and height, in the Size section select the Keep
ratio option before changing the Width or Height. When Keep ratio is selected, changing
the value of one dimension automatically changes the other dimension maintaining the
ratio between object width and height.
5) To specify the object width or height independently, make sure Keep ratio is deselected,
then, in the Size section, enter a value for the Width and/or Height of the object.
6) If necessary, in the Protect section of the dialog, select the Size option to prevent the
object from being resized.

Sidebar Position and Size panel

Use the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 143) to position
and resize a graphic object.
Positioning
1) Select an object to display the selection handles.
2) Click on Properties in the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Position and Size to open the panel.
4) Specify Position X (horizontal) and Position Y (vertical) position of the object. The values
represent the distance from the selected Base point in the Position and Size dialog.
5) Press the Enter key to make the changes.
Resizing
4) To maintain the proportions between width and height, select the Keep ratio option before
changing the Width or Height. When Keep ratio is selected, changing the value of one
dimension automatically changes the other dimension maintaining the ratio between
object width and height.
5) To specify the object width or height independently, make sure Keep ratio is deselected,
then, enter a value for the Width and/or Height of the object.

Figure 144: Example of rotating objects
Applying special effects

As well as the basic actions of moving and resizing an object, a number of special effects can
also be applied to objects in Impress. This section describes how to rotate, flip, and distort an
object.
Rotating graphic objects

Quick rotation
2) On the Line and Filling toolbar, click on the triangle ▼ next to Transformations then click
on Rotate on the Transformations sub-toolbar. The selection handles change shape and
color as shown by the example in Figure 144. A pivot point indicating the rotation center
also appears in the center of the object.
3) Move the cursor over one of the corner handles and the cursor changes shape indicating
the movement direction.
4) Click and hold on a corner selection handle and move in the direction required to rotate
the object. Only the corner selection handles are active for rotation.
5) When satisfied with the rotation, release the hold.
6) To change the rotation center of the object, click, hold and drag the pivot point to the
desired position before rotating. The pivot point can be moved to any position on the
slide, even outside of the object boundaries.
7) To restrict the rotation angles to multiples of 15 degrees, press and hold the Shift key
while rotating the object. This is useful for rotating pictures through a right angle, for
example from portrait to landscape. Remember to release the Shift key before
releasing the cursor.
Position and Size dialog rotation

Instead of rotating an object manually, use the Rotation page of the Position and Size dialog
(Figure 145) to accurately rotate an object.
1) Select an object to display the selection handles, then open the Position and Size dialog

Figure 145: Position and Size dialog — Rotation page
menu.
2) Click on the Rotation tab to open the Rotation page.
3) If necessary, in Pivot Point enter a measurement for Position X and Position Y to move
the position of the pivot point. The default position of the pivot point is the center of the
object. Alternatively, select a pivot point from one of the 9 positions in Default settings.
4) In Rotation Angle, enter the degree amount for rotation in the Angle text box.
Alternatively, in Default settings, click on the rotation angle indicator and drag it to a new
angle. The angle of rotation is displayed in the Angle text box.
Sidebar rotation
Use the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 143 on page 154)
to rotate an object as follows:
4) In Rotation, enter the degree amount for rotation in the text box or click on the rotation
angle indicator and drag it to a new angle. The angle of rotation is displayed in the
Rotation text box.

Flipping objects
Quick flipping
1) Click on an object to display the selection handles.
2) Quickly flip a selected object so it faces the other direction using one of the following
methods:
– Right-click on the selected object and select Flip > Vertically or Horizontally from
the context menu.
– Click on Vertically or Horizontally flip tool on the Standard toolbar.
– Go to Format > Flip > Vertically or Horizontally on the Menu bar.
– Click on Flip Vertically or Flip Horizontally in the Position and Size panel on the
Properties deck of the Sidebar (Figure 143 on page 154).
Flip tool
To change the position and angle that an object flips over, the Flip tool on the Transformations
toolbar (Figure 146) is used as shown by the example in Figure 147.
1) Click on an object to display the selection handles.
2) Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations to open the Transformations toolbar.
3) Click on Flip on the Transformations toolbar and a symmetry axis appears as a dashed
line through the center of the object (Item (1) in Figure 147). The object is flipped about
this axis of symmetry.
4) Click and drag the symmetry axis to a new position, or position the cursor in one of the
circles at each end of the symmetry axis and drag with the cursor to change the angle
(Item (2) in Figure 147).
5) Place the cursor over one of the selection handles for the object.
6) Click, hold and drag the cursor across the symmetry axis to flip the object. The new
position of the object is shown faintly until the hold is released.
Figure 146: Transformations toolbar
Figure 147: Example of using the Flip tool

7) Release the cursor and the object appears flipped over. Angle and position of the flip
depends on the angle and position of the symmetry axis (Item (3) in Figure 147).
Note
Press and hold the Shift key while moving the symmetry axis to rotate it in
45 degree increments.
Mirror copies
Impress does not include a mirror command. However, mirroring an object can be emulated by
flipping the object:
1) Select the object to make a mirror copy and copy the object to the clipboard.
2) Flip the object using one of the methods in “Quick flipping” on page 157, then move the
flipped object to one side.
3) Click in an empty area of the slide to deselect the object.
4) Paste the copied object from the clipboard into the slide.
5) Select both objects, then right-click and select Alignment from the context menu.
6) Select the type of alignment required. Top, Center, or Bottom if a horizontal mirror copy
is being created. Left, Centered, or Right if a vertical mirror copy is being created.
Distorting images
Three tools on the Transformations toolbar allow an object to be distorted.
• Distort – distorts an object in perspective.
• Set to circle (slant) and Set in Circle (perspective) – both create a pseudo 3D effect.
Note
When using these tools, an object has to be converted to a curve before
distorting. Converting an object into a curve cannot be reversed and can only be
undone by using the Undo function.
Distort tool
Examples of corner, vertical, and horizontal distortion of an object using the Distort tool are
shown in Figure 148.
1) Select an object and click on Distort on the Transformations toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
Figure 148: Example of object distortion

1) Original shape 3) Vertical distortion
2) Corner distortion 4) Horizontal distortion

3) Click and drag a corner selection handle to distort the object using the opposite corner
selection handle as an anchor point for the distortion.
4) Click and drag the vertical selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
vertical side as an anchor point for the distortion.
5) Click and drag the horizontal selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
horizontal side as an anchor point for the distortion.
Set in Circle (perspective) tool

Example of distorting an object using the Set in Circle (perspective) tool is shown in Figure 149.
1) Select an object and click on Set in Circle (perspective) in the Transformations toolbar.
not appear.
3) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted to
give an indication of how the resulting object will look.
Set to circle (slant) tool

Example of distorting an object with the Set to circle (slant) tool is shown in Figure 150.
1) Select an object and click on Set to circle (slant) in the Transformations toolbar.
not appear.
3) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted to
give an indication of how the resulting object will look.
Figure 149: Example of perspective distortion

1) Original object
2) Set in Circle (perspective) distortion
Figure 150: Example of slant distortion

1) Original object
2) Set in Circle (slant) distortion

Aligning objects
Use the alignment tools in LibreOffice to adjust the relative position of an object compared to
another object. These alignment tools are only active if two or more objects are selected. The
alignment options are as follows:
• Left, Centered, Right — determines the horizontal alignment of selected objects.
• Top, Center, Bottom — determines the vertical alignment of selected objects.
Select two or more objects for alignment and use one of the following methods to access the
align options:
• Click on the triangle ▼ next to Align Objects on the Line and Filling toolbar. Select an
alignment option from the tools available. The Align Objects icon shown on the Line and
Filling toolbar depends on the last tool used.
• Go to View > Toolbars > Align Objects on the Menu bar to open the Align Objects
toolbar. Select an alignment option from the tools available.
• Right-click on the group of selected objects and select Align Objects and then one of the
alignment options from the context menu.
Using grid or snap functions

In Impress, objects can be positioned accurately and consistently using grid points, snap points
and lines, object frames, individual points on objects, or page edges. This function is known as
Snap and allows positioning of an object in exactly the same place on multiple slides.
It is easier to use snap functions at the highest practical zoom value for a presentation. Two
different snap functions can be used at the same time, for example, snapping to a guide line and
the slide edge. It is recommended to only activate snap functions that are required.
Configuring grid and snap

To configure the grid and snap in a presentation, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress
> Grid (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) on the Menu bar to
display the Grid dialog (Figure 151).
Figure 151: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — Grid page

Grid
Specifies the settings for the grid used in Impress. This grid helps to determine the exact
position of objects. Also, the grid can be set in line with the snap grid. If the snap grid is
activated, to move or create individual objects without snapping to the grid, keep the
Shift key pressed to deactivate this function for as long as necessary.
Snap to grid
Specifies how frames, drawing elements, and controls are moved between grid points.
To change the status of Snap to grid only for the current action, drag an object while
holding down the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘).
Visible grid
Specifies how the grid is displayed.
Resolution
Horizontal
Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
Vertical
Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
Subdivision
Horizontal
Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.
Vertical
Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis.
Synchronize axes
Specifies how the current grid settings are changed symmetrically. The resolution and
subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same.
Snap
To snap lines
Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when the cursor is
released. Also, this setting can be defined by using Snap to Snap Guides on the
Options toolbar (Figure 152).
To the page margins
Specifies contour alignment of a graphic object to the nearest page margin. The cursor
or a contour line of the object must be in the snap range. In a presentation, this function
can also be accessed with Snap to page Margins in the Options toolbar.
To object frame
Specifies contour alignment of a graphic object to the border of the nearest object. The
cursor or a contour line of the object must be in the snap range. In a presentation, this
function can also be accessed with Snap to Object Border in the Options toolbar.
To object points
Specifies contour alignment of a graphic object to the points of the nearest object. This
only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the object is in the snap range. In a
presentation, this function can also be accessed with Snap to Object Points in the
Options toolbar.
Figure 152: Options toolbar

Snap range
Defines the snap distance between the cursor and the object contour. Snaps to a snap
point if the cursor is closer than the distance selected.
Constrain Objects
When creating or moving objects
Specifies that objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when
creating or moving them. This setting can be temporarily deactivated by pressing and
holding the Shift key.
Extend edges
Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the
Shift key is pressed before releasing the cursor. This also applies to an ellipse (a
circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When Extend edges
is not selected, a square or a circle is created based on the shorter side or diameter.
When rotating
Specifies that objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that is selected. To
rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key when rotating. Release
the Shift key when the desired rotation angle is reached.
Point reduction
Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, this is useful in
reducing the editing points.
The grid and snap functions can also be displayed and switched on or off using one of the
following methods:
• Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) on the Menu bar to display the Grid dialog.
• Right-clicking on a slide and using the options in the context menu.
• Using the tools in the Options toolbar.
Snap to grid
Using Snap to Grid
Use the Snap to Grid function to move an object exactly onto a grid point in a slide. This function
can be switched on and off using one of the following methods:
• Go to View > Snap Guides > Snap to Grid on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on a slide and select Snap Guides > Snap to Grid from the context menu.
• Click on Snap to Grid on the Options toolbar.
Displaying grid
To display or turn off the grid in a presentation using one of the following methods:
• Go to View > Grid and Helplines > Display Grid on the Menu bar.
• Click on Display Grid on the Options toolbar.
• Right-click on a slide and select Grid and Helplines > Display Grid from the context
menu.
• Select Visible grid option in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid (macOS
LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid).

Changing color of grid points
By default and depending on the display and computer setup, the grid points are gray and are not
always easy to see. To change the color of the grid points, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice
> Application Colors (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > Application Colors)
to open the Options LibreOffice Application Colors dialog (Figure 153). Select a suitable color for
the grid from the drop-down list in the Drawing/Presentation section to make grid points more
prominent against the color scheme in use.
Snap points and lines

Unlike the grid, snap lines and snap points are inserted when positioning an object to a specific
position on a slide. Snap lines can either be horizontal or vertical and appear as dashed lines.
Snap points appear as small crosses with dashed lines. Snap points and snap lines do not
appear in printed output.
Figure 153: Options LibreOffice dialog — Application Colors page
Figure 154: New Snap Object dialog

Inserting snap points and lines
To insert a snap point or line use one of the following methods to open the New Snap Object
dialog (Figure 154):
• Go to Insert > Snap Guide on the Menu bar.
• Right-click in an empty space on a slide and select Insert Snap Guide from the context
menu.
The options available in the New Snap Object dialog are as follows:
Position
Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left corner of the page.
X:
Enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and the left edge of
the page.
Y:
Enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and the top edge of
the page.
Type
Specifies the type of snap object required.
Point
Inserts a snap point. Both X: and Y: text boxes are active.
Vertical
Inserts a vertical snap line. Only X: text box is active.
Horizontal
Inserts a horizontal snap line. Only Y: text box is active.
Tip
When positioning snap lines, it is useful to display the rulers by selecting View >
Rulers on the Menu bar. Click on the horizontal or vertical ruler and drag a snap
line onto the slide.
Displaying snap points and lines

Display or turn off snap points and lines in a presentation using one of the following methods:
• Go to View > Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides on the Menu bar.
• Click on Display Snap Guides on the Options toolbar.
• Right-click on a slide and select Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides from the context
menu.
Editing snap points

1) Right-click on a snap point and select Edit Snap Point from the context menu to open the
Edit Snap Point dialog (Figure 155).
2) Enter new X: and Y: coordinate settings for the snap point and click OK.
3) Alternatively, click on the snap point and drag it to a position on the slide.
Editing snap lines

1) Right-click on a snap line and select Edit Snap Line from the context menu to open the
Edit Snap Line dialog (Figure 156).

Figure 155: Edit Snap Point dialog
Figure 156: Edit Snap Line dialog

2) Enter a new X: coordinate setting for vertical snap lines or a new Y: coordinate setting for
horizontal snap lines and click OK.
3) Alternatively, click on a snap line and drag it to a new position on the slide.
Deleting snap points and lines

1) Right-click on a snap point or line.
2) Select Delete Snap Point or Delete Snap Line from the context menu.
Note
Clicking on Delete in the Edit Snap Point dialog or Edit Snap Line dialog also
deletes a snap point or snap line.
Configuring snap range

The default snap range of when an object snaps to a snap point or line can be configured as
follows:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) on the Menu bar to open the Options
LibreOffice Impress Grid dialog.
2) Enter the number of pixels to set the proximity of when the object snaps into position in
the Snap range text box. The default setting is 5 pixels.
3) Click OK to set the new snap range and close the dialog.
Using Helplines
Helplines are used to position objects and display while an object is being moved. The helplines
extend from the edges of the object to the rulers at the top and left side of a workspace and do
not have a snap function, as shown in Figure 157.

Figure 157: Example of using helplines
Figure 158: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — View page

Use one of the following methods to display helplines while moving an object:
• Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > View (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > View) to open the Options LibreOffice Impress
View dialog (Figure 158) on the Menu bar and select Helplines while moving.
• Click on Helplines While Moving on the Options toolbar.
• Right-click in an empty area on a slide and select Grid and Helplines > Helplines While
Moving from the context menu.
Arranging objects
Impress organizes objects in a stack so that the objects on the top level of the stack cover the
objects on lower levels, if any overlapping occurs. The stack level for each object is changed by
arranging shapes on a slide. Select an object or objects and use one of the following methods to
change the stack level:
• Click on the required arrange tool on the Line and Filling toolbar.
• Right-click on selected objects and select Arrange from the context menu, then select
the required arrange option from the sub-context menu.
• Go to Format > Arrange on the Menu bar and select an option from the submenu.

The options available for arranging the object stack level on a slide are as follows:
Bring to Front
Selected object is moved in front of all other objects.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift++ (macOS ⌘+Shift++).
Bring Forward
Selected object is moved one level up in the stack.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl++ (macOS ⌘++).
Send Backward
Selected object is moved one level down in the stack.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+– (macOS ⌘+–).
Send to Back
Selected object is moved behind all other objects.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+– (macOS ⌘+Shift+–).
In Front of Object
Moves the first selected object in front of the second selected object. Select the first
object, then click on the second object and the objects swap position.
Behind Object
Moves the first selected object behind the second selected object. Select the first object,
then click on the second object and the objects swap position.
Reverse
Swaps the stacking order of two selected objects.
Connectors and gluepoints

Connectors are lines that anchor or glue to gluepoints on an object and, by default, are
positioned on the object border. When an object with a connector attached is moved or resized,
the connector automatically adjusts to the change. When creating a flowchart, organization chart,
schematics, or diagrams, it is highly recommended to use connectors instead of lines.
Connectors
When a connector is drawn or selected, Impress displays selection handles that are different to
the selection handles for normal lines. The termination points of a connector are round at each
end of a connector. The square selection handles on a connector line are used to change the
routing of a connector where applicable.
Impress offers a wide variety of predefined connectors, which differ in the termination shape
(none, arrow, circle) and in the way the connector is created (straight, line, curved). There is a
default set of connector types installed on the Connectors sub-toolbar (Figure 159) and these are
indicated by a check mark or highlighting, depending on the computer operating system and
setup.
The full range of predefined connectors can be accessed by clicking on the triangle ▼ on the title
bar of the Connectors sub-toolbar and selecting Visible Buttons from the context menu. For
more information on installing connectors onto the Connectors sub-toolbar, see Appendix B,
Toolbars.

The connector types are numbered to indicate the installation position from left to right on the
sub-toolbar.
1) Connector Ends with Arrow 15) Curved Connector Starts with Arrow
2) Straight Connector Ends with Arrow 16) Line Connector Starts with Arrow
3) Curved Connector Ends with Arrow 17) Connector Ends with Circle
4) Line Connector Ends with Arrow 18) Straight Connector Ends with Circle
5) Connector 19) Line Connector Ends with Circle
6) Straight Connector 20) Curved Connector Ends with Circle
7) Curved Connector 21) Connector Starts with Circle
8) Line Connector 22) Straight Connector Starts with Circle
9) Connector with Arrows 23) Line Connector Starts with Circle
10) Straight Connector with Arrows 24) Curved Connector Starts with Circle
11) Curved Connector with Arrows 25) Connector with Circles
12) Line Connector with Arrows 26) Straight Connector with Circles
13) Connector Starts with Arrow 27) Line Connector with Circles
14) Straight Connector Starts with Arrow 28) Curved Connector with Circles
Connector types
Standard
Connector name starts with Connector. Line segments run vertically and horizontally
creating a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends.
Line
Connector name starts with Line. Consists of a line segment with two smaller segments at
the ends and creates a connector that bends near a gluepoint. To adjust the length of the
line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the
bend point.
Straight
Connector name starts with Straight. Consists of a single line and draws a straight line
connector.
Curved
Connector name starts with Curved. Curved connectors are based on Bézier curves and
curve around objects creating a curved line connector.
Drawing connectors
1) Click on the triangle ▼ next to Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Connectors sub-toolbar (Figure 159).
2) Select the type of connector required from the Connectors sub-toolbar.
3) Move the cursor over one of the objects to be connected and small crosses appear
around the object edges, normally in the same position as the object selection handles.
These crosses are gluepoints to which a connector attaches, as shown in Figure 160.
4) Click on the required gluepoint to attach one end of the connector, then click, hold and
drag the connector to another object.
5) When the cursor is over the gluepoint of the target object release the cursor and the
connector is drawn.
6) The square selection handles that appear on the connector are used to adjust the path of
the connector. Click on a square selection handle and drag it to adjust the connector path
so that it does not to cover another object in its path, as shown by the example in
Figure 161.

Figure 160: Example of connector gluepoints
Figure 161: Example of connectors between objects
Note
The ends of the connector cannot be swapped, meaning the start point cannot
become the end point and the end point cannot become the start point. Swapping
ends of a connector, a new connector has to be created in the opposite direction.
Formatting connectors
To detach or reposition a connector, click on a round selection handle at either end of the
connector and drag to a different location, as shown in Figure 161.
To change the connector route between objects avoiding any objects on the route, click on a
square control handle on the connector line and drag it to a new position, as shown in
Figure 161.
To change a connector type, right-click on the connector and select Connector from the context
menu to open the Connector dialog (Figure 162). Use this dialog to select a connector type and
change the connector properties.
Type
Select the connector type from the drop-down list.

Figure 162: Connector dialog
Line skew
Defines the skew of the selected connector line and the dialog preview displays the result.
Line spacing
Sets the spacing for the connectors.
Begin horizontal
Amount of horizontal space required at the beginning of the connector.
Begin vertical
Amount of vertical space required at the beginning of the connector.
End horizontal
Amount of horizontal space required at the end of the connector.
End vertical
Amount of vertical space required at the end of the connector.
Preview window
A left click zooms in on the preview and a right-click zooms out.
Gluepoints
Gluepoints are not the same as the selection handles of an object. The selection handles are for
moving or changing the shape of an object. Gluepoints are used to fix or glue a connector to an
object so that when the object moves, the connector stays fixed to that object. All objects have
gluepoints, which are not normally displayed and only become visible when Connectors on the
Drawing toolbar is selected.
To insert, customize or delete gluepoints on an object, open the Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 163)
• Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
• Go to Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
• Click on Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.

Gluepoint types
When the Gluepoints toolbar opens, only the six tools on the left of the toolbar are active. The
remaining six tools on the right of the toolbar only become active when Gluepoint Relative is
deselected.
The six tools on the left of the Gluepoints toolbar are as follows:
Insert Gluepoint
Inserts a gluepoint when clicking twice on an object. See “Inserting gluepoints” on
Exit Direction Left
Connector attaches to the left edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Top
Connector attaches to the top edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Right
Connector attaches to the right edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Bottom
Connector attaches to the bottom edge of the selected gluepoint.
Gluepoint Relative
Maintains the relative position of a selected gluepoint to an object when that object is
resized. This tool is selected by default when the Gluepoint toolbar opens.
The six tools on the right of the Gluepoints toolbar only become active when Gluepoint Relative
is deselected.
Gluepoint Horizontal Left
When applied to a gluepoint in an object and the object is resized, the horizontal position
of the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the left edge of the object. The
vertical position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Gluepoint Horizontal Center
of the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the horizontal center of the
object. The vertical position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Gluepoint Horizontal Right
of the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the right edge of the object. The
vertical position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Gluepoint Vertical Top
When applied to a gluepoint in an object and the object is resized, the vertical position of
the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the top edge of the object. The
horizontal position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Gluepoint Vertical Center
the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the vertical center of the object.
The horizontal position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.

Gluepoint Vertical Bottom
the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the bottom edge of the object. The
horizontal position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Note
Gluepoints inserted into an object can only have one horizontal position and one
vertical position. Only one horizontal position and/or one vertical position can be
selected on the Gluepoints toolbar and used to customize a gluepoint.
Inserting gluepoints
By default, most objects normally have four gluepoints. Insert additional gluepoints into an object
as follows:
1) Make sure no objects are selected and use one of the following methods to open the
Gluepoints toolbar:
– Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Go to Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Click on Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.
2) Select the object, then click on Insert Gluepoint on the Gluepoints toolbar. Alternatively,
right-click on a gluepoint previously inserted and select Insert Gluepoint from the context
menu.
3) Move the cursor to a position where the gluepoint is to be inserted into an object and click
to insert the gluepoint.
4) To insert more gluepoints, move the cursor to a new position and click to insert another
gluepoint.
5) With the gluepoint selected, select the type of gluepoint required from the options on the
Gluepoints toolbar.
6) To move a gluepoint to another position, click on the gluepoint and drag it to its new
position.
7) When inserting gluepoints is complete, make sure Insert Gluepoint on the Gluepoints
toolbar is deselected.
Tip
When inserting, moving or customizing gluepoints, it is recommended to use the
zoom function to make it easier to work with gluepoints. Also, gluepoints snap to
the grid making it easier to position a gluepoint.
Note
Only gluepoints that have been inserted onto an object can be customized or
deleted. The default gluepoints included with an object cannot be customized or
deleted.
Customizing gluepoint exit direction

Gluepoints toolbar:

2) Double-click on a gluepoint that has been inserted to select the gluepoint for
customization.
3) Select an exit direction for the connector from the options available on the Gluepoints
toolbar, or right-click on the gluepoint and select the exit direction from the context menu.
4) When customizing exit direction is complete, make sure Insert Gluepoint on the
Gluepoints toolbar is deselected.
Customizing gluepoint position

Gluepoints toolbar:
2) Double-click on a gluepoint that has been inserted to select the gluepoint for
customization.
3) Click on Gluepoint Relative on the Gluepoints toolbar to deselect this tool, or right-click
on the gluepoint and deselect Gluepoint Relative from the context menu.
4) Select the horizontal and vertical positioning tools required for the gluepoint. Only one
horizontal positioning tool and one vertical positioning tool can be used on a gluepoint at
any one time.
5) When customizing gluepoint position is complete, make sure Insert Gluepoint on the
Gluepoints toolbar is deselected.
Deleting gluepoints
Gluepoints toolbar:
2) Select the gluepoint that has been previously inserted.
3) Press the Delete, or Backspace key, or go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar.
Working with 3D objects

Although Impress offers advanced functions to manipulate 3D objects, this guide describes only
the 3D settings applicable to an object. For additional information on how to use advanced 3D
effects such as geometry and shading, refer to the Draw Guide.
Figure 164: 3D-Objects toolbar

Figure 165: 3D-Settings toolbar
3D objects can be created in Impress in any of the following ways:
• Click on the triangle ▼ next to 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar and select a 3D object
from the drop-down list. After selection, draw a 3D object in exactly the same way as any
other object. The icon shown on the Drawing toolbar depends on the 3D object that had
been previously selected and used.
• Go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar to open the 3D-Objects toolbar
(Figure 164). This toolbar is the same as the 3D-Objects sub-toolbar that is available on
the Drawing toolbar.
• Right-click on an object already drawn on a slide and select Convert > To 3D or To 3D
Rotation Object from the context menu. To 3D adds thickness to the object to create a
3D object. To 3D Rotation Object creates a 3D object by rotating the object around an
axis.
• Select an object and click on Toggle Extrusion on the Drawing toolbar to apply a basic
3D effect and open the 3D-Settings toolbar (Figure 165). Select one of the options on the
3D-Settings toolbar to apply a different 3D effect.
The options available on the 3D-Settings toolbar are as follows:
Toggle Extrusion
Adds thickness to an object and activates the 3D properties.
Tilt Down
Tilts the object downwards around a horizontal axis.
Tilt Up
Tilts the object up around a horizontal axis.
Tilt Left
Tilts the object left around a vertical axis.
Tilt Right
Tilts the object right around a vertical axis.
Depth
Determines the thickness of the shape. An extended toolbar opens where some default
values are given. If none of the values are satisfactory, select Custom and then enter the
desired thickness.
Direction
Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to Direction opens a sub-toolbar to select the direction of
the perspective as well as the type (parallel or perspective).
Lighting
Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to Lighting opens a sub-toolbar to specify the direction
and intensity of light.
Surface
Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to Surface opens a sub-toolbar to specify the type of
surface from Wire Frame (useful when formatting an object), Matt, Plastic, or Metal.

3D–Color
Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to 3D–Color opens a color palette to select a color for
object thickness when an object is extruded to 3D.
Note
Most of the Fontwork shapes (see “Fontwork” on page 177) have 3D properties
and can be formatted with the 3D-Settings toolbar.
Converting objects
Objects are converted into different types using one of the following methods:
• Right-click on the object and select Convert from the context menu, then select a
conversion option from the context menu.
• Select an object and go to Format > Convert on the Menu bar and select a conversion
option from the submenu.
The options for converting objects to another type are as follows:
To Curve
Converts the selected object to a Bézier curve. Click on Points on the Drawing toolbar to
edit the points after conversion to a Bézier curve.
To Polygon
Converts the selected object to a polygon. Click on Points on the Drawing toolbar to edit
the object after conversion to a polygon. A polygon always consists of straight segments.
To Contour
Is equivalent to converting basic shapes to polygons. For more complex shapes (or for
text objects) this conversion creates a group of polygons that can be formatted by
entering the group.
To 3–D
Converts the selected object to a 3D object.
To 3–D Rotation Object
Creates a three-dimensional shape by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis.
To Bitmap
Converts the selected object to a bitmap.
To Metafile
Converts the selected object to Windows Metafile Format (WMF), containing both bitmap
and vector graphic data.
Note
Sometimes the conversion to a different type of object does not immediately
produce visible results.
To Curve, To Polygon, To 3–D, and To 3–D Rotation Object are additional tools
that can be added to the Drawing toolbar. See Appendix B, Toolbars for more
information.

Figure 166: Interaction dialog
Interaction with objects

Associating an object to an action that is carried out when an object is selected is called an
interaction.
1) Select an object for interaction and open the Interaction dialog (Figure 166) using one of
– Click on Interaction on the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Right-click on the object and select Interaction from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Interaction on the Menu bar.
2) Select the interaction from the available options in Action at mouse click and any
parameters (if applicable) that maybe available. The Interaction dialog changes
depending on the type of interaction selected. The interactions and parameters are
explained in Table 5.
4) To remove an interaction from an object, repeat the procedure and select No action as
the interaction type at Step 2.
Table 5: Interaction types and parameters
Interaction Parameters
No action No parameters.
Go to previous slide No parameters.
Go to next slide No parameters.

Interaction Parameters
Go to first slide No parameters.
Go to last slide No parameters.
Go to page or object Specify the target from the list in the Target box. Search for a
specific target in the Slide/Object box at the bottom of the screen.
Go to document Select the document in the Document box. Use Browse to open a
file browser. If the document to be opened is in ODP format, the
target list is populated allowing selection of the specific target.
Play sound Select the file containing the sound to be played. Use Browse to
open a file browser.
Run program Select the program to execute. Use Browse to open a file browser.
Run macro Select a macro that runs during the presentation. Use Browse to
open the Macro Selector dialog.
Exit presentation When the cursor is clicked over the object, the presentation
terminates.
Fontwork
Using Fontwork, graphical text art objects are created to make a presentation more attractive.
There are many different settings for text art objects (line, area, position, size, and so on) giving a
large selection of effects. Fontwork is also available in LibreOffice Writer, Calc, and Draw
modules, but there are small differences in the way that each module displays Fontwork. For
more information about Fontwork, see the Getting Started Guide.
Creating Fontwork
1) Go to Insert > Fontwork on the Menu bar to open the Fontwork Gallery dialog
(Figure 167).
2) Select a Fontwork style from the dialog and click OK. The selected Fontwork appears
centrally on the slide and the dialog closes.
3) Double-click on the Fontwork text graphic to switch on editing mode.
4) Type in the required text to replace the default text in the Fontwork graphic and the text
appears over the default text as shown by the example in Figure 168.
5) Press the Esc key or click outside the Fontwork graphic and the text replaces default text.
Fontwork toolbar
The Fontwork toolbar (Figure 169) becomes visible and active when a Fontwork object is
selected. If the toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars > Fontwork on the Menu bar. Also,
the Fontwork panel opens in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 170) and contains the
same tools as the Fontwork toolbar.
Insert Fontwork Text
Opens the Fontwork Gallery dialog.
Fontwork Shape
Changes the shape of a selected object. Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to Fontwork
Shape opens the Fontwork Shape sub-toolbar (Figure 171) allowing selection of a
Fontwork shape.

Figure 167: Fontwork Gallery dialog
Figure 168: Example of creating Fontwork

Figure 169: Fontwork toolbar
Figure 170: Fontwork panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Figure 171: Fontwork Shape sub-toolbar

Fontwork Same Letter Heights
Changes the height of characters in a selected Fontwork object. Toggles between normal
height where the characters have different heights to where all characters have the same
height.
Fontwork Alignment
Specifies the text alignment within the frame. Options available are Left Align, Center,
Right Align, Word Justify, and Stretch Justify. The effects of text alignment can only be
seen if the text spans over two or more lines. In the Stretch Justify mode, all lines are
filled completely.
Fontwork Character Spacing
Selects the spacing between characters and whether kerning pairs are used. Options
available are Very Tight, Tight, Normal, Loose, Very Loose, and Custom Spacing. For
Custom Spacing, input a percentage value: 100% is normal character spacing, less than
100% character spacing is tighter, and more than 100% character spacing is looser.
Toggle Extrusion
Converts a Fontwork object into a 3D shape using extrusion. See the Draw Guide for
more information.
Modifying Fontwork
It is possible to treat Fontwork text as an object and apply all the formatting that has been
described in this chapter. Assign line properties only to Fontwork that do not have a 3D effect,
otherwise the changes are not visible. Also, modify some of the Fontwork shapes by moving the
dot that is displayed with the selection handles. This is similar to modification of the angles of
trapezoid and parallelogram basic shapes.

Animations
Animated slide transitions are added between slides to give presentations a more professional
look when changing to the next slide (see Chapter 9, Slide Shows for more information on
transitions). Impress also allows animations to be added onto the slides creating more interest in
a presentation.
An animation consists of a sequence of images or objects called frames that are displayed in
succession when the animation runs. Each frame may contain one or more objects. For example,
bullet points appearing one by one; pictures, shapes or other objects appearing singly or as a
group onto a slide. Animations are controlled using a keyboard, a click, or automatically in a
timed sequence.
Note
Anything that can be placed onto a slide is an object. For example, an object can
be an image, clip art drawing, text, and so on.
Tip
Animations can look good in a presentation, but overuse of animations can make
a good presentation into a poor presentation. Always use discretion when adding
animations to a presentation.
Creating animations
1) Select an object on a slide and open the Animation deck on the Sidebar (Figure 172)
– Click on Animation on the Sidebar.
– Right-click on a selected object and select Animation from the context menu.
– Go to View > Animation on the Menu bar.
2) Click on Add Effect to add the selected object into the Animation preview box.
3) Select a category type from the options available in the Category drop-down list.
4) Select an animation effect from the options available in the Effects list.
5) Select how the animation starts from the options available in the Start drop-down list.
6) Select how the animation appears from the options available in the Direction drop-list.
Available options are specific to the effect selected in the Effects list.
7) Enter a time in seconds for how long the animation lasts in the Duration box.
8) Enter a timing delay in seconds for when the animated object appears in the presentation
in the Delay box.
9) If necessary, click on Options to open the Effect Options dialog to set any effect options
required for the animation, then click OK to close the Effect Options dialog.
10) If necessary, change the order of when the selected object appears in the animation using
Move Up or Move Down below the Animation preview box.
11) Click on Play to preview the animation effect.

Figure 172: Animation deck on Sidebar
12) If necessary, select Automatic Preview so that each time the animation is changed,
there is a preview of the effect.
13) When satisfied, run the slide show to check the presentation.
Animation tools and options

The available tools and options on the Animation deck on the Sidebar provide control over how
an animation is applied to an object on a slide.
Add Effect
Adds a selected object to the Animation preview box and add animation effects to the
object.
Remove Effect
Removes a selected object and its animated effects from the Animation preview box.
Move Up
Moves the selected object and its animation effect up the order of animation effects that
have been applied to an object.
Move Down
Moves the selected animation effect down the order of animation effects that have been
applied to an object.
Category
Select a category from the options available in the drop-down list.
Effect
Select an animation effect from the options available in the list.

Start
Select from the drop-down list how an animation effect starts when running an animation:
On click
Animation stops at this effect until the next click.
With previous
Animation runs immediately.
After previous
Animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends.
Direction
Select from the drop-down list how an animation effect appears on the slide. The options
available depend on the animation effect selected.
Options
Opens the Effect Options dialog for adjusting and applying options to the animation effect
and timing.
Duration
Select the duration, in seconds, of the selected animation effect.
Delay
Select the delay, in seconds, of when the animation effect starts.
Automatic Preview
Select this option to automatically preview an animation effect when it is applied to an
object.
Play
Test run the animation.
Figure 173: Effect Options dialog — Effect page

Effect Options dialog
Effect page
The Effect page (Figure 173) contains options that match the animation effect selected:
Settings
Direction
Specify the direction of the animation effect from the options available in the drop-down
list.
Enhancement
Sound
Select a sound from the drop-down list that plays when the animation effect is run.
After animation
Select from the drop-down list what happens after an animation effect ends.
— Don't dim – no after-effect runs.
— Dim with color – after the animation a dim color fills the shape.
— Hide after animation – hides the shape after the animation ends.
— Hide on next animation – hides the shape on the next animation.
Dim color
Select a dim color from the available color palettes.
Text animation
Select the animation mode for the text in an object:
— All at once – animates the text all at once.
— Word by word – animates the text word by word.
— Letter by letter – animates the text letter by letter.
Delay between characters
Specifies the percentage of delay between animations of words or letters.
Timing page
The Timing page on the Effect Options dialog (Figure 174) contains the following options:
Timing
Start
Displays the start property of the selected animation effect.
— On click – animation stops at this effect until the next click.
— With previous – animation runs immediately.
— After previous – animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends.
Delay
Specifies a delay in seconds before the effect starts.
Duration
Specifies the duration in seconds of the effect.
Repeat
Specifies whether and how to repeat the current effect. Enter the number of repeats, or
select from the list:
— none – effect is not repeated.
— Until next click – animation is repeated until the next click.
— Until end of slide – animation repeats as long as the slide is displayed.
Rewind when done playing
Specifies whether to let the animated object returns to its starting state after the
animation ends.

Figure 174: Effect Options dialog — Timing page
Figure 175: Effect Options dialog — Text Animation page

Trigger
Animate as part of click sequence
Specifies whether to let the animation start in the normal click sequence.
Start effect on click of
Specifies whether to let the animation start when a specified shape is clicked. Select
the shape by its name from the drop-down list.
Text Animation page

The Text Animation page on the Effect Options dialog (Figure 175) contains the following
options:

Group text
Specifies how the text is animated.
As one object
Whole text object is animated.
All paragraphs at once
All text paragraphs are animated.
By XX level paragraphs
Text for the outline level selected is animated. The options available depends on how
many outline levels there are in the animated text.
Automatically after
Specifies a delay in seconds before the text animation effect starts.
Animate attached shape
Animates an object that contains text.
In reverse order
Text paragraphs are animated in reverse order.
Animated images
Animation of drawing objects, text objects, and graphic objects (images) on slides can make a
presentation more interesting. Impress has a simple animation editor for creating animation
images (frames) by assembling objects from a slide. The animation effect is achieved by rotating
through static frames that are created.
Creating animated image

The following is an example of how to create an animated image.
1) Select an object or group of objects for inclusion in an animation and go to Insert >
Media > Animated Image to open the Animation dialog (Figure 176).
2) Add an object or objects using one of the following methods:
– Click on Apply Object to add a single object or a group of objects to the current
animation frame.
– Click on Apply Objects Individually to create a separate animation frame for each of
the selected objects.
3) In Animation Group, select Bitmap object.
4) Enter the frame (image) number in the Image Number box to setup the image.
5) In Duration specify the duration time in seconds for displaying a frame.
6) Specify the number of times a frame is displayed in the animation sequence in Loop
Count. This is called looping.
7) Repeat Steps 4 thru 6 for each image or object used for the animated image.
8) Click on Create and the animated image appears centrally on the slide.
Note
If the image to be copied consists of several objects, each object can be treated
as a separate frame. In this case, click on Apply Objects Individually.
Remember that each object is centered in the animation.

Figure 176: Animation dialog
Animation dialog controls

First Image
Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence.
Backwards
Plays the animation backwards.
Stop
Stops playing the animation.
Play
Plays the animation.
Last Image
Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence.
Image Number
Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence. To view another
image, enter its number or click the up and down arrows.
Duration
Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if
Bitmap object is selected in Animation group.
Loop Count
Sets the number of times that animation will play. If the animation is to play continuously,
select Max. This option is only available if Bitmap object is selected in Animation group.
Apply Object
Adds selected object or objects as a single image.
Apply Objects Individually
Adds an image for each selected object. If a grouped object is selected, an image is
created for each object in the group.

Delete Current Image
Deletes the current image from the animation sequence.
Delete All Images
Deletes all images in the animation.
Number
Total number of images in the animation.
Group object
Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. Individual
objects can still be edited by double-clicking the group in the slide.
Bitmap object
Combines images into a single image.
Create
Inserts the animation into the current slide.
Note
An animation, such as an animated GIF, can be selected. Click Apply Objects
Individually to open it for editing. When finished editing the animation, click
Create to insert a new animation into a slide.

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 6,
Formatting Graphic Objects
Introduction
A graphic object format consists of object size, rotation, and position on the slide. Also included in
the format are attributes that define the line, text, and area fill of an object. A graphics style can
also be created using the attributes from the graphic object format. This chapter discusses
manual formatting of objects and finishes by explaining how to create, apply, modify, and delete
graphics styles.
Working with lines

In LibreOffice the term “line” indicates both a freestanding segment (line), outer edge of a shape
(border), or an arrow. The line properties that can be modified are style (solid, dashed, invisible,
and so on), width, color, and type of arrowhead.
Note
When adding color to a line or arrow, refer to “Color fills” on page 200 on how to
change color, create custom colors, modify colors, or delete colors.

Use the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 177) to format a line as follows:
1) Make sure a line is selected on a slide.
2) Select a line style from the Line Style drop-down list.
3) Either type the line width in the Line Width text box, or use the up and down arrows to
change the line width.
4) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color and select a color from one of the color
palettes that are available.
5) If required, select from the Arrow Style drop-down list the type of arrowhead for each end
of the line to change the line into an arrow. The left drop-down list adds an arrowhead to
the start of a line and the right drop-down list adds an arrowhead to the end of a line.
6) If necessary, click on Shadow to add a shadow to the line. The shadow applied uses the
settings set in the Line dialog (for more information, see “Line dialog” on page 191).
7) Deselect the line to save the changes.
Sidebar
Use the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 178) to format a line as follows:

2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Line to open the Line panel.
4) In Line, when creating an arrow, select from the Arrow Style drop-down list the type of
arrowhead for each end of the line and change the line into an arrow. The left drop-down
list adds an arrowhead to the start of a line and the right drop-down list adds an
arrowhead to the end of a line.
5) In Line, select from the Line Style drop-down list the type of line from the options
available.
6) In Width, select a line width from the options in Select the width of the line drop-down
list, or enter a width in the Custom Line Width text box.
7) In Color, select a line color from one of the color palettes that are available in the Line
Color drop-down list.
8) In Transparency, move the slider or enter a percentage in the text box to set the shadow
transparency.
9) In Corner style, select a corner style from the options available in the drop-down list.
10) In Cap style, select the style of the line end caps from the drop-down list. The cap style is
also added to dashes if dashes have been used in the line style.
11) Deselect the line to save the changes.
12) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar and open the Line dialog
for more control over formatting lines (see “Line dialog” below for more information).
Line dialog
To fully change the appearance of a line, the Line dialog (Figure 179) is used and consists of four
pages: Line, Shadow, Line Styles and Arrow Styles.
2) Open the Line dialog using one of the following methods:
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 191

– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Line panel title bar in the Properties deck
on the Sidebar.
3) When all changes have been made to the selected line, click OK to close the dialog and
save the changes. The preview box at the bottom of the dialog shows the effect of any
changes made to a line.
Line properties
The Line page in the Line dialog is where the basic parameters of a line are selected and are as
follows:
Line Properties
Style
Select a line style from the Style drop-down list.
Color
Select a predefined color from the available color palettes. To create a custom color,
see to “Color fills” on page 200 for more information.
Width
Specifies thickness of a line.
Transparency
Sets the transparency percentage of a line. Figure 180 is an example of the effect
different transparency percentages have when lines placed over an object.
Arrow Styles
Only applicable to individual lines and is not used for lines that form the borders of an
object.
Start Style
Select an arrow style for the start of a line from the drop-down list.

Figure 180: Example of line transparency
(0%; 25%; 50%; 75% left to right)
Figure 181: Example of centers

(default top; center bottom)
Width
Specifies the thickness of the start arrowhead.
End Style
Select the arrow style for the end of a line from the drop-down list.
Width
Specifies the thickness of the end arrowhead.
Center
Moves the center of the arrowheads to the end point of the line. Figure 181 is an
example of the effects this option is selected.
Synchronize ends
Makes the two arrowheads identical.
Corner and Cap Styles
Determines how the connection between two segments of a line looks. To appreciate the
difference between corner and cap styles, choose a thick line style and observe how the
preview changes as each option is selected.
Corner style
Select the shape used at the corners of the line from the drop-down list. For a small
angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
Cap style
Select the style of the line end caps from the drop-down list. The caps are added to
inner dashes as well.
Line shadows
To quickly apply a shadow to a line, click on Shadow on the Line and Filling toolbar. This creates
a shadow using the settings from the Shadow page in the Line dialog.

The Shadow page of the Line dialog (Figure 182) provides options for adding and formatting a
line shadow. The shadow settings in this dialog are the same as the shadow settings used for
object areas. However, shadow settings for a line can be different from the shadow settings used
for object areas. For more information on shadow settings, see “Working with shadows” on
page 216.
Line styles
Line styles are used in a drawing when adding several lines of similar types reducing the need to
format individual lines and LibreOffice provides line styles for line formatting. Also, line styles can
be created, saved, and deleted.
The Line Styles page in the Line dialog (Figure 183) provides options to use line styles and to
create or change line styles. An example of the line style selected or created is displayed at the
bottom of the Line Styles page.
Figure 182: Line dialog — Shadow page
Figure 183: Line dialog — Styles page

Creating line styles
1) Create a line in a drawing.
– Click on Line Styles to open the Line Styles page.
3) Select from the Line style drop-down menu a predefined line style that is similar to the line
style being created.
4) Click Add and type a name for the new line style in the Name dialog that opens, then
click OK to close the dialog. The name of the new style appears in the Line style box.
5) In the Type drop-down lists, select Dots or Dash. For lines with only dots or dashes,
select the same type in both Type boxes.
6) In Number, specify the number of dots or dashes required. For different sized groups of
dots or dashes, set a different quantity number in each Number box.
7) In Length, specify the length percentage for dashes. Length is not available if Dots has
been selected for Type.
8) In Spacing, set a spacing percentage between the dots and/or dashes.
9) If necessary, select Fit to line width so that the new style fits the width of the selected line.
10) The new line style created is available only in the current document. To use the new line
style in other documents, click on Save Line Styles and type a unique filename in the
Save as dialog that opens. Saved line styles have the file extension of SOD.
11) To use a previously created line style, click on Load Line Styles, then select a style from
the list of saved styles and click on Open to load the style into the document.
12) If necessary, click on Modify to change the name of the style and follow Steps 4 thru 11
to create and use a new line style.
13) Click OK to save any changes and close the Line dialog.
Note
When creating line styles, it is recommended to use a unique name for the line
style. This prevents a predefined line styles in LibreOffice from being overwritten
causing formatting problems in other documents using predefined line styles.
Deleting line styles

1) Open the Line dialog and click on Line Styles to open the Line Styles page.
2) Select the line style for deletion from the Line style drop-down list.
3) Click on Delete, then confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog
that opens.
Note
When deleting line styles, make sure the line style is not used in another
document. It is recommended to only delete line styles that have been created
and not to delete a LibreOffice predefined line style. This prevents any formatting
problems in other documents where line styles have been used.

Arrow styles
Creating arrow styles
Any shape can be used as an arrowhead, but the shape must be convertible to a curve. A curve
is something drawn without lifting a pencil. For example, a star can be converted to a curve, but a
smiley face cannot.
1) Select a shape, or create a shape that can be converted to a curve for use as a new
arrowhead. The part of the shape that is going to be point of the arrowhead must face
upward. An example of a new arrowhead is shown in Figure 184.
2) If necessary, select the shape, right-click and select Convert > To Curve from the context
menu. If the shape is already a curve, To Curve will not be available.
3) Make sure the arrowhead shape is selected.
Figure 184: Example arrowhead
Figure 185: Line dialog — Arrow Styles page

4) Open the Line dialog and click on Arrow Styles to open the Arrow Styles page
(Figure 185).
5) Click on Add, type a name for the new arrow style in the dialog that opens, then click OK.
The new arrowhead style appears on the Arrow Styles page and at the bottom of the
Arrow style drop-down list.
6) The new arrow style created is available only in the current document. To use the created
arrow style in other documents, click on Save arrow styles and type a unique filename in
the dialog that opens. Saved arrow styles have the file extension of SOE.
7) To use a previously saved arrow styles, click on Load arrow styles to open a file browser
and select the style from the saved list of styles. Click Open to load the style into a
document.
8) If necessary, make changes to the arrow style and click on Modify, then enter a name in
the dialog to change the name of the arrow style.
Deleting arrow styles

2) Click on Arrow Styles to open the Arrow Styles page.
3) Select the arrow style for deletion from the Arrow style drop-down list.
4) Click on Delete, then confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog
that opens.
Note
When deleting arrow styles, make sure the arrow style is not used in another
document. It is recommended to only delete arrow styles that have been created
and not to delete a LibreOffice predefined arrow styles. This prevents any
formatting problems in other documents where the arrow style has been used.
Using area fills

Area fill refers to the inside of an object that has an unbroken border, for example a rectangle,
circle, star, pentagon and so on. Area fills can consist of a color, gradient, hatching, pattern,
bitmap, image, or pattern, as shown by the examples in Figure 186. Area fills can also be made
partly or wholly transparent and throw a shadow.
Note
Although the characteristics of an existing area fill can be changed and then
modified by clicking on Modify, it is recommended that only custom area fills are
modified rather than modifying a LibreOffice predefined area fill. Predefined area
fills may be reset when LibreOffice is updated.

Figure 186: Example of area fill types
1) None 4) Image
2) Color 5) Pattern
3) Gradient 6) Hatch
Area fill types

The area fill types that are available for use with objects are as follows. To create custom area fill
types, see “Working with area fill types” on page 200 for more information.
None
Select if an area fill for an object is not required.
Color
Select a color palette from the available palettes, then select a color in the palette by
clicking on the color.
Gradient
Select the required gradient from the available options.
Image
Select the required image from the available options.
Pattern
Select the required pattern from the available options.
Hatch
Select the required hatching from the available options.
Use Background
Select this option to use one object to create a hole through several objects placed in a
stack on a slide and show the slide background as an area fill.

Tools on the Line and Filling toolbar provide a number of default fillings available to quickly format
the area fill of objects. If this toolbar is not showing, go to View > Toolbars > Line and Filling on
the Menu bar.
1) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Click on Area Style/Filling on the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 177 on page 190),
select the type of fill required from the drop-down list. For more information on area fills,
see “Area fill types” on page 198 and “Working with area fill types” on page 200.

3) Deselect the object to save any changes.
Sidebar
The options available in the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar provide a number
of default fillings available with restricted options to quickly format the area fill of objects.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then click on Area to
open the Area panel (Figure 187).
3) Use the various options in the Fill and Transparency drop-down lists to format the fill and
transparency of an object. For more information on area fills, see “Area fill types” on
page 198 and “Working with area fill types” on page 200.
4) Deselect the object to save any changes.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the Area title bar to open the Area
dialog giving more control over the appearance of the object fill.
Area dialog
Use the Area dialog (Figure 188) to change existing area fills with greater control, or create an
area fill.
2) Open the Area dialog using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Area on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Area from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Area panel title on the Sidebar.
3) Click on Area to open the Area page.
Figure 187: Area panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 188: Area dialog — Color page
4) Select the area fill from the options available. The number of available options depends
on the type of area fill selected. For more information on area fills, see “Area fill types” on
page 198 and “Working with area fill types” on page 200.
5) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.
Working with area fill types

Color fills
Adding color
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color to
open the options available for a color fill (Figure 188).
3) In Palette, select the required color palette from the drop-down list and the required color
from the available colors. All color fills available are solid colors.
– Active – shows the present color fill of a selected object. After selecting a new color,
a preview of the selected color appears in New.
– Alternatively, enter the RGB or Hex values of a color in the appropriate text box.
– Alternatively, click on Pick to open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 189). Select a color
from the color box or enter the RGB, Hex, HSB or CMYK values.
– If a color has been used before, then select the required color from Recent Colors.
4) Click OK to close the dialog and save the changes. The color area fill appears in the
selected object.
Creating custom colors with Area dialog

Custom colors can be created by changing the values of the following color notations.
• RGB notation of Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B)
• Hex # number
• Values of Hue (H), Saturation (S), and Brightness (B)

• CMYK percentages of Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K).
Note
The color notations are linked and changing the value in one set, automatically
changes the values in the other sets.

open the options available for a color fill.
3) Specify the values for either RGB, Hex #, HSB, or CMYK.
4) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to the Custom palette.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The new color appears as a fill
in the selected object.
Creating colors with Pick a Color dialog

open the options available for a color fill.
3) Click on Pick to open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 189).
Figure 189: Pick a Color dialog

4) Create a new color using one of the following methods. A preview of the color created is
shown in the colored box on the left side of the original color.
– Select a color range from the colored bar, then, using the cursor, move the target in
the colored box until the cursor is on the color required.
– Enter the color values in the RGB text boxes.
– If known, enter the Hex# number in the text box. For example, Hex numbers are
normally used when a specific color has been created, for example a company logo.
– Enter the color values in the HSB text boxes. HSB values do not change the color, but
how a color looks.
– Enter the color percentages in the CMYK text boxes.
5) Click OK to close the Pick a Color dialog.
6) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name for the color in the Name dialog that
opens.
7) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to the Custom palette.
8) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The new color appears as a fill
in the selected object.
Deleting custom colors

1) Select an object for editing and open the Area dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color to open the options available for
a color fill.
3) Select Custom from the Palette drop-down list in Colors.
4) Select the color for deletion from those displayed and click on Delete. There is no
confirmation given when deleting a color.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.
Note
Only colors that have been created and placed in the custom palette can be
deleted. Colors from color palettes installed with LibreOffice cannot be deleted.
Adding color palettes

Color palettes that are compatible with LibreOffice can be added using Extensions: Color
Palettes as follows:
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color to open the options available for
a color fill.
3) In Colors, click on Add color palettes via extension to open the Extensions: Color
Palette dialog (Figure 190).
4) Select a color palette from the list of available color palette extensions and click on Install
to install the extension into LibreOffice.
5) Click on Close to close the Extensions: Color Palette dialog and the color palette appears
in the Palette drop-down list ready for use.

Figure 190: Extensions: Color Palette dialog
Figure 191: Area dialog — Gradient page
Gradient fills
Adding gradients

2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient (Figure 191) to open the
options available for a gradient fill.
3) In Gradient, select the required gradient from the list of available gradients and it appears
in Preview.
4) To override the default gradient transition of a selection, deselect Automatic in Options
and then enter the values for Type, Increment, Angle, Border, From Color, and To Color in
the available boxes.
5) Click OK to close the dialog and save the changes. The gradient area fill appears in the
selected object.
Creating custom gradients

Gradients can be modified or created. Several types of gradients are predefined in LibreOffice.
Changing the From Color and To Color settings could be sufficient to create a satisfactory result.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to open the options available
for a gradient fill.
3) In Gradient, select one of the predefined gradient from the list of available gradients and
it appears in Preview.
4) In Options, select a gradient type from the Type drop-down list: Linear, Axial, Radial,
Ellipsoid, or Square. Each gradient type changes the gradient displayed in Preview.
5) Adjust the settings in Options as necessary. Options used for gradients are explained in
Table 6. Depending on the gradient type selected, some options will not be available.
6) Click on Add and enter a name for the gradient in the Name dialog that opens.
7) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the gradient is added at the end of the gradients
displayed in Gradient.
Note
It is recommended to only modify, rename or delete gradients that have been
created. Custom gradients are always positioned at the bottom of the displayed
gradients. Modifying, renaming or deleting gradients that are installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in documents that use one of these gradients.
Table 6: Gradient options

Gradient property Description
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in a
Linear gradient
straight line.
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from the
Axial gradient
object center to the object edges in two opposite directions.
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in a
Radial gradient
circular pattern.
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in an
Ellipsoid gradient
elliptical pattern.
Quadratic gradient
object edges to the object center in four directions.

Gradient property Description
Square gradient
object edges to the object center in a square pattern.
Enter the number of steps for blending the two colors of the gradient.
Increment
By default this is set to Automatic.
For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square, and Rectangular gradients, modify
Center X
these values to set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.
For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square, and Rectangular gradients, modify
Center Y
these values to set the vertical offset of the gradient center.
Angle For all gradient types, modifies the angle of the gradient axis.
Increase this value to make the gradient start further away from the
Border
border of the shape.
The start color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of
From Color
the color: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.
The end color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of
To Color
the color: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.
Modifying gradients
1) Select the object for editing where the gradient is going to be modified and open the Area
dialog.
3) Select a gradient previously created and added to the gradients displayed in Gradient.
4) Enter the new values for the gradient options that need to be changed. See Table 6 for
more information on gradient options. Depending on the type of gradient selected, some
options may not be available.
5) Click Modify to save the changes. There is no confirmation given when modifying a
gradient.
Renaming gradients
1) Select the object for editing where the gradient is going to be renamed and open the Area
dialog.
3) Right-click on the gradient that is going to be renamed and select Rename from the
context menu.
4) Enter a name for the gradient in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the name change and close the Name dialog.
Deleting gradients
1) Select the object for editing where the gradient is going to be deleted and open the Area
dialog.

Figure 193: Example of using Interactive Gradient tool

3) Select a gradient that has been created and added to the gradients displayed in
Gradient.
4) Right-click on the gradient and select Delete from the pop-up menu. Click on Yes to
confirm the deletion.
Advanced gradient controls

1) Select the object that contains a gradient as a fill and open the Area dialog.
3) Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar, or click on
Transformations on the Line and Filling toolbar to open the Transformations toolbar
(Figure 192).
4) Click on Interactive gradient in the Transformations toolbar. This displays a dashed line
connecting two colored squares. The colors show the From Color and To Color that have
been used for the selected gradient (Figure 193).
5) Select the type of gradient required for the object from the Type drop-down list in Options
on the Gradient page in the Area dialog.
The gradient properties are adjusted depending on the gradient type selected and these
properties are explained below.
Linear
Move the From Color square to change where the gradient starts (border value). Move
the To Color square to change the orientation (angle value).
Axial
Move the To Color square to change both the angle and border properties of the gradient.
Only the To Color square can be moved.
Radial
Move the From Color square to modify the border property to set the width of the gradient
circle. Move the To Color square to change the point where the gradient ends (Center X
and Center Y values).

Ellipsoid
Move the From Color square to modify the border property to set the size of the gradient
ellipsoid. Move the To Color square to change the angle of the ellipsoid axis and the axis
itself.
Quadratic
Move the From Color square to modify the border to set the size of the gradient square or
rectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move the To Color square to change the
center of the gradient.
Square
Move the From Color square to modify the border to set the size of the gradient square or
rectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move the To Color square to change the
center of the gradient.
Note
Moving the squares creates different effects depending on the type of gradient.
For example, for a linear gradient, the start and end squares of the gradient are
always situated either side of the center point of the object.
Image fills
Note
Image fills in the Area dialog are called bitmap fills in the Line and Filling toolbar,
and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. Using the Line and
Filling toolbar, or the Area panel for bitmap area fills, is similar to using image
area fills in the Area dialog, but drop-down lists are used with a restricted
selection of options.
Figure 194: Area dialog — Image page

Adding image fills
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image (Figure 194) to open the
options available for an image fill.
3) In Image, select the required image from the list of available images and it appears in
Preview.
4) Alternatively, click on Add/Import to open a file browser window, then select an image file
to use as an image fill.
5) To override settings for the selected image, in Options, enter values for Style, Size,
Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling Offset. See Table 7 for information on image options.
6) Click OK to close the dialog and save the changes. The image area fill appears in the
selected object.
Table 7: Image options
Option Purpose
Style – Custom When selected, the position of the image in the object and the size of
position/size the image can be determined.
When selected, the image is tiled to fill the area. The size of the image
Style – Tiled
used for the tiling is determined by the Size settings
Style – Stretched When selected, an image is stretched to fill object area.
Sets the width of the image. For example, 100% means that the
Size – Width image original width is resized to occupy the whole fill area width,
50% means that the image width is half that of the fill area.
Sets the height of the image. For example, 100% means that the
Size – Height image original height is resized to occupy the whole fill area height,
50% means that the image height is half that of the fill area.
When selected, image size is given as a percentage for Width and
Size – Scale Height. When deselected, the actual size of the image is given for
Width and Height.
When selected, the anchoring point of the image is determined.
Position
Default position is Center.
When Tile is selected, sets the offset for the image width in
Tiling Position – X
percentage values. 50% offset means that Impress places the middle
offset
part of the image at the anchor point and starts tiling from there.
When Tile is selected, sets the offset for the image height in
Tiling Position – Y
percentage values. 50% offset means that Impress places the middle
offset
part of the image at the anchor point and starts tiling from there.
Tiling Offset – When Tile is selected, offsets the rows of tiled images by the entered
Row percentage value so that each row is offset from the previous row.
When Tile is selected, offsets the columns of tiled images by the
Tiling Offset –
entered percentage value so that each column is offset from the
Column
previous column.

Figure 195: Example of using image fills
1) Original image
2) Width and height 25% scaled.
Anchor to top left corner.
No offset.
3) Width and height 25% scaled.
Anchor to top right.
Row offset 50%.
Editing images
1) Select an object for editing that contains an image as a fill, or insert an image into a
selected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image to
open the options available for an image fill.
3) Select an image from the options available in Image to use and edit as a fill. Note that
any imported images are also available.
4) In Options, select the properties for Style, Size, Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling
Offset. See Table 7 for more information on image properties. The best way to understand
image properties is to use them. Figure 195 shows examples of using image fills.
Importing images
1) Select an object to import an image file into.
3) Click on Add/Import and a file browser window opens.
4) Navigate to the directory containing the image file, then select it and click Open.
5) Enter a name for the new image in the Name dialog that opens, then click OK to close the
Name dialog. The imported image appears at the bottom of the Image preview box.
6) Select the imported image in the Image preview box.
7) Click OK to import the image into the selected object and close the Area dialog.

Renaming images
1) Select an object that uses an image as an area fill.
3) Right-click on the image selected for renaming and select Rename from the context
menu.
4) Enter a new name for the image in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK save the change and close the Name dialog.
Deleting images
1) Select an object that contains the image that is going to be deleted.
3) Right-click on the image that is going to be deleted in the Image preview box.
4) Select Delete from the context menu and click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
Note
It is recommended to only rename or delete images that have been created or
imported. Renaming or deleting images that are installed with LibreOffice may
cause problems in documents that use one of these images.
Pattern fills
Using pattern fills
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern (Figure 196) to open the
options available for a pattern fill.
3) In Pattern, select a pattern from the displayed options and it appears in Preview.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The pattern area fill appears in
the selected object.
Creating patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern as a fill, or insert a pattern into the selected
object.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern to open the options available
for a pattern fill.
3) If necessary, select a pattern from the options displayed in Pattern. Note that any custom
or imported patterns are also available. The selected pattern appears in Pattern Editor.
4) Select a color from the available color palettes for the Foreground Color and Background
Color.
5) In Pattern Editor, start creating the pattern by clicking in the squares (pixels) to change
color. Each click in a square swaps the color from Background Color to Foreground Color
or Foreground Color to Background Color.

Figure 196: Area dialog — Pattern page
6) Check the pattern being created in Pattern Editor and Preview to see if the desired effect
is being achieved.
7) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
8) Enter a name for the new pattern, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The new
pattern appears at the bottom of the displayed patterns in Pattern.
Modifying patterns
object.
for a pattern fill.
3) If necessary, select a pattern from the options displayed in Pattern. Note that any custom
or imported patterns are also available. The selected pattern appears in Pattern Editor.
4) Enter new colors for Foreground Color and Background Color from the available color
palettes.
5) In Pattern Editor, start modifying the pattern by clicking in the squares (pixels) to change
color. Each click in a square swaps the color between Background Color and Foreground
Color.
6) Check the pattern being created in Pattern Editor and Preview to see if the desired effect
is being achieved.
7) Click on Modify to save the pattern changes. There is no confirmation given when
modifying a pattern fill.

Note
It is recommended to only modify, rename or delete patterns that have been
created. Modifying, renaming or deleting patterns that were installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in documents that use one of these patterns.
Renaming patterns
object.
for a pattern fill.
3) In Pattern, right-click on the pattern that is displayed in the selected object, then select
Rename from the context menu.
4) Enter a name for the pattern in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK save the renaming and close the Name box.
Deleting patterns
object.
for a pattern fill.
3) In Pattern, right-click on the pattern that is displayed in the selected object, then select
Delete from the context menu.
4) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
Hatch fills
Using hatch fills
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch (Figure 197) to open the
options available for a hatch fill.
3) In Hatch, select a hatch from the displayed options and it appears in Preview.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The hatch area fill appears in
the selected object.
Creating hatch fills

When creating new hatch fills or modifying an existing hatch fill, use the options available on the
Hatch page in the Area dialog.
Note
It is recommended to create new hatch fills rather than modify existing hatch fills.
1) Select an object that contains a hatch fill, or insert a hatch fill into the selected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch to
open the options available for a hatch fill.

Figure 197: Area dialog — Hatch page
3) As a starting point, select a hatch fill similar to the one being created. The selected hatch
fill appears in Preview.
4) Change the values of the option settings for the hatch fill. The hatch fill displayed in
Preview changes to reflect the changes in option values. See Table 8 for information on
hatch options.
5) Click on Add to open a Name dialog and enter a name for the new hatch fill.
6) Click OK to close the Name dialog. The new hatch fill appears at the bottom of the hatch
fills displayed in Hatch.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The new hatch fill appears in the
selected object.
Table 8: Hatch options
Hatch option Meaning
Determines the spacing between two lines of the hatching fill. As
Spacing
the value is changed the Preview is updated.
Determines the angle used for the hatch lines. Either use the
Angle
slider or enter a value in the box to change the angle.
Line type Set single, double or triple line for the style of the hatching fill.
Select a color of the lines that form the hatching fill from the
Line color
drop-down list of available color palettes
Select a color for the background color behind the hatching lines
Background color
from the drop-down list of available color palettes
Modifying hatch fills

1) Select an object that contains a hatch as a fill, or insert a hatch into the selected object.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch to open the options available
for a hatch fill.

3) In Hatch, select the hatch that is displayed in the selected object. The selected hatch
appears in Preview.
4) Enter new values for the option settings of the hatch fill. The hatch fill displayed in
Preview changes to reflect the changes in option values. See Table 8 for information on
hatch options.
5) Click Modify to save the changes. There is no confirmation given when modifying a hatch
fill.
Note
It is recommended to only modify, rename or delete hatch fills that have been
created. Modifying, renaming or deleting hatch fills that were installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in documents that use one of these hatch fills.
Renaming hatch fills

for a hatch fill.
3) In Hatch, right-click on the hatch that is displayed in the selected object, then select
Rename from the context menu.
4) Enter a name for the hatch in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK save the renaming and close the Name box.
Deleting hatch fills

for a hatch fill.
3) In Hatch, right-click on the hatch that is displayed in the selected object, then select
Delete from the context menu.
4) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion, then click OK to save the changes and close the
Area dialog.
Background image fills

Background image fills are used to allow an object create windows on a slide and display any
background image that has been placed on the slide. Figure 198 shows an example of an ellipse,
the topmost object, being used as a window through the underlying pentagon and rectangle
objects, and showing a portion of the background image.
1) Select a slide in a presentation that uses a background image.
2) Insert several objects onto the slide and position the objects into a stack.
3) Add an object that is going to be used as window onto the object stack as the topmost
object and make sure it is selected.

Figure 198: Example of using background image as fill
4) Change the fill of the selected object to a background image fill using one of the following
methods:
– Open the Area dialog and select Use Background from the options available on the
Area page.
– On the Line and Filling toolbar, select Use Slide Background from the options
available in the Area/Style Filling drop-down menu.
– In the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, select Use Slide
Background from the options available in the Fill drop-down list.
5) Deselect the object and the background image appears in the object creating a window.
Note
There are no options available for using a background image fill. When a
background image fill is applied to an object, the whole of the object area is used
for the area fill.

Figure 199: Area dialog — Shadow page
Figure 200: Shadow panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Working with shadows

Shadows can be applied to objects such as lines, shapes and text. The options available for
shadows are as follows:
Use shadow
This option must be selected to use a shadow with an object. Only available in the
Shadow page of the Area dialog (Figure 199).
Enable
This option must be selected to use a shadow with an object. Only available in the
Shadow panel in the Properties on the Sidebar (Figure 200).

Position grid
Select one of nine points determining the direction in which the shadow is cast from the
object. Only available in the Shadow page of the Area dialog (Figure 199).
Angle
Determines the angle in which the shadow is cast from the object. Only available in the
Shadow panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 200).
Color
Sets the color used for the shadow.
Distance
Determines the offset distance between the object and the shadow.
Blur
Sets how much the edges of a shadow are blurred or softened.
Transparency
Determines the amount of transparency for the shadow: 0% opaque shadow, 100%
transparent shadow.
Area dialog
1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Shadow to open the Shadow page.
3) Select Use shadow in Properties and the shadow options become active.
4) Select from one of nine points in the position grid the direction in which the shadow is
going to be cast in relation to the object.
5) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes, then select
the color required for the shadow.
6) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
7) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
8) In Transparency, enter the percentage in the text box for the shadow transparency.
Sidebar
2) Click on Properties to open the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
3) Click on Shadow to open the Shadow panel in the Properties deck.
4) Select Enable and the shadow options become active.
5) In Angle, select from one of the options available from the drop-down list to set the
direction of where the shadow is going to be cast in relation to the object.
6) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
7) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes and then
select the color required for the shadow.
8) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
9) In Transparency, move the slider or enter a percentage in the text box to set the shadow
transparency.
10) Deselect the object to save the changes made.

2) Click on Shadow on the Line and Filling toolbar. A shadow is created using the settings
from the Shadow page in the Area dialog.
3) Deselect the object to save the changes made.
Working with transparencies

Transparencies can be applied to objects and to any shadow that has been applied to an object.
In Impress two types of transparencies can be applied to an object – uniform transparency and
gradient transparency. For more information on gradient transparencies, including an example of
combining a color gradient with a gradient transparency, see “Gradient fills” on page 203.
Using Area dialog

1) Select an object where a transparency is going to be applied.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Transparency to open the Transparency page
(Figure 201).
3) To create a uniform transparency, select Transparency and enter a percentage in the text
box.
4) To create a gradient transparency so that the area becomes gradually transparent, select
Gradient and select the type of gradient transparency from the Type drop-down list:
Linear, Axial, Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic or Square.
5) If a gradient transparency has been selected, set the parameters for the type of the
gradient transparency that has been selected. The available options depends on the type
of gradient transparency. Refer to Table 9 for a description of the properties.
Using Area panel on Sidebar

1) Select an object where a transparency is going to be applied.
2) Open the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 187 on page 199).
Figure 201: Area dialog — Transparency page

3) Click in the Transparency option box and open a drop-down list of available types of
transparencies.
4) Select a transparency type from the available options in the drop-down list: Solid, Linear,
Axial, Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic or Square. The selection of a transparency type
changes the available options to match the selected transparency type.
a) Select Solid to create a uniform transparency and use the slider or text box to change
the transparency percentage.
b) Select from Linear, Axial, Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic or Square to create a
gradient transparency so that the area fill becomes gradually transparent.
c) If a gradient transparency has been selected, the available options change to match
the type of the gradient transparency. Refer to Table 9 for a description of the gradient
transparency options.
5) Click outside of the object to deselect it and save the changes.
Table 9: Gradient transparency options
Gradient transparency
Meaning
options
Used for Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The
Center X
values to set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.
Used for Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The
Center Y
values to set the vertical offset of the gradient center.
Used for Linear, Axial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square
Angle
gradients. Specifies the angle of the gradient axis.
Increase this value to make the gradient start further away from
Border
the border of the object.
Value for the starting transparency gradient. 0% is fully opaque,
Start value
100% means fully transparent.
Value for the ending transparency gradient. 0% is fully opaque,
End value
100% means fully transparent.
Text in objects
Note
By default, an object is not dynamic when it is created and does not behave like a
text box. If the text exceeds the object borders, then the text has to be reduced in
font size, or the object size increased to accommodate the text.
Adding text
1) Select the object where text is to be added.
2) Put the selected object into text mode using one of the following methods. The cursor
becomes a text cursor and flashes inside the object indicating that text mode is active.
The Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Double-click on the object.
– Go to Insert > Text Box on the Menu bar.

– Click on Insert Text Box on the Standard or Drawing toolbar to insert horizontal text.
– Click on Insert Vertical Text on the Standard or Drawing toolbar to insert vertical text.
3) Type the required text. Horizontal text is centrally aligned horizontally and vertically within
the boundaries of the object. Vertical text is aligned centrally on the left side of the object.
4) Alternatively, copy and paste text into the selected object. It is recommended to paste text
into an object as unformatted text and then format the text to to the presentation
requirements.
5) When finished, click outside of the object or press Esc to cancel text mode. The Line and
Filling toolbar automatically opens replacing the Text Formatting toolbar.
Notes
If double-clicking on an object does not work, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu
bar to open the Options toolbar and select Double-click to edit Text.
Vertical text is only available if Asian and/or Complex text layout have been
selected in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages (macOS
LibreOffice > Preferences > Language Settings > Languages).
Formatting text in objects

This section only covers formatting of how text appears inside an object. For more information on
formatting text attributes, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
1) Select an object which contains text and use one of the following methods to open the
Text dialog (Figure 202):
– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Text Attributes on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the text inside the object and select Text Attributes from the context
menu.
2) Click on Text to open the Text page.
Figure 202: Text dialog — Text page

3) Format and edit the text within an object using the available options and one of the
following methods. See Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for more information on
formatting text attributes. The text formatting options for objects are described in Table 10.
– Use the tools available on the Text Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format > Text on the Menu bar and use the options available in the drop-down
menu.
4) Click OK to close the Text dialog and save the changes to the text.
Table 10: Text formatting options for objects
Text options Meaning
Starts a new line automatically when the border of the object is
Word wrap text in shape
reached.
Expands an object when the text inserted in the object is too
Resize shape to fit text
large.
Specify the amount of space between the borders of the object
Spacing to borders
and the text.
Text anchor Used to anchor the text to a particular point within the object.
Anchors the text in the center of the object and uses the full
Full width
width of the object before wrapping text.
Text animation
Text can be animated when it has been placed into an object and is a separate animation from
object animation. For information on object animation, see Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects.
1) Select an object which contains text.
2) Open the Text dialog and click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page
(Figure 203).
Figure 203: Text dialog — Text Animation page

3) Select the type of animation required from the available options in the Effect drop-down
list as follows:
– No Effect — default setting.
– Blink — text blinks on the screen.
– Scroll Through — text moves into the object and then out following the selected
direction.
– Scroll Back and Forth — text moves first in the selected direction, but bounces back
at the object border.
– Scroll In — text scrolls in toward the given direction starting from the edge of the
object and stops in the center.
4) In Effect, select the Direction of the animation using one of the four arrows to set the
scroll direction for the text.
5) In Properties, select one the following options for the animation:
– Start inside — animation starts from inside the object.
– Text visible when exiting – select to see the text when it exits from the animation.
– Animation cycles – select Continuous and the text animates continuously or set a
specific number of cycles for the animation.
– Increment — sets the amount the animation moves in Pixels when selected or a
specific distance when Pixels is deselected. The units of measurement depends on
the settings in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > General (macOS
LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General).
– Delay — starts the animation when Automatically is selected or after a specific length
of time when Automatically is deselected.
6) Click OK to close the Text dialog and save the animation effect.
Text columns
1) Select the object which contains text.
2) Open the Text dialog and click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page
(Figure 204).
3) Enter the number of columns required in the Number of columns text box.
4) Enter the spacing required between each column in the Spacing text box. The units of
measurement depends on the settings in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress >
General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General).
5) Click OK to close the Text dialog and save the changes.
Note
When text columns are added to an object, all of the inside of an object is used to
format the text into the number of columns that have been created.
Formatting connectors
Connectors are lines that join two objects and always start from or finish at a glue point on an
object. See Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects for a description and use of the connectors.

Figure 204: Text dialog — Text Columns page
Figure 205: Connector dialog

1) Right-click on a connector and select Connector from the context menu to open the
Connector dialog (Figure 205). The Connector dialog displays a preview of the selected
connector as changes are made.
2) Select the type of connector from the Type drop-down list.
3) Set the Line Skew for the connector. Line skew is used to set the distance between
connectors where multiple connectors overlap.
4) Set the Line Spacing for the connector. Line spacing is used to set the horizontal and
vertical space between the connector and the object at each end of the connector.
5) Click OK to close the Connector dialog and save the changes.
Working with drawing styles

To achieve consistency for slides in a presentation, it is recommended to use styles when
applying the same formatting to objects. In Impress, the styles used for objects are called
drawing styles.
Drawing styles are similar to paragraph styles that are used for text. A drawing style groups all
formatting properties applicable to an object and associates this properties group with a name.
This allows the properties group to be used for other objects. If a drawing style is modified (for
example, changing area color), the changes are automatically applied to all objects that use the
same drawing style.

If Impress is used frequently, a library of well defined drawing styles is an invaluable tool for
speeding up the process of formatting objects to any requirements that have to be followed (for
example, company colors or fonts).
For more information on drawing styles in Impress, see Chapter 2, Slide Masters, Styles, and
Templates.
Linked drawing styles

Drawing styles support inheritance which allows a style (child) to be linked to another style
(parent) inheriting all the formatting settings of the parent. Linking styles creates style families.
For example, if multiple boxes are required that only differ in color, but are otherwise identically
formatted, it is recommended to define a style for the box including borders, area fill, font, and so
on as the parent drawing style. A number of drawing styles are then created that are
hierarchically dependent to the parent style, but differing only in the fill color attribute. These
drawing styles are known as child styles. If it is necessary to change the font size or border
thickness, the parent style is changed and all the child styles change accordingly.
Default drawing style

In Impress, the drawing styles are located in the Styles deck on the Sidebar (Figure 206). Click
on Drawing Styles to open the drawing styles that are available in the presentation. The Default
Drawing Style cannot be deleted and is automatically applied to any graphic object created on a
slide. This style is the starting point for creating new drawing styles.
Figure 206: Styles deck in Sidebar
Note
The Default Drawing Style can be modified, but a modified Default Drawing Style
only applies to the presentation where the style was modified.

Figure 207: Graphic Styles dialog — Organizer page
Creating drawing styles

New style from Sidebar
1) Select an object or create a new object.
2) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar using one of the following methods:
– Click on Styles at the side of the Sidebar.
– Click on Show the Styles Sidebar on the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F11 (macOS ⌘+T).
3) Click on Drawing Styles in the Styles title bar to open the Drawing Styles panel.
4) Right-click on a drawing style that is selected in the list and select New from the context
menu to open the Graphic Styles dialog (Figure 207).
5) Click on Organizer to open the Organizer page.
6) Enter a name for the new drawing style in the Name text box.
7) In Inherit from text box, select None from the drop-down list if the new drawing style is
NOT going to be linked. This prevents the new drawing style from being linked to the
Default Drawing Style that was applied to the new object when it was created.
8) Use the various pages in the Graphic Styles dialog to format the new style, as follows:
– Font, Font Effects, Indents & Spacing, Alignment, Tabs, Highlighting and Asian
Typography — provides options for formatting any text inserted into a graphic object.
– Dimensioning — provides options for dimension lines formatting.
– Text, Text Animation, Connector, Line, Area, Shadowing, and Transparency —
provides options for graphic object formatting.
9) Click OK to close the Graphics Styles dialog and save the new drawing style.
Note
Any new drawing style created is automatically placed in the Custom Styles
category.
New style from selected object

1) Select an object to use for creating a new drawing style.
2) Carry out any formatting changes to the object using the various dialogs and menu
options available in Impress.

3) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on Drawing Styles on the left of the Styles
title bar to open the Drawing Styles panel.
4) Click on New Style from Selection on the right of the Styles deck title bar to open the
New Style from Selection dialog.
5) Enter a name for the new drawing style in the Enter new style name text box. A list is
displayed of existing custom styles of that are available.
6) Click OK to save the new drawing style and close the New Style from Selection dialog.
Modifying drawing styles

2) Right-click on the style that is to be modified and select Modify from the context menu to
open the Graphic Styles dialog.
3) Carry out any formatting changes to the drawing style using the options in the various
pages of the Graphic Styles dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.
Updating drawing styles

1) Select an object or create a new object.
2) Carry out any formatting changes to the object using the various dialogs and menu
options available in Impress.
4) Click on Update Style on the right of the Styles deck title bar to update the style. There is
no confirmation that the style has been updated.
Applying drawing styles

2) Select an object in the presentation to apply a drawing style.
3) Double-click on the drawing style name and apply the drawing style to the selected
object.
Note
Before deleting a custom drawing style, make sure the style is not in use in the
presentation.
Deleting drawing styles

The predefined drawing styles in Impress cannot be deleted, even if the predefined drawing style
is not in use. Only custom (user defined) styles can be deleted.
2) Right-click on a custom drawing style and click Delete on the context menu.
3) Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the custom drawing style.

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 7,
OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts,
and Other Objects
OLE objects
Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is software technology that allows linking and embedding
of the following types of files into an Impress presentation.
LibreOffice spreadsheets
LibreOffice charts
LibreOffice drawings
LibreOffice formulas
LibreOffice text
The major benefit of using OLE objects is to provide a quick and easy method of editing an object
using tools from the software that created the object. These file types are created using
LibreOffice and OLE objects can be created from new or from an existing file.
Inserting new OLE objects

1) Select the slide in a presentation where the OLE object is going to be inserted.
2) Go to Insert > Object > OLE Object on the Menu bar to open the Insert OLE Object
dialog (Figure 208).
3) Select Create new and then select the type of OLE object in Object Type.
4) Click OK and a new OLE object is inserted in the center of the slide in edit mode. The
toolbars displayed change providing the necessary tools to create a new OLE object.
Figure 208: Insert OLE Object dialog — New page
Figure 209: Insert OLE Object — Create from file page

Inserting OLE objects from files
1) Select the slide in a presentation where the OLE object is going to be inserted.
2) Go to Insert > Object > OLE Object on the Menu bar to open the Insert OLE Object
3) Select Create from file, then click on Search and a file browser window opens.
4) Navigate to where the file is located, then select the file required and click Open. The
filename appears in the File text box in the Insert OLE Object dialog.
5) Insert the OLE object into the center of the slide in edit mode using one of the following
methods:
– Click OK to insert the file as an OLE object.
– Select Link to file, then click OK to insert the OLE object with a link to the original
file.
– Select Display as icon, then click OK to insert the OLE object as an icon. When the
icon is clicked on, the OLE object opens in a new window.
Notes
When inserting a new OLE object, it is only available in the presentation it is
being inserted into and the OLE object can only be edited using Impress.
For computers using the Windows operating system, an additional option of
Further objects is available in the Object Type list. Clicking on Further objects
opens an Insert Object dialog (Figure 210) allowing an OLE object using other
software that is compatible with OLE and LibreOffice to be inserted. This option is
available for new OLE objects and OLE objects from a file.
By default, when inserting a file into a slide as an OLE object, any changes made
to the original file do not affect the copy of the file inserted into a presentation.
Also, changes to the file copy in a presentation do not change the original file. If
any changes made to the file, either in the original or in the presentation, are to
appear in both versions, the original file has to be linked with the presentation
when the file is inserted.
Figure 210: Insert OLE Object dialog — Further Objects page
Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 229

Editing OLE objects
1) Double-click on the OLE object to open it in edit mode. The toolbars in Impress change to
provide the necessary tools for editing an OLE object.
2) When editing the OLE object is complete, click anywhere outside the OLE object to exit
editing.
3) Save the presentation. Any changes made to the OLE object are also saved.
Resizing and moving OLE objects

Resizing and moving OLE objects is exactly the same as resizing and moving graphic objects in
Impress. For more information, see Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects.
Notes
When resizing or moving a spreadsheet in slides, ignore any horizontal and
vertical scroll bars, and the first row and first column. The first row and column are
easily recognizable because of their light background color. They are only used
for spreadsheet editing purposes and are not included in the spreadsheet that
appears as an OLE object on the slide.
Do not double click on an OLE spreadsheet object when moving or resizing.
Double clicking opens the OLE object editing mode for spreadsheets.
Spreadsheets
To use spreadsheets in an Impress presentation, either insert an existing spreadsheet file, or
insert a new spreadsheet as an OLE object. For more information on spreadsheets, see the Calc
Guide and the Getting Started Guide.
Embedding a spreadsheet into Impress includes most of the functionality of a Calc spreadsheet
to carry out calculations and data analysis. However, if complex data or formulas are to be used,
it is recommended to perform those operations in a separate Calc spreadsheet first, then embed
the spreadsheet into Impress with the results.
It is tempting to use spreadsheets in Impress for creating tables or presenting data in a tabular
format. However, inserting a table into Impress is often more suitable and quicker, depending on
the complexity of the data. See Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for more information on
inserting and formatting tables.
The entire spreadsheet is inserted into a slide as an OLE object. If the spreadsheet contains
more than one sheet and the one required is not visible, double-click the spreadsheet and then
select a different sheet from the sheet tab row at the bottom.
Editing spreadsheets
When a spreadsheet is inserted into a slide, it is in edit mode ready for inserting or modifying
data or modifying the format (Figure 211). The following also happens to provide tools and
functions for spreadsheets:
• A Spreadsheet Formatting toolbar opens at the top of the Workspace as shown by the
example in Figure 211. The following tools become available providing basic formatting
for spreadsheets:
– Name Box — gives the active cell reference or the name of a selected range of cells.
– Function Wizard; Select Function; Formula.

Figure 211: Example of spreadsheet editing in Impress
Figure 212: Spreadsheet Formatting toolbar

– Input Line — edit box for entering data or reviewing the displayed contents of the
active cell. If necessary, click on the triangle ▼ on the right to expand the edit box
and provide space for long functions requiring multiple lines.
• The Formatting toolbar for spreadsheets (Figure 212) opens replacing the Line and
Filling toolbar.
• Menu bar changes providing spreadsheet formatting options.
Cell navigation
When an embedded spreadsheet is opened, the active cell is A1 by default. To move around a
spreadsheet, select a cell to make it active using one of the following methods:
• Keyboard arrow keys.
• Position the cursor in a cell and click.
• Press the Enter key to move one cell down and Shift+Enter combination to move
one cell up.
• Press the Tab key to move one cell to the right and Shift+Tab combination to move
one cell to the left.

Note
Other keyboard shortcuts are available to navigate in a spreadsheet. Refer to
Getting Started Guide or the Calc Guide for more information.
Entering data
Data input into a cell can only be done when a cell is active. An active cell is easily identified by a
thickened and bolder border. The cell reference for the active cell is displayed in the Name Box
at the left hand end of the Calc editing toolbar.
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select a cell to make it active and start typing in the cell or in the Input Line. The data
input displayed in the Input Line makes the data entry easier to read.
3) Use the various tools and options on the Menu bar to enter data, formula, function, text,
or date into a cell.
4) To confirm data input into a cell use one of the following methods:
– Select a different cell with the cursor.
– Press the Enter key, or the Shift+Enter key combination.
– Press the Tab key, or Shift+Tab key combination.
5) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit mode and save the changes.
Tip
Sometimes numbers have to become text, for example, telephone numbers. To
prevent Impress from removing the leading zeros, or right aligning numbers in a
cell, type a single quotation mark (') before entering a number as text.
Merging cells
2) Highlight the required number of cells to be merged.
3) If there is no data in the cells being merged, use one of the following methods to merge
cells:
– Go to Format > Merge and Unmerge Cells > Merge and Center Cells on the Menu
bar.
– Go to Format > Merge and Unmerge Cells > Merge Cells on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected cells and select Merge Cells from the context menu.
4) If the selected cells for merging contain data, the Merge Cells dialog (Figure 213)
automatically opens. Merge the selected cells as follows:
a) Use one of the methods in Step 3 to merge cells and open the Merge Cells dialog.
b) Select an option in the Merge Cells dialog.
c) Click OK to merge the cells and close the Merge Cells dialog.
5) When finished editing the embedded spreadsheet, click anywhere outside the border to
exit edit mode and save the changes.

Figure 213: Merge Cells dialog
Figure 214: Insert Cells dialog
Splitting merged cells

Only multiple cells that have been merged can be split, or unmerged, into separate cells.
2) Select a cell that was formed from merging from multiple cells.
3) Split the merged cell into separate cells using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Merge and Unmerge Cells > Unmerge Cells on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the cell and select Unmerge Cells from the context menu.
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.
Inserting cells
2) Select the same number of cells on the embedded spreadsheet that are going to be
inserted.
3) Insert cells using one of the following methods. Inserting cells opens the Insert Cells
– Go to Sheet > Insert Cells on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected cells and select Insert from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl++ (macOS ⌘++).

4) Select an insert option for cells, then click OK to insert the cells and close the Insert Cells
dialog.
Inserting rows
2) Select the same number of rows on the embedded spreadsheet that are going to be
inserted.
3) Insert rows using one of the following methods:
– Go to Sheet > Insert Rows > Rows Above or Sheet > Insert Rows > Rows Below
on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the row header for the selected rows and select Insert Rows Above or
Insert Rows Below from the context menu.
– Open the Insert Cells dialog and select Entire row to insert rows above the selected
rows.
Inserting columns
2) Select the same number of columns on the embedded spreadsheet that are going to be
inserted.
3) Insert columns using one of the following methods:
– Go to Sheet > Insert Columns > Columns Before or Sheet > Insert Columns >
Columns After on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the column header for the selected columns and select Insert
Columns Before or Insert Columns After from the context menu.
– Open the Insert Cells dialog and select Entire column to insert columns to the left of
the selected columns.
Deleting cells
2) Select the cells on the embedded spreadsheet that are going to be deleted.
3) Delete the selected cells using one of the following methods. Deleting cells opens the
Delete Cells dialog (Figure 215).
– Go to Sheet > Delete Cells on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected cells and select Delete from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+- (macOS ⌘+-).
4) Select a delete option in the Delete Cells dialog, then click OK to delete the cells and
close the dialog.

Figure 215: Delete Cells dialog
Deleting rows
2) Select the rows for deletion on the embedded spreadsheet.
3) Delete the selected rows using one of the following methods:
– Go to Sheet > Delete Rows on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in the row header for the selected rows and select Delete Rows from the
context menu.
– Open the Delete Cells dialog and select Delete entire row(s).
Deleting columns
2) Select the columns for deletion on the embedded spreadsheet.
3) Delete the selected columns using one of the following methods:
– Go to Sheet > Delete Columns on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in the column header for the selected columns and select Delete Columns
– Open the Delete Cells dialog and select Delete entire column(s).
Quickly inserting sheets

2) Quickly insert a sheet using one of the following methods:
– Click on the plus sign to the left of the sheet names and a new sheet is added to the
spreadsheet after the last sheet in the spreadsheet.
– Go to Sheet > Insert Sheet at End on the Menu bar and enter a name for the sheet
in the Append Sheet dialog that opens, then click OK. A new sheet is added to the
spreadsheet after the last sheet in the spreadsheet.

Figure 216: Insert Sheet dialog
Note
If there are multiple sheets in an embedded spreadsheet, only the active sheet is
shown on the slide after exiting edit mode.
Inserting sheets
For more control over inserting sheets into an embedded spreadsheet, the Insert Sheet dialog
(Figure 216) is used as follows:
2) Open the Insert Sheet dialog using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the sheet names and select Insert Sheet from the context menu.
– Go to Sheet > Insert Sheet on the Menu bar.
3) In Position, select one of the following options:
– Before current sheet — inserts sheets before the active sheet in the spreadsheet.
– After current sheet — inserts sheets after the active sheet in the spreadsheet.
4) In Sheet, select New sheet and the No. of sheets required.
5) In the Name text box, enter a name for the new sheet. This option is not available if
inserting multiple sheets.
6) Click OK to insert the sheet and close the Insert Sheet dialog.

Insert sheet from file

When inserting a sheet from a file, the Insert Sheet dialog has to be used.
2) Open the Insert Sheet dialog using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the sheet names and select Insert Sheet from the context menu.
– Go to Sheet > Insert Sheet on the Menu bar.
3) In Position, select one of the following options:
– Before current sheet — inserts sheets before the active sheet in the spreadsheet.
– After current sheet — inserts sheets after the active sheet in the spreadsheet.
4) In Sheet, select From file and click on Browse to open an Insert browser window.
5) Navigate to the file location and select the file.
6) Click on Open and the sheet names contained in the file appear in the preview box.
7) If necessary, click on Link to create a link to the original file.
8) Select the sheet required for insertion in the preview box.
9) Click OK to insert the selected sheet into the embedded spreadsheet and close the Insert
Sheet dialog.
Renaming sheets
2) Select the sheet for renaming to make it active.
3) Right-click on the sheet tab and select Rename Sheet from the context menu, or go to
Sheet > Rename Sheet on the Menu bar.
4) Enter a new name for the sheet in the Rename Sheet dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the name change and close the Rename Sheet dialog.
Moving or copying sheets

2) Select the sheet for moving or copying to make it active.
3) Right-click on the sheet tab and select Move or Copy Sheet from the context menu, or
go to Sheet > Move or Copy Sheet on the Menu bar to open the Move/Copy Sheet
4) Move or copy a sheet to another position within the embedded spreadsheet in the same
presentation as follows:
a) In Action, select Move or Copy option.

Figure 217: Move/Copy Sheet dialog
b) In Location, select a destination from the options in the To document drop-down list.
In Impress, the presentation is named as Untitled 1 (current document).
c) In Insert before, select the position within the spreadsheet from the available list.
d) If necessary, enter a new name for the sheet in the New name text box.
e) Click on Move to move the sheet, or Copy to copy the sheet and close the
Move/Copy sheet dialog.
5) Move or copy a sheet to another document containing a spreadsheet is as follows:
a) Make sure the spreadsheet in the target document is selected.
b) In Action, select Move or Copy option.
c) In Location, select a destination from the options in the To document drop-down list.
In Impress, the presentation is named as Untitled 1 (current document). If the
document is a Calc spreadsheet, the filename of the Calc spreadsheet is displayed.
d) In Insert before, select the position within the spreadsheet from the available list.
e) If necessary, enter a new name for the sheet in the New name text box.
f) Click on Move to move the sheet, or Copy to copy the sheet and close the
Move/Copy sheet dialog.

6) To move the sheet within the embedded spreadsheet using the cursor, click on the sheet
tab and drag the selected sheet to a new position.
Note
To move or copy a sheet from an embedded spreadsheet in an Impress
presentation into another document, then the target document must be a Calc
spreadsheet or a document that can contain an embedded Calc spreadsheet.
Deleting sheets
2) Select the sheet for deletion to make it active.
3) Right-click on the sheet tab and select Delete Sheet from the context menu, or go to
Sheet > Delete Sheet on the Menu bar.
4) Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the sheet.
Formatting spreadsheets
For presentation purposes, it may be necessary to change the formatting of a spreadsheet to
match the style used in the presentation.
When working on an embedded spreadsheet, any styles created in Calc are also available for
use. However, if styles are going to be used, it is recommended to create specific styles for
embedded spreadsheets. Calc styles maybe unsuitable when working in Impress.
Cell data formatting

1) Select a cell or a range of cells in an embedded spreadsheet using one of the following
methods:
– Click in a cell to select it.
– To select the whole sheet, click on the blank cell at the top left corner between the
row and column headers.
– To select the whole sheet, use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+A (macOS ⌘+A).
– To select a column, click on the column header at the top of the spreadsheet.
– To select a row, click on the row header on the left hand side of the spreadsheet.
2) Open the Format Cells dialog (Figure 218) using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on a cell and select Format Cells from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Cells on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+1 (macOS ⌘+1).
3) Use the various pages in the Format Cells dialog to format the cell data so that it matches
the style of the presentation.
4) Click OK to close the Format Cells dialog and save the formatting changes.

Figure 218: Format Cells dialog
Row formatting
1) Select a row by clicking in the row header.
2) Adjust the row height using one of the following methods:
– Right-click in the row header and select Row Height from the context menu to open
the Row Height dialog, then enter the required row height in the Height text box.
– Right-click in the row header and select Row Height from the context menu to open
the Row Height dialog, then select Default value for row height.
– Right-click in the row header and select Optimal Height from the context menu to
open the Optimal Height dialog. Enter an optimal height in the Add text box, or select
Default value. The optimal row height depends on the font size of the largest
character in a row.
– Hover the cursor over the bottom border in the row header until it changes shape,
then click and drag the border to increase or decrease the row height.
Column formatting
1) Select a column by clicking in the column header.

2) Adjust the column width using one of the following methods:
– Right-click in the column header and select Column Width from the context menu to
open the Column Width dialog, then enter the required column width in the Width text
box.
– Right-click in the column header and select Column Width from the context menu to
open the Column Width dialog, then select the Default value for column width.
– Right-click in the column header and select Optimal Width from the context menu to
open the Optimal Column Width dialog. Enter an optimal width in the Add text box, or
select Default value. The optimal column width depends on the longest entry within a
column.
– Hover the cursor over the left or right border in the column header until it changes
shape, then click and drag the border to increase or decrease the column width.
Using formatting styles

When using styles in an embedded spreadsheet and the spreadsheet is in edit mode, Impress
displays the available styles for a spreadsheet in the Cell Styles panel in the Styles deck on the
Sidebar (Figure 219). Styles used in an embedded spreadsheet are similar to LibreOffice
paragraph styles.
1) Select the data in a cell or cells in the embedded spreadsheet.
2) Click on Styles to open the Styles deck in the Sidebar, then click on Cell Styles to open
the Calc styles panel.
3) Double-click on a style to apply that style to the cell data.
Charts
A chart is a graphical interpretation of information that is contained in a spreadsheet. The
following information only provides basic information on charts. For more information about
creating charts and the use of charts, see the Calc Guide.
Figure 219: Cell Styles panel in Styles deck on Sidebar

Figure 220: Example of chart in editing mode
Figure 221: Chart Formatting toolbar
Inserting charts
1) Select a slide to insert a chart.
2) Use one of the following methods to insert a chart:
– Go to Insert > Chart on the Menu bar and an example chart (Figure 220) is inserted
at the center of the selected slide in editing mode.
– Click on Insert Chart on the Standard toolbar and an example chart is inserted in the
center of the slide in editing mode.
– Go to Insert > Object > OLE Object on the Menu bar to insert a chart as an OLE
object.
3) If necessary, click outside the chart area to cancel editing mode.
Note
When an embedded chart is in editing mode, the Formatting toolbar (Figure 221)
for charts and a Standard toolbar for charts (Figure 222) automatically open
replacing the Line and Filling, and Standard toolbars.
Selecting chart types

Data can be presented using a variety of different chart types. Impress contains several
examples of chart types that will convey information to an audience. Select a chart type using the
Chart Type dialog, or the Chart Type panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

Chart types
The following summary of available chart types to help selection of a chart type suitable for the
data being used to create the chart. Column, bar, pie and area charts are available as 2D or 3D
types. For more information on charts, see the Calc Guide.
Column
Used to display data that shows trends over time. This chart is the default chart type used
when a chart is inserted into a slide. It is recommended to use column charts where there
is a relatively small number of data points. If the data is a large time series, it is
recommended to use a line chart.
Bar
Gives immediate visual impact for data comparison where time is not important, for
example comparing the popularity of products in a marketplace.
Pie
Gives a comparison of proportions. For example, when comparing what departments
spent on items or what departments actually spent overall. They work best with a small
range of values, for example six or less. Using larger range of values, reduces the visual
impact of a pie chart.
Area
Versions of line or column charts. Useful when emphasis of volume change is required.
Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the type of data used does
make a difference to visual impact.
Line
Time series with progression. Ideal for raw data and useful for charts with data showing
trends or changes over time where an emphasis in continuity is required. In line charts,
the X-axis is ideal for representing time series data.
XY (Scatter)
Typically used for showing and comparing numeric values, like scientific, statistical, and
engineering data. Combines X and Y values into single data points and displays them in
irregular intervals, or clusters. The X-axis usually plots the independent variable or control
parameter (often a time series).
Bubble
Used to represent three variables. Two variables identify the position of the center of a
bubble on a Cartesian graph, while the third variable indicates the radius of the bubble.
Net
Similar to polar or radar graphs and are useful for comparing data not in time series, but
show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment. The poles of
the net chart are the Y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are
ideal; any more and this type of chart becomes confusing.
Stock
Specialized column graphs specifically used for stocks and shares. choose traditional
lines, candlestick, and two-column charts. The data required for these charts is
specialized with a series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. The
X-axis represents a time series.
Column and line
Combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct, but related
data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

Figure 223: Chart Type dialog
Chart Type dialog

1) Make sure the chart is selected and in editing mode. The chart has a border and selection
handles when in editing mode.
2) Open the Chart Type dialog (Figure 223) using one of the following methods:
– Click on Chart Type on the Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format > Chart Type on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the chart and select Chart Type from the context menu.
3) Select a chart type from the left-hand preview box and the chart examples on the right
change. The available options for chart types also change to match the selected chart
type.
4) Select a chart example from the right-hand preview box.
5) Select the options required for the chart type selected.
6) Click OK to close the Chart Type dialog and return to the edit window.
7) Continue to format the chart, add data to the chart, or click outside the chart to return to
normal view.
Sidebar Chart Type and Elements panels

2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Chart Type to open the Chart Type panel (Figure 224).
4) Select a chart type from the Chart Type drop-down list.
5) Select a chart example from the preview box.
6) Select the required formatting options for the chart type from the Chart Type panel. The
available options change to match the chart type that has been selected.

Figure 224: Chart Type panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Figure 225: Elements panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Note
The Chart Type and Element panels in the Properties deck on the Sidebar are
only available when a chart has been selected and is in editing mode.

Figure 226: Data Table dialog
7) Click on Elements to open the Elements panel (Figure 225).
8) Select the required formatting options for the chart type from the Elements panel.
9) When formatting the chart is complete and all the data has been added to the chart, click
outside the chart to return to deselect editing and return to normal view.
Formatting charts
Entering chart data
2) Open the Data Table dialog (Figure 226) using one of the following methods:
– Click on Data Table on the Formatting toolbar for charts.
– Go to View > Data Table on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the chart and select Data Table from the context menu.
3) Type or paste information into the cells to enter data into the Data Table dialog.
4) Use the tools in the top of the Data Table dialog to insert, delete or reposition rows or
columns.
5) Click on Close to save the changes and close the Data Table dialog.
Note
To insert, delete or reposition a column, use the tools Insert Series, Delete
Series, Move Series Left, and Move Series Right in the Data Table dialog.
Adding or removing chart elements

2) Add an element to the chart using one of the following methods:
– Go to Insert on the Menu bar and select an element from the submenu.
– Right-click directly on the chart and select an element from the context menu.

– Right-click directly on the chart wall and select an element from the context menu.
– Open the Elements panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar and select an
element from the options available.
Note
The method selected to add an element changes the type of element that can be
added to the chart. Also, when adding some elements to the chart, a dialog may
open with more options to select for the element being added.
3) Remove an element from a chart using one of the following methods:

– Right-click on the chart element and select the delete option from the context menu.
Type of element selected changes the delete options in the context menu.
– Select a chart element and press the Delete or Backspace key to remove the
element from the chart.
– Open the Elements panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar and deselect the
element.
Chart and chart elements formatting

For more information on formatting a chart, chart elements, and the formatting options available,
see the Calc Guide.
2) Format an element on the chart using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format on the Menu bar and select an element for formatting.
– Right-click on an element and select Format XXXX from the context menu. The
format options available depend on which chart element has been selected. For
example, select the chart wall and the format option is called Format Chart Wall.
– Use the various tools on the Formatting toolbar for charts to format a chart element.
3) Select an element and open a formatting dialog specific for the element selected.
4) Use the various options in the formatting dialog to format the element.
Resizing and moving charts

A chart and its chart elements can be resized and moved just like other objects on a slide. For
more information on resizing and moving a chart, see Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects and
the Calc Guide.
Audio and video

Inserting audio or video
1) Go to Insert > Audio or Video on the Menu bar and a file browser for Insert Audio or
Video opens (Figure 227).

Figure 227: Insert Audio or Video dialog
Figure 228: Media Playback toolbar
Figure 229: Media Playback panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
2) Navigate to the folder where the audio or video file is located. Only audio and video files
that are compatible with Impress are available in the file browser.
3) Select a compatible audio or video file and click Open to embed the file in the center of
the slide. The Media Playback toolbar (Figure 228) and the Media Playback panel in the
Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 229) automatically open.

4) Reposition and/or resize the audio or video file. See Chapter 5, Managing Graphic
Objects for more information.
Media playback
The Media Playback toolbar automatically opens when an audio or video file is selected. The
Media Playback toolbar contains the following tools from left to right:
Insert Audio or Video
Opens the Insert Audio or Video file browser where a media file is selected for insertion
into a slide.
Play
Plays the media playback.
Pause
Pauses the playing of the media.
Stop
Stops the playing of media.
Repeat
When selected, repeats the playing of the media until the tool is deselected.
Position
Selects the position of where to start playing from within the media file.
Mute
Suppresses the volume of a media file.
Volume
Adjusts the volume of the media file.
Media Path
Indicates where the media file is stored on a computer.
Formulas
Formulas are inserted onto a slide as an OLE object. For more information on how to create and
edit formulas, see the Math Guide or the Getting Started Guide.
Go to Insert > Object > Formula Object on the Menu bar to create a formula in a slide and the
following happens:
• The Menu bar changes to provide tools for editing and formatting a formula.
• The Tools toolbar (Figure 230) opens providing tools to help create and edit a formula.
• The Elements deck in the Sidebar (Figure 231) opens allowing selection of element
categories from the drop-down list and formula elements from the available options.
When creating formulas, care should be taken with font sizes to make sure formulas are similar
in size to the font used in the presentation. To change font attributes of a formula, go to Format >
Font Size on the Menu bar. To change font type, go to Format > Fonts on the Menu bar.
Note
Unlike formulas in Writer, a formula in Impress is treated as an object and is not
automatically aligned with the rest of the objects on the slide. The formula can be
moved around like other objects in Impress, but cannot be resized.

Figure 230: Tools toolbar
Figure 231: Elements deck on Sidebar
Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects

Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects that are compatible with Impress can be
inserted into an Impress presentation.
• Go to Insert > File on the Menu bar to open a file selection dialog. Only files compatible
with Impress are available for selection.
• Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects can also be inserted as OLE objects.
Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects that are compatible with Impress can be
inserted into an Impress presentation.
• Go to Insert > File on the Menu bar to open a file selection dialog. Only files compatible
with Impress are available for selection.
• Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects can also be inserted as OLE objects.

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 8,
Adding and Formatting
Slides, Notes, Comments,
and Handouts
Working with slides
Inserting new slides
A new slide is inserted into a presentation after the displayed selected slide in the Workspace. If
slide masters are used in the presentation, the inserted slide uses the master slide of the
selected slide displayed in the Workspace.
1) Open an existing presentation, or create a new presentation.
3) Select the slide in the presentation where a new slide is going to be inserted after the
selected slide, then use one of the following methods to insert a new slide:
– Go to Slide > New Slide on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected slide in the Slides pane and select New Slide from the
context menu.
– Right-click on the selected slide in the Slide Sorter view and select New Slide from
the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+M (macOS ˄+M).
4) To insert a new slide at the end of a presentation make sure there are no slides selected
in the Slides pane, then use one of the following methods:
– Go to Slide > New Slide on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in an empty area in the Slides pane and select New Slide from the context
menu.
Inserting slides from a file

1) Open an existing presentation, or create a new presentation.
3) Select the slide(s) in the presentation insertion after the selected slide.
4) Alternatively, insert a slide at the end of the presentation, make sure there are no slides
selected in the Slides pane.
5) Go to Slide > Insert Slide from File on the Menu bar to open the Insert File dialog
(Figure 232).
6) Navigate to the presentation file where the slide is located and select the file, then click on
Open to open the Insert Slides/Objects dialog (Figure 233).
7) Click on the triangle
the list of slides.
▶ next to the filename in the Insert Slides/Objects dialog to expand
8) Select the slides required for insertion into the presentation.
9) If required, select Link to embed the slide as an OLE object.
10) If required, select Delete unused backgrounds to remove any unreferenced background
slides and presentation layouts from the presentation.
11) Click OK to insert the slide into the presentation and close the dialog.

Note
When inserting a slide from a file, a slide can also be linked embedding the slide
into a presentation. See Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other
Objects for more information about embedding OLE objects.
Figure 232: Insert File dialog
Figure 233: Insert Slides/Objects dialog
Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 253
Tip
Figure 233 shows the importance of descriptive names for slides and objects in a
presentation for identification purposes. Refer to “Renaming slides” on page 255
for more information.
Copying and pasting between presentations

1) Open the source presentation that contains the required slide(s) for copying.
2) Make sure Slide Sorter view is open in the Workspace to locate the slide(s) for copying.
3) Select the required slide(s) and copy using one of the following methods:
– Go to Edit > Copy on the Menu bar.
– Right-click and select Copy from the context menu.
– Click on Copy in the Standard toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+C (macOS ⌘+C).
4) Open the target presentation where the copied slide(s) is going to be pasted.
5) Make sure Slide Sorter view is open in the Workspace.
6) Select the slide at the point where the copied slide(s) is going to be pasted.
7) Alternatively, paste a slide at the end of the presentation when no slides are selected.
8) Paste the copied slide(s) into the target presentation using one of the following methods:
– Go to Edit > Paste on the Menu bar.
– Right-click and select Paste from the context menu.
– Click on Paste in the Standard toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+V (macOS ⌘+V).
Dragging and dropping between presentations

1) Open both presentations where slides are going to be moved, or copied, between
presentations.
2) Make sure that both presentations are open in Slide Sorter view in the Workspace.
3) In the target presentation, select the slide at the point where the copied slides are going
to be inserted.
4) Alternatively, to insert slides at the end of the target presentation, make sure that there
are no slides selected.
5) In the source presentation, select the required slides being moved or copied.
6) To move the slides, click on the selected slides then drag and drop the selected slides
into the target presentation.
7) To copy the slides, click on the selected slides and hold down the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘)
then drag and drop the slides into the target presentation.

Duplicating slides
Duplicating a slide is an easy method of adding slides to a presentation if new slides are to inherit
formatting, layout, and animations from a selected slide.
1) Open Normal or Slide Sorter view in the Workspace.
2) Select the slides for duplication in the Slide Sorter view or the Slides pane.
3) Go to Slide > Duplicate Slide on the Menu bar, or right click on the selected slides and
select Duplicate Slide from the context menu. The duplicated slides are inserted into the
presentation after the selected slides.
Tip
Duplicating slides also helps in preventing slides from being shown with too much
information, which can make it difficult for an audience to understand. If a slide
becomes crowded with information, duplicating the slide and splitting the
information points over two or more slides is recommended. All formatting,
backgrounds, and so on are retained for each duplicated slide.
Renaming slides
1) Open Normal or Slide Sorter view in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide and open the Rename Slide dialog using one of the following methods:
– Go to Slide > Rename Slide on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected slide in the Slides pane and select Rename Slide from the
context menu.
– Right-click on the selected slide in the Slide Sorter view and select Rename Slide
3) In the Rename Slide dialog, type a new name for the slide in the Name text box.
4) Click OK to save the change and close the Rename Slide dialog.
Figure 234: Example of expanding slides
Figure 235: Example summary slide
Expanding slides
Occasionally a slide with too many points to fit in the space available. Instead of reducing the font
size or using other methods to squeeze more text onto the slide, it is recommended to subdivide
the contents of the slide into two or more slides, as shown in Figure 234.
1) Select the slide for expansion in the Slides pane.
2) Go to Slide > Expand Slide on the Menu bar to create new slides from the first outline
level on the original slide. The first outline level becomes the title of each new slide.
Outline levels below each first level on the original slide are moved up one outline level in
the new slides.
3) If necessary, rearrange the presentation order for the newly created slides.
Creating summary slides

Summary slides are created used when using agendum for presentations. An example summary
slide is shown in Figure 235.
1) Select the slide that appears as the first slide in the summary.
2) Go to Slide > Summary Slide on the Menu bar to create a summary slide at the end of
the presentation. Bullet points are created using the titles of the slides in the presentation.
3) If necessary, move the summary slide to its position in the presentation.
Note
When expanding a slide, or creating a summary slide, the selected slide MUST
contain an outline.
Deleting slides
Select a slide or slides in the Slides pane, Normal view, or Slide Sorter view in the Workspace,
then use one of the following methods to delete slides:
• Go to Slide > Delete Slide on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on selected slides and select Delete Slide from the context menu.
• Press the Delete or Backspace key.

Figure 236: Example of outline created from Writer document
Creating slides from an outline

When planning a presentation it is useful to develop an outline from a LibreOffice Writer file.
Once the outline is created, one or more separate slides can be created for each of the top level
outline elements.
Using a Writer document

1) Open the file in Writer that is going to be used as a basis to create a presentation outline.
2) Go to File > Send > Outline to Presentation on the Writer Menu bar. A new presentation
is created and opens in Impress Outline view. The heading paragraph styles are
converted into the Impress outline styles. An example outline from a Writer document is
3) If necessary, duplicate, or expand slides, and manually change slide contents to create a
presentation. For more information, see “Duplicating slides” on page 255 and “Expanding
slides” on page 256.
Note
To create a presentation from a Writer document, the Writer document must
contain headings formatted using heading paragraph styles.
Using AutoAbstract
1) Open the file in Writer that is going to be used as a base to create a presentation outline.
2) Go to File > Send > AutoAbstract to Presentation on the Writer Menu bar to open the
Create AutoAbstract dialog (Figure 237).
3) Select the number of outline levels for the presentation in the Included outline levels box.
For example, if three levels are selected, all headings formatted with Heading 1 to 3
styles are included as outline levels 1 to 3. An example outline from a Writer document is
Figure 237: Create AutoAbstract dialog

4) Select the number of paragraphs for each outline level for in the presentation in the
Paragraphs per level box. For example, if three paragraphs are selected, each outline
level will contain three paragraphs.
5) Click OK to close the Create AutoAbstract dialog and an outline is created in a new
Impress presentation.
6) Some outline levels may have too many points to fit on one slide. If necessary, duplicate
or expand slides and manually change slide contents to create a simpler presentation.
For more information, see “Duplicating slides” on page 255 and “Expanding slides” on
page 256.
7) When the presentation is created, some hierarchical structure of the outline may be lost. If
necessary, use Promote or Demote tools on the Outline toolbar (Figure 238) to move the
outline points to the correct level.
Note
To create a presentation using AutoAbstract and send content from Writer to
Impress, the text must contain headings formatted with the heading paragraph
styles.
Copying and pasting an outline

1) Open the file in Writer that contains an outline to use as a basis for creating a
presentation outline.
2) Highlight the outline and select Edit > Copy on the Menu bar, or right click on the
selected outline and select Copy from the context menu.
3) Create a new presentation in Impress, or create a new slide in an existing presentation.
4) Select the required layout for the slides. For more information, see Chapter 1, Introducing
Impress.
5) Paste the copied outline into the text area of the slide. Do not worry if the text does not fit
the space on the slide.

6) If the slide contains too much text, duplicate or expand slides and manually change slide
contents to create a simpler presentation for better audience understanding. For more
information, see “Duplicating slides” on page 255 and “Expanding slides” on page 256.
7) When the presentation is created, some hierarchical structure of the outline may be lost. If
necessary, use Promote or Demote tools on the Outline toolbar (Figure 238) to move the
outline points to the correct level.
Formatting slides
Using master slides in a presentation creates a professional look and avoids manual formatting
of each individual slide. Multiple master slides can be used in a single presentation to provide the
same look to groups of slides or individual slides. See Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and
Templates for more information about using master slides.
Slide setup
Slide Setup dialog
2) Open the Slide Properties dialog (Figure 239) using one of the following methods:
– Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in an empty area on the slide and select Slide Properties from the context
menu.
3) Use the various options available in the Slide, Background, and Transparency dialog
pages to setup the slide. See Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates for more
information on the various options available in the Slide Properties dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Slide Setup dialog.
Figure 239: Slide Properties dialog — Slide page
Figure 240: Slide panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Sidebar Slide panel

Any options selected in the Slide panel (Figure 240) in the Properties deck on the Sidebar are
applied immediately to the slide.
3) Click on Slide to open the Slide panel in the Properties deck.
4) Select the slide size to use from the predefined sizes in the Format drop-down list.
5) Select the slide orientation to use from the Orientation drop-down list.
6) Select the slide background to use from the Background drop-down list. The background
type selected changes the options available. For more information on slide backgrounds,
see Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates.
7) If necessary, select the master slide to use from the Master Slide drop-down list.
8) If necessary, select to use or deselect not to use Master Background or Master Objects
on the slide. Only available if a master slide has been used for the slide.
9) If necessary, click on Master View to check on how the master slide selected looks and if
it matches the presentation requirements.
Selecting master slides

A master slide can be applied to all the slides in a presentation, or only to selected slides allowing
more than one master slide to be used in a presentation. For more information on master slides,
see Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates.
2) In the Sidebar, click on Master Slides to open the Master Slides deck (Figure 241) and
display the master slides available for use.

Figure 241: Master Slides deck on Sidebar
3) Select a master slide from the options available in the panels for Used in This
Presentation, Recently Used, or Available for Use.
4) Apply the selected master slide to slides using one of the following methods:
– For all slides in the presentation, right-click on the selected master slide and select
Apply to All Slides from the context menu.
– For selected slides only, right-click on the selected master slide and select Apply to
Selected Slides from the context menu.
Changing master slides

2) Select a slide in the Slides panel so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Right-click in a blank area on the slide in the Workspace and select Change Slide
Master from the context menu to open the Available Master Slides dialog (Figure 242).
4) Navigate the master slides displayed in the Select a Slide Design preview box to locate
the required master slide. If the required master slide is not displayed, then click on Load
to open the Load Master Slide dialog (Figure 243).
g) Select the category of master slide required from the Categories list.
h) Select the template required from the Templates list and a preview of the template
appears in the Preview box.
i) Click OK to close the Load Master Slide dialog and the master slide templates appear
in the Select a Slide Design preview box in the Available Master Slides dialog.
Figure 242: Available Master Slides dialog
Figure 243: Load Master Slide dialog

5) Select the required master slide from the master slides displayed and click OK. The slide
changes to show the new master slide and the Available Master Slides dialog closes.
Changing slide background

3) Open the Slide Properties dialog using one of the following methods:
– Right-click in an empty area on the slide and select Slide Properties from the context
menu.
4) Click on Background to open the Background page (Figure 244) and select the type of
background required. For more information on background types, see Chapter 2, Master
Slides, Styles, and Templates, and Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
5) Select from the various options for each background type to create a background for a
slide.
6) Click OK to save the changes to the background and close the Slide Properties dialog.
Note
Only one slide background in a presentation is changed at a time. To change the
background on multiple slides, master slides have to be used. For more
information, see Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates.
Figure 244: Slide Properties dialog — Background page
Choosing slide layout

After creating a new slide, a layout is selected to suit the slide contents and presentation
requirements. Impress has predefined layouts that are applied as a starting point for a slide and
Figure 245 shows the predefined layouts that are available. If the layouts available in Impress do
meet the presentation requirements, layout elements can be rearranged, duplicated, resized, or
deleted as necessary.
1) Make sure Normal or Slide Sorter view is selected in the Workspace.
3) Change the slide layout using one of the following methods:
– Select a layout in the Layouts panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Slide > Layout on the Menu bar and select a layout from the options in the
submenu.
– Right-click on the slide in the Slides pane and select Layout from the context menu,
then select a layout from the options in the submenu.
– Right-click on the slide in Slide Sorter view in the Workspace and select Layout from
the context menu, then select a layout from the options in the context menu.
– Right-click in an empty area on the slide in Normal view in the Workspace and select
Layout from the context menu, then select a layout from the options in the submenu.
4) When a slide layout has changed, make any necessary formatting, resizing, and
repositioning adjustments to the elements on a slide. For more information on
adjustments of slide elements, refer to the other chapters in this guide.

Notes
If the layout is changed on a slide already containing text and objects, Impress
does not delete these elements, but repositions the elements according to the
selected layout. This may result in some elements overlapping or being out of
position.
Custom defined layouts cannot be created and saved in Impress for use on
several slides. A master slide or template that uses a custom layout can be used
on several slides. For more information on master slides and templates, see
Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates.
Hovering the cursor over a layout in the Layouts panel in the Properties deck on
the Sidebar displays the layout type. These layout types match the layout list that
is displayed in a context menu or submenu.
Presentation notes
Notes provide a method for creating reminders, or adding extra information to slides in a
presentation. Notes are not displayed on the main presentation display during a presentation.
When using dual displays, notes are displayed on the second display as a presentation cue.
Notes
When using a second display, it is recommended to use the Presenter Console.
The Presenter Console allows of a second monitor for displaying presentation
notes, next slide, and other useful information while a slide is displayed to the
audience on the main display. For more information on the Presenter Console,
see Chapter 1, Introducing Impress and Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.
The notes text box and slide image can be moved and resized on the Notes
page. Also, more text boxes can be added to the Notes page. Refer to the other
chapters in this guide for more information.
Figure 246: Notes view in Workspace
Adding notes
1) Select a slide to add notes to and open the Notes view (Figure 246) using one of the
following methods:
– Click on Notes at the top of the Workspace.
– Go to View > Notes on the Menu bar.
2) Click on Click to add notes below the slide then type or paste text or graphics as
required into the notes box.
3) To add notes to another slide, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
4) When adding notes is complete, return to Normal view in the Workspace.
Adding text
When text is inserted in the Notes text box, it is automatically formatted using the predefined
Notes style that is in Presentation Styles in the Styles deck on the Sidebar. The Notes style
cannot be deleted, but can be formatted to match the presentation requirements.
Text boxes can also be added to the notes page and then formatted to suit presentation
requirements. Also, text styles for any text in a text box can be created to suit text requirements.
Any text styles created are placed in the Custom category. These custom styles can be deleted
when there is no further requirement for the custom style.
For more information on creating styles, adding text, and formatting text, see Chapter 2, Slide
Masters, Styles and Templates, or Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
Figure 247: Notes dialog — Font page

1) Click on Styles on the Sidebar to open the Styles deck.
2) Click on Presentation Styles at the top of the Styles deck to open Presentation Styles.
3) Right click on Notes and select Modify from the context menu. This opens the Notes
4) Use the various pages and options in the Notes dialog to modify the Notes style to
presentation requirements.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Notes dialog.
Formatting notes
Slide notes
1) Select a slide to add notes to and open the Notes view using one of the following
methods:
– Click on Notes at the top of the Workspace.
– Go to View > Notes on the Menu bar.
2) Click on Click to add notes below the slide then type or paste text or graphics as
required into the notes box.
3) Format the text to the presentation requirements. For more information on creating styles,
adding text, and formatting text, see “Adding text” above, Chapter 2, Slide Masters, Styles
and Templates, or Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
4) Format any objects or images that have been placed in the slide notes. For more
information on formatting objects, see the other chapters in this user guide.
5) When formatting is complete, go to View > Normal on the Menu bar and close the Notes
view.
Master notes
The slide layout for notes in a presentation is formatted using Master Notes. For more
information on formatting master slides, see Chapter 2, Slide Masters, Styles and Templates.
1) Select a slide that has notes added.
2) Open Master Notes view (Figure 248), go to View > Master Notes on the Menu bar.
3) Open the Slide Properties dialog for master notes (Figure 249) using one of the following
methods:
– Right-click in an empty area on the master note and select Slide Properties from the
context menu.
4) Use the options available in the Slide Properties dialog to format the presentation slide
layout.
5) When formatting is complete, go to View > Normal on the Menu bar and close Master
Notes view.
Figure 248: Master Notes view
Figure 249: Slide Properties dialog — Slide page for Master Notes

Figure 250: Header and Footer dialog — Notes and Handouts page
Headers and Footers

Headers and footers for slide notes page are created and formatted using master slides. The
header and footer areas are as follows:
Header text
Date and time – fixed or variable
Footer text
Page number.
1) Select a slide that has notes added.
2) Go to View > Master Notes on the Menu bar to open Master Notes view.
3) Go to Insert > Header and Footer on the Menu bar to open the Header and Footer
4) Click on Notes and Handouts to open the Notes and Handouts page.
5) To add header text to the notes page, select Header and enter the text for the header in
the Header text text box.
6) To add the date and time to the notes page, select Date and time and enter a fixed or
variable date and time as follows:
– If the date and time is fixed, select Fixed and enter the date and time required in the
Fixed text box.
– If the date and time is variable, select Variable, then select the date and time format
from the Format drop-down list and select the language used from the Language
drop-down list. The language selected affects the available date and time formats.
7) To add footer text to the notes page, select Footer and enter the text for the footer in the
Footer text text box.
8) To add page numbers to the notes page, select Page Number so that the page number
appears on each notes page in a presentation.
9) Click on Apply to All to save the changes and close the Header and Footer dialog.
Printing notes
For more information on printing slides and notes, see Chapter 10, Printing, E-mailing, Exporting,
and Saving Slide Shows.
Linux or Windows
1) Select a slide that has notes added and open the Notes view. See “Adding notes” on
page 266.
2) Go to File > Print on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P to open the
Print dialog (Figure 251).
3) Select LibreOffice Impress to open the LibreOffice Impress page and access the
options for printing notes.
4) In Document, select Notes from the Type drop-down list.
5) In Contents, Color, and Size, select any additional options that are required, for example
Slide name, Original colors, Fit to printable page.
6) Click OK to print and close the Print dialog.
macOS
page 266.
Figure 251: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — Linux or Windows

Figure 252: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — macOS
2) Go to File > Print on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut ⌘+P to open the Print
3) Make sure that LibreOffice is selected from the drop-down list.
4) In LibreOffice Impress, select Notes from the Document drop-down list.
5) In Contents, Color, and Size, select any additional options that are required, for example
Slide name, Original colors, Original size.
6) Click on More and make sure that Original size and All slides are selected.
7) Click OK to print and close the Print dialog.
Exporting notes as PDF

The PDF contains separate pages for the slides and the notes. For example, if the presentation
has 10 slides, the PDF contains 20 pages consisting of 10 pages of individual slides followed by
10 pages of notes formatted for the paper size selected.
The following export procedure for creating a PDF file is an example only. Actual procedure does
depend on computer setup and computer operating system.
Figure 253: PDF Options dialog — General page
page 266.
2) Go to File > Export As > Export as PDF on the Menu bar to open the PDF Options
3) Click on General to open the General page.
4) In Structure, select the option Export notes pages.
5) If necessary, select Export only notes pages to create a PDF file that only contains the
presentation notes.
6) If required, open the other pages in the PDF Options dialog and select the necessary
options to create a PDF file.
7) Click on Export to open a file browser window and navigate to the folder where the PDF
file is to be saved.
8) Enter a filename, then click on Save to save the file in the designated folder and close the
file browser window and PDF Options dialog.
Inserting comments
1) Select Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice> Preferences >
LibreOffice > User Data) to configure the name and initials that appear in a comment.
This is necessary for user initials appear in comments and identify the comment author.

Figure 254: Example of inserting new comment
2) In Normal view, go to Insert > Comment on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut
Ctrl+Alt+C (macOS ⌥+⌘+C) to insert a comment (Figure 254).
– A small comment marker containing the user initials creating the comment appears in
the upper left-hand corner of the slide along with a larger comment box. Impress
automatically adds the user name and current date at the bottom of the comment
box.
– If more than one user edits the document, each user is automatically allocated a
different background color.
3) Type or paste the text into the comment box.
4) If necessary, move the small comment marker to a different position on the slide. This is
normally on or near an object being referred to in the comment.
5) To show or hide the comment markers, go to View > Comments on the Menu bar.
Printing handouts
Handouts are used to distribute a copy of the presentation slides to each member of an audience
and are printed using the printing options available in Impress. Figure 255 shows an example of
handouts ready for printing.
The printing of handouts depends on the printer, computer operating system, and computer
setup. The following printing procedure for handouts is only an example of how to print handouts.
1) If required, create headers and footers for the handouts as follows:
a) Go to Insert > Header and Footer on the Menu bar to open the Header and Footer
dialog.
b) Click on Notes and Handouts to open the Notes and Handouts page.
c) Select the required header and footer options from the default options. See “Headers
and Footers” on page 269 for more information.
Figure 255: Example Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — Handouts page
d) Click on Apply to All to save the options for the handouts and close the Header and
Footer dialog.
2) Go to File > Print on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P (macOS ⌘+P)
to open the Print dialog.
3) For Linux or Windows, click on LibreOffice Impress to open the page for handout
printing and select the printing options from the Document drop–down lists as follows:
– Type: — select Handouts from the drop down list.
– Slides per page: — select how many slides are printed on a sheet of paper.
– Order: — select the order in which the slides are printed on a sheet of paper.
4) For macOS, make sure LibreOffice is selected and select the printing options from the
LibreOffice Impress drop–down lists as follows:
– Document: — select Handouts from the drop down list.
– Slides per page: — select how many slides are printed on a sheet of paper.
– Order: — select the order in which the slides are printed on a sheet of paper.
5) In Contents, select Slide name, Date and time, or Hidden pages if one or all of these
options are to be printed on the handouts.
6) In Color, select one option on how the handouts are printed.
7) In Size, select one option on how the handouts are printed.
8) Click on Print to print the handouts and close the Print dialog.

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 9,
Slide Shows and Photo
Albums
Introduction
LibreOffice Impress provides the tools to organize and display a slide show, including:
• Selecting slides to show and in what sequence.
• Run the show automatically or manually.
• Transitions between slides.
• Animations on individual slides.
• Interactions when clicking on a button or link.
• A presenter console.
Creating slide shows

Basic settings
Most tasks associated with putting together a slide show are carried out in the Slide Sorter view
where all slides in the presentation appear in the Workspace.
1) Open the Slide Sorter view (Figure 256) using one of the following methods:
– Go to View > Slide Sorter on the Menu bar.
– Click on the Slide Sorter tab at the top of the Workspace.
2) Go to Slide Show > Slide Show Settings on the Menu bar to open the Slide Show
Settings dialog (Figure 257).
3) Select the options required for the slide show.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Slide Show Settings dialog.
Slide show options

Range
Select which slides to include in the slide show.
All slides
Includes all slides, except for slides marked Hidden (see “Hiding slides” on page 278).
Slides are shown in the sequence they occur in the file. To change the sequence, either
rearrange the slides in Slide Sorter view or select the custom slide show option.
Figure 256: Slide Sorter view in Workspace

Figure 257: Slide Show Settings dialog
From
Starts the show at the slide selected from the drop-down list. For example, there may
be several slides at the beginning describing the company, but when presenting this
slide show to work colleagues, this introduction could be skipped.
Custom slide show
Shows the slides in a different sequence from the sequence previously setup. This
setting is not available until a custom slide show has been setup (see “Custom slide
show” on page 279). Many different custom shows can be setup as required from one
set of slides and they appear in the drop-down list for this option.
Presentation Mode
Select which slides to include in a slide show.
Full screen
Shows the slides full screen without the LibreOffice program controls visible and exits
the show after the last slide.
In a window
Runs the slide show in the Impress window and exits the show after the last slide.
Loop and repeat after
Restarts the slide show after the last slide has displayed and after a specified time
delay. Setting this option allows a slide show to automatically run continuously. A pause
slide is displayed between the last slide and the start slide. Press the Esc key at any
time to stop the show. If zero is entered as time delay, the show restarts immediately
without showing a pause slide.
Show logo
Shows the LibreOffice logo on the pause slide when Loop and repeat after option is
selected.
Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 277

Note
Before selecting the option Loop and repeat after, make sure that the option After
is selected and that an interval time setting has been entered. The option After is
in Advance slide options located in the Slide Transitions deck on the Sidebar
(Figure 262 on page 282). If there is no interval time setting for After, then the
option Loop and repeat after will not function.
Options
Determine how the slide show runs as a presentation.
Change slides manually
Prevents slides from changing automatically even if an automatic transition has been
set up.
Mouse pointer visible
Shows the mouse pointer during a slide show. If a laser pointer or other device is being
used to highlight items of interest during the show, this can be useful.
Mouse pointer as pen
Enables writing or drawing on slides during the presentation. Anything written with the
pen is not saved when exiting the slide show. The color of the pen cannot be changed.
Animations allowed
Displays all frames of animated GIF files during the slide show. If this option is not
selected, only the first frame of an animated GIF file is displayed. This has nothing to
do with the slide animations described in “Animations” on page 12.
Change slides by clicking on background
Advances to the next slide when the slide background is clicked. Also, pressing the
spacebar advances to the next slide.
Presentation always on top
Prevents any other program window from appearing on top of the presentation.
Multiple Displays
Determines how the slide show is displayed.
Presentation display
Select from the drop-down list which display to use for full screen slide show mode.
Only available if the computer being used for the slide show is connected to more than
one display monitor.
Note
The multiple displays setting is not an option saved with the presentation file, but
is instead saved as a local setting in the user configuration for the computer. This
means that if a presentation is opened on a different computer, the local settings
for that computer are applied.
Hiding slides
Some slides may not be required in a slide show. Either hide some of the slides or set up a
custom slide show to suit the requirements. For example, there may be draft slides that are not
shown until they are finished, or there may be some slides that contain information that is not to
be shown to an audience.

Figure 258: Example of hiding Slides 2 and 4
Hiding slides
1) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view in the Workspace, select the slides that are to be
hidden.
2) Hide selected slides using one of the following methods. Hidden slides are displayed
greyed out indicating that it is hidden as shown in Figure 258. The slide is not deleted and
remains in the presentation file.
– Click on Hide Slide in the Slide View toolbar (Figure 259).
– Right-click on the selected slide and select Hide Slide from the context menu.
– Go to Slide > Hide Slide on the Menu bar.
Showing hidden slides

1) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view, select the hidden slides.
2) Show the selected slides using one of the following methods. Show Slide is only active
when there hidden slides are selected in a presentation.
– Click on Show Slide in the Slide View toolbar.
– Right-click on the selected slide and select Show Slide from the context menu.
– Go to Slide > Show Slide on the Menu bar.
Custom slide show

To show the slides in a different order, rearrange the slides in the Slides pane or Slide Sorter
view in the Workspace, or create a custom slide show.

Figure 260: Custom Slide Shows dialog
Figure 261: Define Custom Slide Show dialog
Creating custom slide show

1) Select which slides are to be included in the custom slide show and select the order in
which the slides are to be shown.
2) Go to Slide Show > Custom Slide Show on the Menu bar to open the Custom Slide
Shows dialog (Figure 260).
3) Click on New to open the Define Custom Slide Show dialog (Figure 261).
4) Enter a name for the new custom slide show in the Name text box.
5) In the Existing slides box, select the slides using one of the following methods:
– Click on an individual slide to select it.
– Hold down the Shift key and click the first and last slide to create a consecutive
group of slides.
– Hold down the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) and click on individual slides to create a group
of slides.
6) Click on >> to include the slides in the Selected slides box.
7) If required, rearrange the slide order in the Selected slides box by clicking on a slide
name and dragging it to a new position in the list.

8) Click OK to close the Define Custom Slide Shows dialog.
9) Click on Start in the Custom Slide Shows dialog to test the custom slide show as a
presentation.
10) Click OK to save the custom slide show and close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.
Using custom slide show

Shows dialog.
2) Select the required custom slide show and click on Start to run the selected custom slide
show.
3) When the presentation is over, click OK to close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.
Editing custom slide show

Shows dialog.
2) Select the name of the custom slide show for editing.
3) Click on Edit and the Define Custom Slide Show dialog opens.
4) Add slides, remove slides, change the slide order, or change the name of the custom
slide show in the Define Custom Slide Show dialog.
5) Click OK to save the custom slide show and close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.
6) Click on Start in the Custom Slide Shows dialog to test the edited custom slide show as a
presentation.
7) Click OK to close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.
Copying custom slide show

Shows dialog.
2) Select the name of the custom slide show for copying and click on Copy. The name of
the selected custom slide show is repeated with (Copy 1) added to the name.
3) Select the name of the copied custom slide show and click on Edit and the Define
Custom Slide Show dialog opens.
4) Change the name of the copied custom slide show in the Define Custom Slide Show
dialog.
5) Click OK to save the copied custom slide show and close the Define Custom Show
dialog.
Deleting custom slide show

Shows dialog.
2) Select the name of the custom slide show for deletion and click on Delete. Deletion is
immediate and no confirmation message appears.

Figure 262: Slide Transition deck in Sidebar
Slide transitions
Slide transitions are effects and/or sounds that take place between slides when slides are
changed in a slide show. Transitions add a professional look to a slide show, smoothing the
change over between slides.
Adding transitions
1) Click on Slide Transition in the Sidebar to open the Slide Transition deck (Figure 262).
2) Open a presentation file to add slide transitions.
3) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view, select the slide to apply a slide transition.
4) Click on the required transition from the displayed list in Slide Transition to apply it to the
selected slide.

5) In Modify Transition, select from the drop-down list one of the available options. The
available options change to match the selected transition.
6) In Advance Slide, select the slides change in a presentation. Only one option can be
selected.
Note
A time must be entered in After to automatically open the next slide and allow the
option Loop and repeat after to function when it is required for a presentation to
automatically run continuously.
7) If required and to apply the same transition to all slides in the presentation, click on Apply
Transition to All Slides option in Advance Slide.
8) To check how the transition looks, click on Play option in Advance Slide.
9) Alternatively, to automatically preview how the transition looks when it is applied to a
slide, select Automatic Preview option in Advance Slide.
Tip
A single type of transition can be applied to all the slides in a presentation, or a
different transition to individual slides in the presentation. While using many
different transitions may look good, it may make the presentation look
unprofessional.
Transition options
Slide Transition
Displays the available transitions for a slide show.
Modify Transition
Variant
Select an option from the drop-down list. The available options change according to the
transition that has been selected.
Duration
Enter a time for how long the transition lasts.
Sound
Select a sound from the drop-down list that is played when the transition activates. If a
sound is selected, the Loop until next sound option becomes active. Select this option
to play the sound repeatedly until another sound starts. If there are no subsequent
sounds in a slide show, the selected sound plays continuously for the remainder of the
show. Sounds can be played when None is selected for the transition effect.
Advance Slide
On mouse click
Each time the mouse is clicked, the presentation advances to the next slide.
After
Enter a time in the box to elapse before the next slide in the presentation advances
automatically into view.
Automatic Preview
When selected, transition options automatically display when selected.

Removing transitions
1) Click on Slide Transition in the Sidebar to open the Slide Transition deck.
2) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view, select the slide, or slides to remove the slide
transition.
3) Select None at the top of the available transitions in the Slide Transition deck.
Note
Slides with transitions are indicated by a star in the bottom left corner of the slide
when viewed in the Slides pane or Slide Sorter view.
Playing music
Music can be played during a slide show instead of a sound as a transition effect. When using
music in a slide show, make sure any musical copyright or licensing for the music is not being
infringed.
2) Open a presentation file to add slide transitions.
3) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view, select the slide where music is going to be
added as part of the slide transition.
4) In Modify Transition, select Other sound from the Sound drop-down list.
5) In the file browser window that opens, navigate to where the music file is located and
select the music file required.
6) Click on Play to check if the music file is suitable.
7) If the music is suitable, click Open to add the music to the selected slide and close the file
browser window.
8) To play a music file continuously in the slide show, select Loop until next sound in Modify
Transition. The music file restarts once it is finished until the next music file that is
inserted in the slide show.
Notes
Do not select the Apply Transition to All Slides option to prevent the selected
music file restarting as each slide opens in the presentation.
A music file is linked to a slide show rather than embedded. If the slide show is
going to be displayed on a different computer, the music file must be available on
the computer where the slide show is going to be displayed and the link to the
music file must be established before starting the slide show.
Animations
Slide animations are similar to transitions, but are applied to individual elements in a single slide,
such as title, chart, shape, or individual bullet points. Animations can make a presentation more
lively and memorable. However, as with transitions, heavy use of animations can be fun, but
distracting and even annoying for an audience expecting a professional presentation.
Animations are best applied using Normal view making it easier to select individual objects on a
single slide.

Note
At present it is not possible to apply animations to elements in master slides. This
means that to display the items in a text box one by one and use the same
animation on more than one slide, the effects have to be applied to each slide.
Alternatively, copy the animated element from one slide to another.
Applying animation
On a slide, an element such as a graphic or an entire text box has selection handles around it
when selected. If a portion of the text in a text box is selected, selection handles may not be
displayed.
The following procedure is an example of applying an animation to an object. The options
available for an animation depend on the Category, Effect and slide element that have been
selected to create an animation.
Figure 263: Animation deck on Sidebar

1) Open the Normal view using one of the following methods:
– Click on the Normal tab at the top of the Workspace.
2) Select a slide in the Slides pane so that it appears in Normal view on the Workspace.
3) On the Sidebar, select Animation to open the Animation deck (Figure 263).
4) On the selected slide, select a slide element that is going to be animated.
5) In Effects, click on Add Effect to open the animation options and add the slide element
into the Animation box, then create the animation as follows:
a) In Category, select a category from the options in the drop-down list.
b) In Effect, select an animation effect from the available options in the Effect drop-down
list.
c) In Start, select how the animation starts from the available options in the drop-down
list.
d) In Direction, select the direction of the animation from the available options in the
drop-down list.
e) In Duration, enter a time for the duration of the animation in the box.
f) In Delay, enter a time for the delay before the animation starts in the box.
6) If more animation options are required, see “Additional animation options” on page 287
for more information.
7) If required, select Automatic Preview to automatically check how the animation looks
when it is applied to a slide element.
8) Click on Play to check how the animation looks when applied to a slide element.
Changing animation
2) On the Sidebar, select Animation to open the Animation deck.
3) Select a slide that has animated elements in the Slides pane so that it appears in Normal
view.
4) In the Animation box, select the slide element using the animation effect that is going to
be changed.
5) Use the procedure in “Applying animation” on page 285 to select a new animation effect
for the selected element.
6) Click on Play to check how the animation looks when applied to a slide element.
Removing animation

3) Select the slide that uses the animated element that is going to be removed.
4) In Effects, click on Remove Effect to remove the animation from the selected element.
Additional animation options

Some animations have additional options that can be set or changed. Available options are
dependent on the animation selected.
3) Select the slide and element to apply additional animation options.
4) Click on Options to the right of the Direction drop-down list and open the Effect Options
dialog.
5) Select the options required for the animation effect from the options available on each
page of the Effect Options dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Effect Options dialog.
Effect options
Specifies the settings and enhancements for the selected animation using the following options
on the Effect page in the Effect Options dialog (Figure 264).
Direction
Specifies the direction for the effect.
Sound
Select a sound from the drop-down list or select one of the special entries as follows:
Figure 264: Effect Options dialog — Effect page

(No sound)
No sound is played during animation of the effect.
(Stop previous sound)
Sound of the previous effect is stopped as soon as the current effect runs.
Other sound
Displays a file open dialog to select a sound or music file.
After animation
Select what happens after animation.
Don't dim
No after-effect runs.
Dim with color
After the animation a dim color fills the shape.
Hide after animation
Hides the shape after the animation ends.
Hide on next animation
Hides the shape on the next animation.
Dim color
Select the dim color. Only available if Dim with color has been selected.
Text animation
Select the animation mode for the text of the current shape:
All at once
Animates the text all at once.
Word by word
Animates the text word by word.
Letter by letter
Animates the text letter by letter.
Delay between characters
Specifies the percentage of delay between animations if Word by word or Letter by letter
has been selected for Text animation.
Timing options
Specifies the timing for the selected animation using the following options on the Timing page of
the Effects Options dialog (Figure 265).
Start
Displays the start property of the selected animation effect.
On click
Animation stops at this effect until the next mouse click.
With previous
Animation runs immediately.
After previous
Animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends.
Delay
Specifies an additional delay in seconds until the effect starts.
Duration
Specifies the duration of the effect in seconds.

Figure 265: Effect Options dialog — Timing page
Repeat
Specifies when and how to repeat the current effect. In the drop-down list, select one of
the following options:
none
Animation effect is not repeated.
2, 3, 4, 5, 10
Select how many times the animation effect is repeated
Until next click
Animation effect is repeated until the next mouse click.
Until end of slide
Animation effect repeats as long as the slide is displayed.
Rewind when done playing
Animated shape returns to its starting state after the animation ends.
Animate as part of click sequence
Allows the animation start in a normal click sequence.
Start effect on click of
Allows the animation start when a specified shape is clicked. Select the shape by its
name from the drop-down list.
Text animation options

Specifies the text animation settings for the selected animation using the following options on the
Text Animation page of the Effects Options dialog (Figure 266).
Group text
Specifies how multiple paragraphs are animated:
As one object
All paragraphs are animated as one object.
All paragraphs at once
All paragraphs are animated at once, but paragraphs can have different effects.

Figure 266: Effect Options dialog — Text Animation page
Figure 267: Example animation

By 1st level paragraphs
First level paragraphs, including sub-level paragraphs, are animated one after another.
Automatically after
If By 1st level paragraphs is selected for Group text, the paragraphs are animated one
after the other, enter an additional delay in seconds to animate subsequent
paragraphs.
Animate attached shape
Deselect this box to animate only the text, not the shape.
In reverse order
Animates the paragraphs in reverse order.
Animation example
Creating animations on a slide takes practice to achieve the animation effect required. The
following steps explains how to setup the simple example animation shown in Figure 267 using
multiple animations. The example slide is taken from a LibreOffice presentation.
1) Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar to open Normal view in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide for animation.

4) Select the elements on the slide, then click on Add Effect to open the animation options
on the Animation deck. The selected elements appear in the box on the Animation deck.
5) Select the first element (Shape 1) and select Entrance from the Category drop-down list
and select the following options for the animation:
– Effect — Venetian Blinds
– Start — On click
– Direction — Vertical
– Duration — 0.50 sec
– Delay — 3.0 sec
6) Select the second element (Shape 3) and select Entrance from the Category drop-down
list and select the following options for the animation:
– Effect — Appear
– Start — After previous
– Delay — 3.00 sec
7) Go to Slide Show > Rehearse Timings on the Menu bar and check the animation of
these two objects.
Using interactions
Interactions are where objects on a slide are used to create an event when clicked on with the
cursor. These objects with interactions can be buttons, images, or text objects.
1) Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar to open Normal view in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide to add an interaction to an object on the slide.
Figure 268: Interaction dialog

3) Select the object, then right-click on the object and select Interaction from the context
menu, or go to Format > Interaction on the Menu bar. to open the Interaction dialog
(Figure 268).
4) Select an interaction from the Action at mouse click drop-down list. The options available
for further selection and to setup the interaction depend on the type of interaction that has
been selected.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Interaction dialog.
Slide shows
Running a slide show
1) Open a presentation and start the slide show using one of the following methods:
– Use the keyboard shortcut F5 to start from the first slide or Shift+F5 to start from
the current slide.
– Go to Slide Show > Start from First Slide or Start from Current Slide on the Menu
bar.
– Click on Start from First Slide on the Slide Sorter toolbar.
2) If slide transition is set to Automatically after x sec, the slide show starts and runs after
the set time has elapsed.
3) If slide transition is set to On mouse click, use one of the following methods to advance
the slides:
– Click the left mouse button.
– Press the down arrow key.
– Press the right arrow key.
– Press the page down key.
– Press the spacebar.
4) To navigate backwards through a slide show one slide at a time, use one of the following
methods:
– Press the up arrow key.
– Press the left arrow key.
– Press the page up key.
5) Right-click on a slide during a slide show to open a context menu with more navigation
options.
6) When the last slide has displayed, the message Click to exit presentation is displayed on
screen. Press the Esc key or click the mouse button to exit the slide show.
7) To exit the slide show and return to the Impress workspace at any time, press the Esc key
during the slide show.
Note
During the slide show, any animations on a slide are run in the configured order
as the slide is displayed.

Context menu navigation and options
If the slide show consists of more than one slide, right-clicking on the screen opens a context
menu displaying navigation options as follows:
Next
Moves to the next slide in the slide show.
Previous
Moves to the previous slide in the slide show.
Go to Slide
Displays a sub-context menu allowing selection and navigation to any slide in the slide
show. The list of slides shows the necessity to name slides in a slide show rather than
using the default slide names of Slide 1, Slide 2, and so on. Naming slides makes it
easier to identify the required slide.
Mouse Pointer as Pen
Allows the Mouse Pointer to be used as a pen and draw on a slide to emphasize or
explain a point.
Pen Width
Opens a sub-context menu providing options to set the width of any lines drawn on a slide
when using the Mouse Pointer as a pen.
Change Pen Color
Opens a dialog allowing changes to the line color when using the Mouse Pointer as a
pen.
Erase all ink on Slide
Deletes all lines drawn after using the Mouse Pointer as a pen.
Screen
Opens a sub-context menu with a black or white color choice. This is useful if the slide
show is going to be paused for a break or to demonstrate something else.
End Show
Ends the presentation and returns to the Impress workspace. This is the same effect as
pressing the Esc key.
Automatic slide show repeat

1) Select a slide in Normal and open the Slide Transition deck in the Sidebar.
2) In the Advance Slide panel, make sure the option After is selected and a time setting is
entered in the box before the next slide is advanced. For more information on transitions,
see “Slide transitions” on page 282.
3) Go to Slide Show > Slide Show Settings on the Menu bar to open the Slide Show
Settings dialog (Figure 257 on page 277).
4) In Presentation Mode, select the option Loop and repeat after and insert a time delay in
the box before the slide show is displayed again.
5) If necessary, select Show logo if a company logo is to be displayed during the pause
between slide shows.
6) Click OK to save the settings and close the Slide Show Settings dialog.

Slide show timing
Default timing
2) Select None in Slide Transition as the transition effect.
3) Select the option After in Advance Slide and enter a time in the box.
4) Click on Apply Transition to All Slides in Advance Slide to set the default timing for the
slide show.
5) Go to Slide Show > Start from First Slide on the Menu bar to check how the
presentation runs.
6) If necessary, adjust the default timing until the slide show runs as required.
Variable timing
1) Select Slide Show > Rehearse Timings on the Menu bar. The slide show starts in
fullscreen mode and a timer appears in the lower left corner of the display.
2) When advancing to the next slide, click on the timer to set the time duration for the
displayed slide and advance to the next slide. To keep the default time duration for a
slide, click the slide and not the timer.
3) Continue until the time duration is set for all slides in the slide show. Impress records the
time duration set for each slide.
4) To exit from rehearsal timing of the slide show, press the Esc key, or click on the slide.
Presenter Console
LibreOffice Impress includes a Presenter Console as part of the LibreOffice installation. If the
Presenter Console is not included, the extension can be downloaded from the LibreOffice
website and installed on a computer. For more information, see Chapter 11, Setting up and
Customizing Impress.
The Presenter Console provides extra control over slide shows when using dual displays, such
as a laptop for control and a large display or projector for an audience. The view on the laptop
display includes the current slide that can be seen by the audience, the next slide in the
presentation, any slide notes, and a presentation timer.
Note
The Presenter Console only works with operating systems that support two
displays. When two displays are being used, one display can be a laptop.
The Presenter Console provides the following views when making a presentation:
Default view
Displays the current slide, including any effects and the next slide in the presentation
(Figure 269). Click on the Previous, or Next arrows to navigate a presentation.
Notes view
Click on Notes to switch to display any notes that accompany each slide in the
presentation (Figure 270). Click on Notes again to return to the default view.
Slides view
Click on Slides to switch to display the slide thumbnails that are being used for the
presentation (Figure 271). Click on Slides again to return to the default view.

Exchange
Click on this icon to switch the Presentation Console between displays.
Figure 269: Presenter Console — Default view
Figure 270: Presenter Console — Notes view

Figure 271: Presenter Console — Slides view
Figure 272: Create Photo Album dialog
Photo albums
Impress can create a photo album from a set of images, ranging from one to four images on each
slide. A photo album can be a slide show or multimedia show with graphics, images, or
photographs.
Creating photo album

1) Create a new presentation or open an existing presentation.
2) Select the slide that is going to precede the photo album. In a new presentation, this is
the first slide.
3) Go to Insert > Media > Photo Album on the Menu bar to open the Create Photo Album

Figure 273: Example slide in photo album with caption
4) Click on Add to open a file browser.
5) Navigate to the folder where the photographs are located.
6) Select the photographs and click on Open. This closes the file browser and the selected
files appear in the Create Photo Album dialog.
7) Select the number of images per slide in the Slide layout drop-down list.
8) If required, select Add caption to each slide inserting a text box on each slide allowing a
caption to be added to the photographs, as shown by the example in Figure 273.
9) If required and there is only one image per slide, select Fill Screen for each photograph to
fill the entire slide.
10) Create the required sequence of photographs by moving the files up or down in the list of
selected files.
11) When the sequence is ready, click Insert Slides to create the number of slides required
for the photo album. Impress creates a presentation with as many slides that are required
to contain the photographs. The sequence of slides can be changed if necessary.
12) If required, move photographs between slides and create frames for photographs. For
more information, see “Editing photo albums” on page 297.
13) If required, run the photo album as a slide show. See “Creating slide shows” on page 276
and “Slide shows” on page 292.
Editing photo albums

When a photo album is created, the full images of photographs are placed within the boundaries
of the slides created for the photo album. Each of the photographs in the photo album can be
edited just like any other object that can be placed on a slide. For more information on formatting
photographs, see the following chapters of the Impress Guide:
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects
However, to make the photo album look more attractive, frames can be added to each
photograph in the photo album and the photographs enhanced using options available on the
Sidebar.

Figure 274: Image panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 276: Example photo with line frame
Experiment with different levels for each of the following options to create the right effect for each
photograph in the photo album.
1) Select a slide in the photo album to open the Image, Line and Effect panels in the
Properties deck on the Sidebar.
2) In the Image panel (Figure 274), adjust the following options, as required, to enhance the
photograph. Figure 273 shows an example of a photo where the image has been
adjusted.
– Color mode –– select the color mode from the options in the drop-down list.
– Brightness –– select the brightness level as a percentage.
– Contrast –– select the contrast level as a percentage.
– Transparency –– select the transparency level as a percentage.
3) In the Line panel (Figure 275), select the following options, as required, to create a frame
around the photograph. Figure 276 shows an example of a photo where a line frame has
been added.
– Line –– select the line style from the drop-down list.
– Width –– select the line width from the drop-down list or enter a line width in the
Custom Line Width box.
– Color –– select a color from the available color palettes, or create a custom color for
the line frame.
– Transparency –– select the transparency level as a percentage for the line frame.
4) In the Effect panel (Figure 277), select the following options, as required, to create a soft
frame around the photograph. Figure 278 shows an example of a photo where a soft
frame has been added.
– Glow Radius –– adjust the radius value to apply a soft frame around the outside of
the photograph.
– Glow Color –– select a color for the soft frame from the available color palettes.
– Glow Transparency –– enter a transparency value to adjust the transparency of the
soft frame.
– Soft Edge Radius –– adjust the radius value to reduce the internal width of the soft
frame and make the photograph look smaller.

Figure 277: Effect panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Figure 278: Example photo with soft frame

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 10,
Saving Slide Shows,
Printing, Emailing, and
Exporting
Saving slide shows
Slide shows (presentations) created in Impress are, by default, saved in the Open Document
Presentation (ODP) format. Impress can also open and save slide shows in other presentation
formats, see “Other presentation formats” on page 303 for more information.
ODP file format

1) Create a slide show. For more information, refer to the other chapters in this user guide.
2) Save the slide show using one of the following methods to open the Save as dialog
(Figure 279).
– Click on Save on the Standard toolbar (Figure 280).
– Go to File > Save on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+S (macOS ⌘+S).
3) Navigate to the folder where the slide show is to be saved.
4) Enter a filename in the File name: text box.
5) Select the default ODF Presentation (.odp) from the File type: drop-down list.
6) Click on Save to save the slide show and close the file browser window.
Figure 279: Save as dialog

Figure 281: Confirm File Format dialog
Other presentation formats

1) Create a slide show. For more information, refer to the other chapters in this user guide.
2) Save a slide show in a presentation format that Impress recognizes using one of the
following methods to open the Save as dialog.
– Click the triangle ▼ to the right of Save on the Standard toolbar and select Save As
from the drop-down menu.
– Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+S (macOS ⌘+Shift+S).
3) Navigate to the folder where the slide show is to be saved.
4) Enter a filename in the File name: text box.
5) Select the required presentation format from the options from the File type: drop-down
list.
6) Click on Save to save the slide show and close the file browser window
Note
If the slide show is not being saved in the ODP presentation format, a Confirm
File Format dialog (Figure 281) opens asking confirmation of the file format
selected. Only presentation file formats that Impress is compatible with are
displayed in the File type: drop-down list.
Printing
Default printer
1) Go to File > Printer Settings on the Menu bar to open the Printer Setup dialog
(Figure 282) to specify the default printer.
2) Select the required default printer from the printers listed in the Name: drop-down list.
3) Click on Properties to open a printer properties dialog for the selected printer and select
the required options available in the dialog. Available options depend on the type of
printer and the computer operating system being used.
4) Click OK to save the selected options and close the printer properties dialog.
5) Click OK to save the default printer selection and close the Printer Setup dialog.
Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 303
Figure 282: Printer Setup dialog
Quick printing
To quickly print a document or presentation, click on Print Directly on the Standard toolbar to
send the entire document to the default printer that is defined for the computer.
If Print Directly is not visible on the Standard toolbar, it can be added as follows:
1) Right-click in an empty area on the Standard toolbar and select Visible Buttons from the
context menu.
2) Select Print Directly from the list of available tools and the Print Directly tool is added to
the Standard toolbar.
Note
The action of Print Directly can be changed by sending a document to the printer
defined for the document instead of the default printer defined for the computer.
Go to Tools > Options > Load/Save > General (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > Load/Save > General) on the Menu bar and select the option
Load printer settings with the document.
Controlled printing
For more control over printing, open the Print dialog using one of the following methods.
• Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P (macOS ⌘+P).
• Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.
Notes
The options selected in the Print dialog only apply to the printing of the current
document that is open in Impress. To specify default print settings for LibreOffice,
go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Print (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences
> LibreOffice > Print) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Print
Any print options selected in the Print dialog when printing from Impress overrides
the default printer settings in the Options LibreOffice Print dialog.
Due to different computer setups and different operating systems, the print dialog
that opens may differ from the dialogs displayed in this chapter. However, the
printing options available for LibreOffice remain the same.

Figure 283: Options LibreOffice Print dialog
Linux or Windows printing

General options
The following general options are an example of what may be available on the General page of
the Print dialog (Figure 284).
Printer
Select the printer to use from the printers available in the drop-down list.
Properties
Click on this button to open the properties dialog for the printer being used. The options
available in this dialog depends on the type of printer connected to the computer and the
computer operating system being used.
Range and Copies
All Slides
Prints all the slides in the presentation.
Selection
Prints the slides selected in LibreOffice Impress.
Slides
Select the page number(s) to print. For multiple pages, use the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 – 5,
7, 9 for page number selection.
Include
Select from the drop-down list Odd and Even Pages, Odd Pages, or Even Pages.
More > Paper sides
Select from the drop-down list Print on one side (simplex), Print on both sides (duplex
long edge), or Print on both sides (duplex short edge).
More > Number of copies
Enter number of printed copies required for the document.
More > Collate
Collates multiple printed copies into separate documents.
Figure 284: Print dialog — General page — Linux or Windows
More > Order
Select from Create separate print jobs for collated output (only available when more
than one copy is being printed) or Print in reverse order.
Page Layout
Paper size
Select the paper size to use from drop-down list
Orientation
Select from the drop-down list Automatic, Portrait, or Landscape.
More > Pages per sheet
Select from the drop-down list how many pages are printed on one sheet of paper.
More > Order
Select from the drop-down list the printing order of multiple pages on one sheet of
paper.

More > Draw a border around each page
When multiple slides are printed on one sheet of paper, a border is drawn around each
slide.
More > Brochure
Prints the document so the pages can be folded into a brochure or booklet.
LibreOffice Impress options

The following options are available on the LibreOffice Impress page of the Print dialog
(Figure 285) where settings are defined specific to the current document type:
Contents
When selected prints Slide name, Date and time on the slides and any Hidden pages in
the presentation.
Color
Prints the presentation in Original colors, Grayscale, or Black & white.
Figure 285: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress page — Linux or Windows
Size
Original size
Prints the slide using its original size.
Fit to printable page
Presentation size is changed so that it fits on the paper size used for printing.
Distribute on multiple sheets of paper
Used if the slides are too large for the paper size being used.
Tile sheet of paper with repeated slides
Used to print several slides of a presentation on a sheet of paper.
macOS printing
LibreOffice Impress options
By default, when the Print dialog opens, some LibreOffice Impress printing options are already
selected, as shown in Figure 286.
Printer
Select the printer to be used from the drop-down list. If the default printer is being used,
then this printer will already be selected.
Presets
Select from the drop-down list a printing preset. The presets available depend on the type
of printer connected to the computer. This also includes any custom presets that have
been created.
Copies
Enter the number of copies to be printed.
Pages
All
Prints all the pages in the document.
Range
Select the page number(s) to print. For multiple pages, use the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 – 5,
7, 9 for page number selection.
Selection
Only prints the selected slides in the Slides pane.
Print in Color
Select this option to print the presentation in color if the printer selected is capable of
color printing.
Double-sided
Select this option to print the presentation double sided if the printer selected is capable
of double sided printing.
Print selection only
Only selected slides are printed when this option is selected.
Document
Select the type of document to print from the drop-down list: Slides; Handouts; Notes;
Outline.
Slides per page
Only available when Handouts is selected as the document type. Select from the
drop-down list either According to layout, or the number of slides per page.

Figure 286: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — macOS
Order
Only available when Handouts is selected as the document type. Select from the
drop-down list either Left to right, then down, or Top to bottom, then right.
Contents
When selected prints Slide name, Date and time on the slides and any Hidden pages in
the presentation.
Color
Prints the presentation in Original colors, Grayscale, or Black & white.
LibreOffice Impress More options

To access printing options not displayed in LibreOffice Impress, click on More to open the
second page of LibreOffice Impress options, as shown by the example in Figure 287.
Figure 287: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — More page — macOS

Size
Original size
Prints the slides using the original size.
Fit to printable page
Slide size is changed so that it fits on the paper size used for printing.
Distribute on multiple sheets of paper
Used if the slides are too large for the paper size being used.
Tile sheet of paper with repeated slides
Used to print multiple copies of a slide on a page.
Brochure
When selected, prints the document so the pages can be folded into a brochure or
booklet.
Include
Select which pages to print from the drop-down list: All pages; Front sides/right pages;
Back sides/left pages. Only available when Brochure is selected.
Use only paper tray from printer preferences
When selected, the printer tray selected on the printer overrides the selected tray in the
printer properties on the computer.
All Slides
All slides in the slide show are printed.
Slides
Enter the slide number(s) in the text box that are to be printed. For multiple slides, use
the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 – 5, 7, 9 for slide number selection.
Selection
Prints the slides selected in LibreOffice Impress in the Slides pane.
General printing
Click on the Media & Quality and Layout to open the options for general printing (Figure 288).
Media & Quality
Feed from
Select from the drop-down list the paper tray to use if the printer has more than one
paper tray.
Media Type
Select from the drop-down list the paper type that has been loaded into the paper tray
being used, for example Envelope, Photo, Plain Paper.
Quality
Select the level of printing quality required.
Layout
Pages per sheet
Select from the drop-down list how many slides are printed on one sheet of paper.
Layout Direction
Select the printing order of multiple slides on one sheet of paper.
Border
When multiple slides are printed on one sheet of paper, a border is drawn around each
slide.
Figure 288: Print dialog — Media and Layout page — macOS
Two-Sided
Select from the drop-down list how a multi-page document is going to be bound: Off;
Long-Edge binding; Short-Edge binding, Booklet.
Reverse page orientation
If LibreOffice prints the slides in the wrong order, select this option and print the
document again.

Flip horizontally
If LibreOffice prints the pages in the wrong orientation, select this option and print the
document again.
Figure 289: Print dialog — Paper Handling and Watermark page — macOS
Click on the Paper Handling and Watermark to open the options for general printing
(Figure 289).
Paper Handling
Collate pages
When selected collates multiple printed copies into separate documents.
Sheets to Print
Select which slides in the document to print from the drop-down list: All pages; Odd
only; Even only.
Sheet Order
Select the page printing order from the drop-down list: Automatic; Normal; Reverse.
Scale to fit paper size
Adjusts the printed slide to fit the paper size.
Destination Paper Size
Select a paper size from the options in the drop-down list. Only available if Scale to fit
paper size has been selected.
Scale Down Only
When selected, a page is scaled down to fit the paper size available..
Watermark
Apply Watermark
Provides options to print watermark text on the slides, for example Confidential if the
presentation is of a sensitive nature.
Printer Info
The options available depend on the type of printer that is connected to the computer and
the operating system being used.
Printing examples
The following printing procedures are examples only. Actual printing procedure depends on
computer operating system, computer setup, and the printer being used. For more information on
printing, see the Writer Guide.
Printing slides
1) Open the Print dialog using one of the following methods:
– Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P (macOS ⌘+P).
– Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.
2) Click on General to open the page for general print options and, if necessary, select a
printer from the Printer drop-down list of printers available.
3) If necessary, in Printer click on Properties to display a properties dialog for the selected
printer and select the options required. Available printer properties depend on the printer
selected and computer operating system being used.
4) If necessary, click OK to save the printer properties selection and close the printer
properties dialog.
5) In Range and Copies, select which slides to print, odd or even pages, the paper sides to
print on (simplex or duplex), number of copies, collate multiple copies, and the print order.

6) In Page Layout, select the paper size, orientation, pages per sheet, and, if necessary,
brochure printing.
7) Click on LibreOffice Impress to open the page for LibreOffice Impress print options.
8) In Document, select the document type, slides per page and the printing order from the
drop-down lists.
9) In Contents, select whether to print slide name, date and time, and/or hidden pages.
10) In Color, select the type of color to print.
11) In Size, select the printed size, to fit on a printable page, to distribute on multiple sheets
of paper, or tile sheet of paper with repeated slides.
12) Click OK to print the slides and close the Print dialog.
Brochure printing
When brochure printing, slides are printed so that they are in the correct order to form a booklet
or brochure. The printer procedures below are only examples. Actual brochure printing procedure
depends on the computer operating system and type of printer being used. It is best to
experiment to find the correct method for brochure printing.
Single sided printing

The following procedure is an example of creating a brochure or booklet using a printer that is
only capable of printing single sided.
3) Click on Properties to open the printer properties dialog for the printer being used and
check the printer is set to the same page orientation as specified for the page setup for
the slides. Usually page orientation does not matter, but it is important for brochures.
4) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
5) In Range and Copies, select All Slides. A minimum of four slides is required to create a
brochure.
6) In Range and Copies, select the Number of copies required to match the required
number of brochures.
7) In Layout, select Brochure.
8) In Range and Copies, select Even slides option in Include.
9) Click OK to print the even slides in the presentation.
10) Take the printed slides out of the printer and put them back into the printer in the correct
orientation to print on the other side of the paper. It maybe necessary to experiment and
find out what the correct arrangement is for the printer being used.
11) In Range and Copies, select Odd slides option in Include.
12) In Range and Copies, select the same Number of copies used for printing the even
slides.
13) Click OK to print the odd slides in the presentation and close the Print dialog.
14) Assemble the brochures and bind them, if required.
Double sided or duplex printing

Printing a brochure on a printer that is capable of double sided, or duplex printing, makes the
creation of brochures simpler.
3) Click on Properties to open the printer properties dialog for the printer being used and
check the printer is set to the same page orientation as specified for the page setup for
the slides. Usually page orientation does not matter, but it is important for brochures.
4) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
5) In Range and Copies, select All Slides. A minimum of four slides is required to create a
brochure.
6) In Range and Copies, select Print on both sides (duplex long edge) or Print on both
sides (duplex short edge) option. Normally, long edge binding is used for portrait printing
and short edge binding is used for landscape printing.
7) In Range and Copies, select the Number of copies required to match the required
number of brochures.
8) In Range and Copies, select the Collate option. This option is only active when printing
multiple copies of the same document.
9) In Layout, select Brochure.
10) Click OK to close to the Print dialog and print the required number of pages for the
brochures.
11) If required, bind the brochures to match either long edge or short edge binding.
Emailing
LibreOffice provides two methods of emailing a slide show directly from the Impress module as
an attachment in ODP format or PDF format. For more information on emailing LibreOffice
documents, see the Getting Started Guide.
Note
A default email program must be available for the emailing facility in LibreOffice
Impress to work correctly.
ODP format
1) Make sure the presentation file is open in Impress, then go to File > Send > Email
Document on the Menu bar. The default email program opens with the presentation file
already attached to the email.
2) Enter the name of the recipient, subject line, and message then send the email.

PDF format
1) Make sure the presentation file is open in Impress.
2) Go to Format > Send > Email as PDF on the Menu bar and the PDF Options dialog
(Figure 290) opens.
3) If necessary, select the required PDF options to create a PDF version of the slide show.
Normally, the default options already selected are sufficient to create a PDF file that the
email recipient will be able to open.
4) Click on Send to close the PDF Options dialog and the default email program opens with
the PDF file already attached to the email.
5) Enter the name of the recipient, subject line, and message then send the email.
Exporting
Impress can export presentations in PDF format as well as other file formats. PDF format is a
standard file format for file viewing and is ideal for sending a file to someone who can only view a
slide show file using a PDF viewer. For more information on exporting LibreOffice documents,
see the Getting Started Guide.
Quick PDF export

Figure 290: PDF Options dialog — General page
2) Use one of the following methods to export the file as a PDF file and open a file browser
window.
– Click on Export Directly as PDF on the Standard toolbar.
– Go to File > Export As > Export Directly as PDF on the Menu bar.
3) In the file browser window, navigate to the folder where the PDF file is to be saved.
4) In the Name text box, enter a filename for the PDF file or use the filename that is
displayed in this text box. The file format is fixed as PDF and cannot be changed.
5) Click on Save to save the slide show file as a PDF file and close the file browser window.
PDF export
For more control over the content and quality of a PDF file, it is recommended to use the PDF
Options dialog. For more information on the options available when exporting a slide show as a
PDF file, see the Getting Started Guide.
2) Go to File > Export as > Export as PDF on the Menu bar to open the PDF Options
3) Using the various pages in the PDF Options dialog, select the options required for the
PDF file. For more information, see the Getting Started Guide.
4) Click on Export to open a file browser window.
5) In the file browser window, navigate to the folder where the PDF file is to be saved.
6) In the Name text box, enter a filename for the PDF file or use the filename that is
displayed in this text box. The file format is fixed as PDF and cannot be changed.
7) Click on Export to save and export the file to the selected location.
Web pages (HTML) export

Presentations can be exported as a series of web pages (HTML format) that can be viewed in
any browser.
Note
Exporting presentations as web pages (HTML) does not retain any animation
effects or slide transitions.

2) Create a folder to contain the HTML pages that are generated and this folder will be
selected as the destination for the HTML pages.
3) Go to File > Export on the menu bar to open a file browser window and navigate to the
folder where the HTML version of the presentation is going to be saved.
4) Enter a name for the HTML file in the Name text box at the top of the file browser window.
5) At the bottom of the file browser, select HTML Document (Impress) (.html;..... .htm) format
from the drop-down list.
6) Click on Save and the HTML Export dialog opens at the Assign Design page (Figure 291).
7) Select a design for all of the HTML pages, either from an existing design, or by creating a
new design. If a previously saved design is not available, the Existing design option is not
available.

Figure 291: HTML Export dialog — Assign Design page
Figure 292: HTML Export dialog — Publication Type page

8) Click on Next to select the publication type to use for creating the web pages, as shown
in Figure 292. The available options change depending on publication type selected.
– Standard HTML format — one page for each slide with navigation links to move from
slide to slide.
– Standard HTML with frames — one page with a navigation bar on the left-hand side
and uses slide title as navigation links. Click on links to display pages in right-hand
side.
– Single-document HTML — creates one HTML document from the slide show.
– Automatic — one page for each slide with each page set with the refresh meta tag
so a browser automatically cycles from one page to the next.
– WebCast — generates an ASP or Perl application to display the slides. Currently,
LibreOffice has no direct support for PHP.
9) Click on Next to select the format for saving images (PNG, GIF or JPG) from the options
available in Save Images As (Figure 293).
10) In Quality, enter a percentage value for the images being saved. Only available if JPG
format has been selected.
11) In Monitor Resolution, select the type of resolution from the options available. When
selecting a monitor resolution, consider what type of display users may have. For
example, if high resolution is selected, then users with a medium-resolution display has to
scroll sideways to see the entire slide.
12) In Effects, select whether sounds and/or hidden slides are exported.
Figure 293: HTML Export dialog — Save Images As page
Figure 294: HTML export dialog — Title page

Figure 295: HTML Export dialog — Button Style page
Figure 296: HTML Export dialog — Color Scheme page

13) Click on Next and enter the necessary details for a title page (Figure 294). This page
does not display if the Create title page option was NOT selected when selecting
Publication Type.
14) Click on Next to select the style of navigation buttons to use when moving from one page
to another from the options available in Select Button Style (Figure 295). If buttons are
not being used, make sure Text only is selected.
15) Click on Next to select the color scheme for the web pages from the options available in
Select Color Scheme (Figure 296). Available schemes include the existing scheme for
the presentation, one based upon browser colors, and a user-defined scheme. A new
scheme can be saved so that it appears on the first page of the HTML export wizard.
16) Click on Create to generate the HTML files. If this is a new design, a dialog opens to save
the design for future use.
Export in other formats
2) Go to File > Export on the menu bar to open a file browser window and navigate to
where the slide show is going to be saved.
3) Enter a name for the exported file in the Name text box at the top of the file browser.
4) At the bottom of the file browser, select the required format from the options in the
drop-down list.
5) Click on Save to export the file to the selected location. Depending on the format
selected, an options dialog may open allowing further options to be selected for the file
format selected.
6) Click on OK to save the exported file and close the options dialog. For more information
on exporting files, see the Getting Started Guide.
Redaction
Presentations can be redacted to remove or hide any sensitive information allowing selective
disclosure of information while keeping other parts of a presentation secret. When a presentation
is redacted, it is exported as a new PDF file with all the redacted portions removed and replaced
by redaction blocks of pixels. A redacted document is exported in PDF format for publication, or
sharing.
Note
When a redacted document is exported as a new PDF file, any redacted portions
are removed from the new document and replaced by redaction blocks of pixels.
This prevents any attempt to restore, or copy the original contents that have been
redacted.
Redaction tools
The tools available on the Redaction toolbar (Figure 297) are as follows:
Rectangle Redaction
Used to mark the content for redaction by drawing transparent rectangles covering the
content. Use the handles to resize the redaction rectangle.
Freeform Redaction
Allows the user to mark the content for redaction by drawing free-form lines, or polygons
covering the content.
Redacted Export (Black)
Converts the semi-transparent redaction shape to opaque black and exports as pixels in
the PDF file.
Redacted Export (White)
Converts the semi-transparent redaction shapes to opaque white shapes and exports as
pixels in the PDF file.
Figure 297: Redaction toolbar

Export Preview PDF
Makes a copy of the presentation as a PDF file to preview the redaction areas before
making a redacted PDF file of the presentation.
Presentation redaction
A copy of the presentation is automatically transferred to LibreOffice Draw for redaction to be
carried out. For more information on redaction, see the Getting Started Guide.
1) Open the presentation to be redacted, then go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar and
the following happens:
– The document is copied, prepared and transferred to LibreOffice Draw as an untitled
file.
– LibreOffice Draw opens with the untitled document displayed.
– The Redaction toolbar automatically opens. If the Redaction toolbar is not displayed,
go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar in LibreOffice Draw and select Redaction.
2) Go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar and click on Rectangle Redaction or Freeform
Redaction in the Redaction toolbar.
3) Draw the required shapes to redact the sensitive areas in the document. The redaction
shape is gray allowing the sensitive areas in the document to be visible before they are
redacted.
4) If necessary, click on Export Preview PDF to create a preview copy of the PDF file to
review the redaction areas before the redaction is finalized.
5) If necessary, delete the preview PDF copy after reviewing the redaction areas in the file.
6) Click on Redacted Export (White), or Redacted Export (Black) in the Redaction toolbar
to export the presentation file as a redacted PDF file.
7) Navigate to the folder in the file browser window that opens where the redact PDF file is
going to be saved and enter a name for the file.
8) Click on Save to create the redacted PDF file. The gray redaction shapes are converted
to white, or black shapes and the document is exported as a PDF
Automatic redaction
Automatic redaction is used to define words and patterns that are automatically marked for
redaction. Automatic redaction is useful for documents that have multiple occurrences of names
and other personal information (for example credit cards, phone numbers, and so on). Manually
redacting this type information in a document would require significant effort, but automatic
redaction makes redaction of a document easier and more efficient. For more information on
automatic redaction, see the Getting Started Guide.
Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 11,
Setting Up and Customizing
Impress
Introduction
This chapter provides information on LibreOffice settings that apply when using Impress, but may
also apply to all the other LibreOffice modules. The illustrations in this chapter have been taken
from LibreOffice Impress. For more information on setting up and customizing all LibreOffice
modules, see the Getting Started Guide.
LibreOffice options
Note
Revert has the same effect on all pages of the Options LibreOffice dialog. It
resets the options to the values that were in place when LibreOffice was opened.
User data information

Impress uses the first name, last name and initials stored in User Data for document properties,
optional author field used in slides, and identification of any comments made.
1) Go to Tools > Options (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences) on the Menu bar to open
the Options LibreOffice dialog (Figure 298). The list on the left-hand side changes to
match the LibreOffice module that is open.
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice on the left-hand side and select User
Data to open the user data options page for LibreOffice.
3) Enter or edit details that are used in document properties.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Options LibreOffice dialog.
Figure 298: Options LibreOffice dialog — User Data page

Figure 299: Options LibreOffice dialog — View page
View options
the Options LibreOffice dialog. The list on the left-hand side changes to match the
LibreOffice module that is open.
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice on the left-hand side and select View to
open the view options page for LibreOffice (Figure 299).
3) Enter or edit details that are used for viewing a file in LibreOffice.
View options control how the LibreOffice user interface appears when creating slides. For more
information on customizing the user interface, see the Getting Started Guide.
Appearance
Mode
Select an appearance mode from the drop-down list from System, Light, or Dark. Any
change in appearance is only available if the computer operating system supports a
change of appearance.
Icon style
Specifies the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
Icon size
Sets the icon size to Automatic, Small, Large or Extra Large.
Toolbar
Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
Notebookbar
Specifies the display size of notebook bar icons.
Sidebar
Specifies the display size of sidebar icons.
Visibility
Displays icons according to system settings and themes.
Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress | 327

Menu icons
Select from Automatic, Hide, or Show.
Shortcuts
Displays keyboard shortcuts next to the corresponding menu items.
Mouse
Defines how the cursor is positioned and the action of the middle button, if used.
Positioning
Specifies if and how the cursor is positioned in newly opened dialogs.
Middle button
Defines the function of the middle mouse button. First function is for automatic scrolling
dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view. The second function
is to insert clipboard contents at the cursor position by pressing the middle mouse
button.
Graphics Output
Defines how graphics are displayed.
Use hardware acceleration
Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the
screen display. The support for hardware acceleration is not available for all operating
systems and platform distributions of LibreOffice.
Use anti-aliasing
When supported, enables and disables anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing
enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
Use Skia for all rendering
Currently this option is disabled in LibreOffice.
Font Lists
Defines how the fonts are displayed.
Show preview of fonts
Displays how a selected font will appear on the user interface.
Screen font antialiasing
When selected, the display of fonts looks smoother and with less artifacts.
From:
Sets the minimum size of a font being used before Screen font antialiasing is applied to
smooth the font.
Print options
Print options are selected and changed using the Print page of the Options LibreOffice dialog, or
during the printing process. Available print options shown in the print dialog do depend on
operating system, computer setup, and the type of printer being used. An example of print
options available are shown in Figure 300. See Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing,
Emailing, and Exporting for more information about the printing of slide shows.
the Options LibreOffice dialog.
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice on the left-hand side and select Print to
open the printing options page for LibreOffice.

Figure 300: Options LibreOffice dialog — Print page
3) Select the print settings for the selected printer and the most used printing method.
Using print options it is possible to reduce amount of data sent to the printer increasing printing
speed because print files are smaller. It is also easier for printers with a smaller memory to print
large files. However, reducing print data can result in slightly lower print quality.
Settings for
Specifies whether the print settings apply to the printer or to a file.
Printer
Define options for reducing data while printing directly to a printer.
Print to file
Define options for reducing data while printing to a file.
Defaults
PDF as standard print job format
Specifies the use of PDF format when sending a file to the printer.
Convert colors to grayscale
Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale.
Include transparent objects
When selected, any reduction in print quality also applies to the transparent areas of
objects.
Reduce Bitmaps
Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be
reduced and not increased.
Resolution
Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi.
Normal print quality
Corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
High print quality
Corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi.

Reduce Transparency
If selected, any transparent objects are printed as normal, depending on the selection of
the two following options.
Automatically
Specifies that any transparencies are only printed if the transparent areas covers less
than a quarter of the entire page.
No transparency
When selected, transparencies are not printed.
Note
Transparencies cannot be sent directly to a printer. Document areas where
transparencies are visible are calculated as bitmaps and sent to the printer.
Depending on bitmap size and print resolution, a large amount of data may result.
Warnings
Defines which warnings appear before any printing starts.
Paper size
Select this option if a certain paper size is required for printing a document. If the paper
size required is not available in the current printer, a warning is displayed.
Paper orientation
Select this option if a specific page orientation is required for a document. If the format
is not available, a warning is displayed.
Transparency
Select this option if a warning is required when transparencies are contained in the
document. A dialog appears allowing selection if the transparency is to be printed.
Reduce gradient
If selected, gradients are printed with reduced quality.
Gradient stripes
Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
Intermediate color
Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color.
Application color options

Application colors specify which color is used to display various elements of the user interface in
LibreOffice. The only option specific to Impress is the color of the grid points.
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice on the left-hand side to open a list of
sections and select Application Colors (Figure 301).
3) In Custom Colors, scroll down to Drawing/Presentation and select from the list of color
palettes a color to use for the Grid.
Note
To save any color changes as a color scheme, click on Save and type a name in
the dialog that opens, then click OK.

Figure 301: Options LibreOffice dialog — Application Colors page
Figure 302: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — General page
Impress options
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice Impress on the left-hand side to open a
list of sections (Figure 302).
3) Select an option section from the list of sections that are available, then select from the
required options from the options available.

General options
New document
Start with Template Selection
If selected, the Select a Template dialog opens when creating a new presentation.
Settings
Copy when moving
If selected, a copy is created when an object is moved while holding down the Ctrl
key (macOS ⌘). The same applies for rotating and resizing an object. The original
object remains in its current position and size.
Use background cache
Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master slide. This
speeds up the display. Deselect this option to display contents being changed on the
master slide.
Objects always moveable
When selected, it allows moving an object with Rotate enabled. If this option is not
selected, Rotate can only be used to rotate an object.
Unit of measurement
Determines the unit of measurement used in Impress.
Tab stops
Defines the spacing between tab stops.
Compatibility
These settings are valid for the current presentation only.
Use printer metrics for document formatting
Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display
on the screen. If this option is not selected, a printer independent layout is used for
screen display and printing. If this option is set for the current document and the
document is saved, for example, in an older binary format, this option is not saved. If
the file is then opened from the older format, this option is set by default.
Add spacing between paragraphs and tables
Specifies that Impress calculates the paragraph spacing. Similar to Microsoft
PowerPoint which adds the bottom spacing of a paragraph to the top spacing of the
next paragraph to calculate the total spacing between both paragraphs. Impress
utilizes only the larger of the two spacings.
Presentation
Enable remote control
When selected, allows a remote control to be used for presentations.
Enable Presenter Console
When selected, the Presenter Console opens for presentations when using multiple
displays.
Text objects
Allow quick editing
If selected, text is edited immediately after clicking a text object. If deselected, double
click to edit text. This mode is also activated by clicking on Allow Quick Editing in the
Options toolbar (Figure 303).

Figure 304: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — View page

Only text area selectable
Specifies text frame selection by clicking the text. In the area of the text frame that is
not filled with text, an object behind the text frame can be selected. This mode can be
activated by clicking on Select Text Area Only in the Options toolbar.
View options
Select LibreOffice Impress > View (Figure 304) to specify the options for the available display
modes.
Display
Rulers visible
When selected, displays the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
Helplines while moving
When selected, displays guides when moving an object. Impress creates dotted guides
that extend beyond the box containing the selected object and covering the entire
Workspace to help in positioning of an object. This mode can also be activated by
clicking on Helplines While Moving on the Options toolbar.
All control points in Bézier editor
Displays the control points of all Bézier points if a Bézier curve is selected. If this option
is not selected, only the control points of the selected Bézier points are visible.
Contour of each individual object
Impress displays the contour line of each individual object when moving an object.
When an objects is being moved, this option shows if there is any conflict with other
objects in the target position. If this option is not selected, Impress displays only a
square contour that includes all selected objects.
Grid options
Select LibreOffice Impress > Grid (Figure 305) to specify the grid settings for Impress. Using a
grid helps in determining the exact position of objects. The grid can also be set to line up with the
snap grid.

Figure 305: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — Grid page
Grid
Snap to grid
Activates the snap function. If this option is selected and want to move or create
individual objects without snapping to the grid. This setting can be temporarily
deactivated by pressing the Shift key to deactivate Snap to grid whilst moving the
individual object. This mode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Grid on the
Options toolbar.
Visible grid
Displays grid points on the screen. These points will not display or print as part of a
presentation.
Resolution
Horizontal
Defines the measurement unit for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
Vertical
Defines the measurement unit for the spacing between grid points on the Y-axis.
Synchronize axes
When selected, the measurement and spacing settings for X- and Y-axes are
synchronized for Resolution and Subdivision.
Subdivision
Horizontal
Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.
Vertical
Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis.
Snap
To snap lines
Snaps the edge of an object being dragged to the nearest snap line when the mouse
button is released. This mode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Snap Lines
on the Options toolbar.

To the page margins
Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. This
mode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Page Margins on the Options
toolbar.
To object frame
Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest
graphic object. The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap
range. This mode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Object Border on the
Options toolbar.
To object points
Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest
graphic object. This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object is
in the snap range. This mode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Object
Points on the Options toolbar.
Snap range
Defines the snap distance between the cursor and the object contour. If the cursor is
nearer than the distance specified, the cursor snaps to a snap point.
Constrain Objects
When creating or moving objects
Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°)
when creating or moving them. This setting can be temporarily deactivated by pressing
and holding the Shift key.
Extend edges
Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the
Shift key is pressed before releasing the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse
where a circle is created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse. When this option
is NOT selected, a square or a circle is created based on the shorter side or diameter.
When rotating
Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that is
selected. If an object is to be rotated outside the defined angle, press and hold the Shift
key when rotating. Release the Shift key when the desired rotation angle is reached.
Point reduction
Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, this is useful to
reduce editing points.
Print options
Select LibreOffice Impress > Print (Figure 306) to specify print settings for a presentation. See
Chapter 10 Saving Slide Shows, Printing, E-mailing, and Exporting for more information about
printing and the options available.
Page Options
Default
Pages are printed at the default setting for printing.
Fit to page
A slide is resized to fit the printed page, while maintaining the relative positions of the
objects on the slide.
Tile pages
Specifies that pages are printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than
the paper, several pages or slides are printed on one page of paper.

Figure 306: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — Print page
Brochure
Select this option to print the document in brochure format. Select Front to print from
the front to the back of a brochure. Select Back to print from the back to the front of a
brochure.
Paper tray from printer settings
When selected, the paper tray used is defined in the printer setup.
Print
Page name
When selected, the page name is printed.
Date
When selected, the current date is printed.
Time
When selected, the current time is printed.
Hidden pages
When selected, any hidden pages in the slide show are printed.
Quality
Default
When selected, the slides are printed in color.
Grayscale
When selected, the slides are printed as grayscale.
Black & white
When selected, the slides are printed in black and white.
Customizing user interface

Impress menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts are customized by adding, deleting, or
modifying items in the menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts that are used when creating
slides and slide shows. For more information on customizing the user interface, see Chapter 12
User Interface Variants, Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts, Appendix B Toolbars, and the Getting
Started Guide.

Adding extensions
Extensions are packages installed into LibreOffice Impress to add new functions. Although
individual extensions can be found in different places, the official LibreOffice extension repository
is at https://extensions.libreoffice.org/. Some extensions are free of charge, while some are
available for a fee. Check the descriptions to see what licenses and fees apply to each extension.
For more information on extensions, see the Getting Started Guide.

Impress Guide 7.6
Chapter 12,
User Interface Variants
Introduction
By default, commands and tools used in LibreOffice Impress are grouped in a user interface
consisting of cascading menus and toolbars. The functions and use of these cascading menus
and toolbars are described in previous chapters of this user guide.
This chapter describes the user interface variants that are available for LibreOffice Impress. A
user then has the option to select the user interface that suits their requirements and methods of
creating presentations in LibreOffice Impress.
Note
When changing the user interface, the variant can be applied only to LibreOffice
Impress, or applied to all the modules in LibreOffice.
Selecting a user interface

To select a user interface variant or switch between the user interface variants:
1) Go to View > User Interface on the Menu bar to open the Select Your Preferred User
Interface dialog (Figure 307).
2) In UI variants, select one of the variants. An example of the selected variant is shown in
the Preview box, along with a short description.
3) Click on Apply to Impress to immediately apply the variant selection to LibreOffice
Impress only, or click on Apply to All to immediately apply the user interface variant to all
the LibreOffice modules. The LibreOffice window changes to match the selected variant.
4) Click on Close to close the dialog.
Note
If the option Enable experimental features has been selected in the Tools >
Options > Advanced dialog (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice
> Advanced), several more variants appear in UI variants. Being experimental,
these variants are not described in this user guide.
Figure 307: Select Your Preferred Interface dialog

Figure 308: Standard User Interface dialog
Standard Toolbar
The Standard Toolbar user interface is the default view when LibreOffice is installed and the
Workspace opened for the first time. For more information on the Impress Workspace, see
Chapter 1, Introducing Impress. Figure 308 shows an example of the default Workspace view in
LibreOffice Impress consisting of the following:
• Menu bar at the top of the Workspace.
• Standard and Line and Filling toolbars positioned below the Menu bar.
• Drawing toolbar positioned vertically on the left of the Workspace.
• Sidebar on the right of the Workspace.
Tabbed
The Tabbed user interface provides a familiar interface for users coming from proprietary office
suites, for example, Microsoft Office. Every tab within this user interface consists of a set of tools
grouped by context. The context changes automatically depending on the LibreOffice module
and the object selected. Figure 309 shows an example of the default Workspace view using the
Tabbed user interface in LibreOffice Impress.
It includes a Menu bar, a Tab bar, and tool icons grouped in context that would be normally used
in LibreOffice Impress. If the tool icons on a tab page do not fit into the width of the Impress
window, a double chevron >> appears at the right end of the row. Click on the double chevron >>
to display more commands.
Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 341

Figure 309: Tabbed user interface
Figure 310: Quick Menu for Tabbed UI

At the left end of the Tab bar, an Icon bar (highlighted in Figure 309) is available giving access to
some commonly used tools — Menubar; Open (Ctrl+O); Save (Ctrl+S);Undo (Ctrl+Z); Redo
(Ctrl+Y); Start from First Slide (F5). In Windows and Linux operating systems, the Menu bar
can be hidden or displayed by clicking on Menubar at the left end of the Tab bar.
On the right of the Tab bar, a quick menu (Figure 310), indicated by 3 horizontal lines (≡), is
available giving access to some commonly used commands and links. Some of the quick menu
items have submenus, indicated by a triangle ► or a single chevron > on the right.
The Tabbed user interface can be customized using the Notebookbar page of the Customize
dialog (Figure 311) to show or hide the individual tools on the various tabs. For more information
on customization of LibreOffice, see the Getting Started Guide and the Writer Guide.

Figure 311: Customize dialog — Notebookbar page
Note
When using the Tabbed user interface, the Impress toolbars are no longer visible.
If necessary, it is possible to open toolbars by going to View > Toolbars on the
Menu bar or select Toolbars on the quick menu.
Fixed tabs
File tab
The File tab (Figure 312) is a fixed tab providing commands to create new documents; open,
save, print, and close documents; manage templates; export to PDF and EPUB; display
document properties; add a digital signature; and sign an existing PDF. The File tab has two
menus: File and Help. The File tab menu contains the same commands as the tools available on
the tab and the Help tab menu provides links to a variety of resources.
Figure 312: Tabbed UI — File tab

Home tab
The Home tab (Figure 313) is a fixed tab providing commands to cut, copy, paste, and format
text; insert common items (for example images, tables, charts); apply, update, and edit drawing
styles; and so on. The Home tab menu at the right end of the Home tab bar provides additional
tools that are not on the tab.
Figure 313: Tabbed UI — Home tab
Insert tab
The Insert tab (Figure 314) is a fixed tab providing tools to insert many commonly used items.
The Insert menu at the right end of the Insert tab bar provides some of the same tools.
Figure 314: Tabbed UI — Insert tab
Layout tab
The Layout tab (Figure 315) is a fixed tab providing tools to create a slide layout. The Layout
menu at the right end of the Layout tab bar provides some of the same tools.
Figure 315: Tabbed UI — Layout tab
Slide Show tab

The Slide Show tab (Figure 316) is a fixed tab providing tools for creating a slide show. The
Slide Show menu at the right end of the Slide Show tab bar provides some of the same tools.
Figure 316: Tabbed UI — Slide Show tab

Review tab
The Review tab (Figure 317) is a fixed tab providing tools for reviewing a slide show. The
Review menu provides additional text editing tools. Some of these tools appear only if Asian or
Complex Text Layout are selected in LibreOffice options.
Figure 317: Tabbed UI — Review tab
View tab
The View tab (Figure 318) is a fixed tab providing tools to control the display of slides on a
screen. The View menu provides additional tools relating to the slides display on a screen.
Figure 318: Tabbed UI — View tab
Extension tab
The Extension tab is a fixed tab containing only the Extension Manager tool. When selected, this
tool opens the Extension Manager dialog allowing for installation and deletion of extensions
compatible with LibreOffice.
Tools tab
The Tools tab (Figure 319) is a fixed tab providing several tools for macros; color replacer; media
player; and so on. The Tools menu provides some of the same tools, plus extra tools for
organizing, for example, macros and dialogs; image map; data sources; and so on.
Figure 319: Tabbed UI — Tools tab
Additional tabs
Additional tabs appear between the View and Extension tabs when an applicable object in
Impress is selected.

Draw tab
The Draw tab (Figure 320) becomes available when a drawing object is selected in a slide. It
provides tools for editing, transforming, grouping, aligning, and distributing draw objects. The
Draw tab menu provides some of the tools required for editing, transforming and converting
drawing objects.
Figure 320: Tabbed UI — Draw tab
Image tab
The Image tab (Figure 321) becomes available when an image is selected in a slide, for example
a photograph. It provides tools for working with images, such as cropping, borders, area styles,
colors, and so on. The Image tab menu provides links to dialogs for working with images.
Figure 321: Tabbed UI — Image tab
Object tab
The Object tab (Figure 322) becomes available when an object, such as a chart, is selected. It
provides tools to position, resize, choose colors, and so on for the selected object. The Object
tab menu provides two extra tools to name and describe the object.
Figure 322: Tabbed UI — Object tab
Figure 323: Tabbed UI — Table tab

Table tab
The Table tab (Figure 323) becomes available when a table is selected in a slide. It provides
tools to format a table to the presentation requirements. The Table tab menu includes extra tools
for editing a table.
Media tab
The Media tab (Figure 324) only becomes available when a media object is selected in a slide. It
provides tools for positioning and running an audio or video file. The Media tab menu includes
extra tools for editing a media object.
Figure 324: Tabbed UI — Media tab
Single Toolbar
When selected, the Single Toolbar user interface only shows the Menu bar and the Standard
(Single Mode) toolbar, as shown in Figure 325. However, toolbars can be added to the user
interface by going to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and selecting the required toolbar from
the options available. For more information on toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars in this guide
and the Getting Started Guide.
Figure 325: Single Toolbar user interface
Sidebar
When selected, the Sidebar user interface only shows the Menu bar with no toolbars. However,
toolbars can be added to the user interface by going to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and
selecting the required toolbar from the options available. For more information on toolbars, see
Appendix B, Toolbars in this guide and the Getting Started Guide.
Tabbed Compact
The Tabbed Compact user interface has the same tabs as the Tabbed user interface, but the
tools on each tab are arranged as a single row of tools. Some of these tools have drop-down
menus with extra options. The tab menu on the right of the Tabbed Compact user interface
provides the same options as the tab menus in the Tabbed user interface. For more information
see “Tabbed” on page 341 for more information.

Groupedbar Compact
The Groupedbar Compact user interface is divided into groups that contain commands
organized as sets of tools and menus. The tools and menus that are available change to suit the
type of object selected. If necessary, clicking on the double chevron >> displays more tools for
editing an object. Figure 326 shows an example of Groupedbar Compact user interface.
The Menu on the right-hand end of the Groupedbar Compact interface provides extra tools for
working with LibreOffice Impress, including convenient ways to change the user interface and
access toolbars.
Figure 326: Groupedbar Compact user interface
Contextual Single
The Contextual Single user interface displays a single toolbar to suit the type of object that has
been selected. If necessary, clicking on the double chevron >> displays more tools for editing an
object. Figure 327 shows an example of a Contextual Single user interface when a basic shape
object is selected.
Figure 327: Contextual Single user interface

Impress Guide 7.6
Appendix A,
Keyboard Shortcuts
Introduction
LibreOffice can be used without requiring a pointing device, such as a mouse or trackball, by
using the keyboard shortcuts that are available in Impress. For example, tasks such as docking
and un-docking toolbars and windows, or changing the size or position of objects can all be
carried out using keyboard shortcuts. Although LibreOffice has an extensive set of keyboard
shortcuts, each LibreOffice module has keyboard shortcuts that are specific to that module. For
help with LibreOffice keyboard shortcuts, or using LibreOffice with a keyboard only, search the
LibreOffice Help using “shortcut” or “accessibility” as keywords.
In addition to using keyboard shortcuts that are listed in this appendix, keyboard shortcuts can
also be user defined. Create keyboard shortcuts for standard Impress functions or macros and
save them for use with Impress only, or with the other modules in LibreOffice. To customize
keyboard shortcuts, see the Getting Started Guide for more information.
macOS keyboard shortcuts

Some keystrokes and menu items are different on a macOS computer from those used in
Windows or Linux computers. This due to the way different operating systems work and different
types of keyboards used. Also, labelling on keyboards may vary depending on the age of the
computer and style of keyboard being used. The following information shows the most common
variations for keyboard shortcuts and keyboard labelling between Windows/Linux and macOS.
Shift, Control and Alt keys

Windows or Linux macOS
Control or Ctrl ⌘ or Cmd or Command
Alt ⌥ or Option or Alt
Shift or ⇧ Shift or ⇧
Caps Lock ⇪ or Caps Lock
Control or Ctrl ⌃ or Control or Ctrl
Home and End keys

Home Fn+Left Arrow
End Fn+Right Arrow
Page Up and Page Down

Screen Up Fn+Up Arrow
Page Up ⌥ or Option or Alt+Fn+Up Arrow
Screen Down Fn+Down Arrow
Page Down ⌥ or Option or Alt+Fn+Down Arrow

Impress keyboard shortcuts
Note
Some keyboard shortcuts are not available for computers using macOS and are
indicated in the following tables by a blank cell.
Impress functions
Windows or Linux macOS Effect
Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text
F2 F2
Formatting toolbar.
F3 F3 Enter and edit a group of objects.
Ctrl+F3 ⌘+F3 Exit a group of objects.
Shift+F3 Shift+F3 Opens the Duplicate dialog of a selected object.
Opens the Position and Size dialog of a selected
F4 F4
object.
Opens Notes view and displays the first slide in the
Alt+Shift+F5 ⌥+Shift+F5
slide show.
Ctrl+Shift+F5 ⌘+Shift+F5 Opens the Navigator.
F7 F7 Start spelling checker.
Shift+F7 Shift+F7 Switches on or off the automatic spell checking.
Opens the Thesaurus dialog for the language being
Ctrl+F7 ⌘+F7 used. Impress has to be in text editing mode to
access the thesaurus.
F8 F8 When selected, opens the Edit Points toolbar.
Ctrl+Shift+F8 ⌘+Shift+F8 Fit text to frame of a selected object.
F11 ⌘+T Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
Slide shows
F5 F5 Starts a slide show.
Starts a slide show at the slide where the slide show
Shift+F5 Shift+F5
was previously stopped at.
Shows the next slide, or plays the next animation
Left click Left click
effect on a slide.
Right Arrow Right Arrow
effect on a slide.
Page Down ⌥+Fn+Down Arrow
effect on a slide.
Spacebar Spacebar
effect on a slide.
Enter Enter
effect on a slide.
Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 351

Shows the previous slide, or plays the previous
Right click Right click
animation effect on a slide.
Left Arrow Left Arrow
Up Arrow Up Arrow
Page Up ⌥+Fn+Up Arrow
Backspace Backspace
Home Fn+Left Arrow Go to first slide in the slide show.
End Fn+Right Arrow Go to the last slide in the slide show.
Go to the previous slide without playing any animation
Alt+Page Up ⌥+Fn+Up Arrow
effects.
Alt+Page Down ⌥+Fn+Down Arrow Go to next slide without playing any animation effects.
Show black screen until next key or mouse wheel
B or. (period) B or. (period)
event.
Esc or – (minus) Esc or – (minus) Stop and close the slide show.
Type the number of a slide and press Enter to show
[Number] Enter [Number] Enter
the slide.
Impress shortcuts
Plus (+) Plus (+) Zoom in.
Minus (-) Minus (-) Zoom out.
Times (×) on Times (*) on
Fits the slide to fill the Workspace view.
number pad number pad
Divide (/) on Divide (/) on
Zooms in on the selected object.
number pad number pad
Ctrl+Shift+G ⌘+Shift+G Group selected objects.
Shift+Ctrl+Alt+G ⌘+Shift+⌥+G Ungroup selected group.
Enter a group to edit individual objects in the group.
Ctrl+click ⌘+click
Click outside the group to return to normal view.
Ctrl+Shift+G ⌘+Shift+G Combine selected objects.
Ctrl+Shift+Alt+K ⌘+Shift+⌥+K Split a selected object that has been combined

from a group of two or more objects.
Ctrl++ ⌘++ Bring to front.
Ctrl +Shift++ ⌘+Shift++ Bring forward.
Ctrl+- ⌘+- Send backward.
Ctrl+Shift+- ⌘+Shift+- Send to back.
Arrow Arrow Moves a selected object in the direction of the

arrow.

Moves a slide within the Workspace when no
Ctrl+Arrow ⌘+Arrow
objects are selected.
Constrains movement of a selected object horizontally
Shift and drag Shift and drag
or vertically when dragged.
Hold down Shift, then click on a selection handle
Shift and drag Shift and drag and drag when resizing an object to maintain the
proportions of the object.
Ctrl+Click and Hold down the Ctrl (⌘) key, then click and drag a
⌘+Click and drag
drag selected object to create a copy of the object.
Hold down the Alt (⌥) key and draw or resize an
Alt+Click and drag ⌥+Click and drag
object from the centre of the object.
Select an object that is behind the currently
Alt+Click ⌥+Click
selected object.
Select an object that is in front of the currently
Alt+Shift+Click ⌥+Shift+Click
selected object.
Selects several adjacent objects or characters.
Shift+Click Shift+Click Click at the start of a selection, move to the end of
the selection, and then hold down Shift while you
click.
Tab Tab Select objects in the order in which they were

created.
Shift+Tab Shift+Tab Select objects in the reverse order in which they

were created.
Esc Esc Exit current mode.
Switch to the previous slide. No function on the first
Page Up ⌥+Fn+Up Arrow
slide.
Switch to the next slide. No function on the last
Page Down ⌥+Fn+Down Arrow
slide.
Enter Enter Activate a place-holder object in a new presentation

(only if the frame is selected).
If there are no text objects on the slide, or the last text
object is reached, a new slide is inserted after the
Ctrl+Enter ⌘+Enter
current slide. The new slide uses the same layout as
the current slide.
Editing text
Inserts a custom hyphen in text at the cursor position.
Ctrl+- ⌘+-
Also known as a soft hyphen.
Inserts a non-breaking hyphen in text at the cursor
Ctrl+Shift+- ⌘+Shift+-
position. Also known as a hard hyphen.
Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not
Ctrl+Shift+Space ⌘+Shift+Space used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text
is justified.
Shift+Enter Shift+Enter Line break without paragraph change.

Left Arrow Left Arrow Moves the cursor one character to the left.
Shift+Left Arrow Shift+Left Arrow Moves the cursor one character to the left and selects
the character.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous
Ctrl+Left Arrow ⌥+Left Arrow
word.
Ctrl+Shift+Left ⌥+Shift+Left Moves the cursor to the left and selects the word on
Arrow Arrow the left.
Right Arrow Right Arrow Moves the cursor one character to the right.
Shift+Right Shift+Right Moves the cursor one character to the right and
Arrow Arrow selects the character.
Ctrl+Right Arrow ⌥+Right Arrow Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.
Ctrl+Shift+Right ⌥+Shift+Right Moves the cursor to the right and selects the word on
Arrow Arrow the right.
Up Arrow Up Arrow Moves the cursor up one line.
Moves the cursor up one line in the text and selects
Shift+Up Arrow Shift+Up Arrow
the lines of text.
Ctrl+Up Arrow ⌥+Up Arrow Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.
Ctrl+Shift+Up ⌥+Shift+Up Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.

Selects the text in the paragraph from the cursor
Arrow Arrow
position to the beginning of the paragraph.
Down Arrow Down Arrow Moves the cursor down one line.
Shift+Down Arrow Shift+Down Arrow Moves the cursor down one line in the text and selects
the lines of text.
Ctrl+Down Arrow ⌘+Down Arrow Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph.
Ctrl+Shift+Down ⌥+Shift+Down Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph. Selects
the text in the paragraph from the cursor position to
Arrow Arrow
the end of the paragraph.
Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line and
Shift+Home
selects the text from the cursor position.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the text block on
Ctrl+Home
the slide.
End Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
Moves the cursor to the end of the line and selects the
Shift+End
text from the cursor position.
Moves the cursor to the end of the text block on the
Ctrl+End
slide.
Delete the text from the cursor position to the end of
Ctrl+Del
the word.
Delete the text from the cursor position to the end of
Ctrl+Shift+Del
the sentence.
Delete the text from the cursor position to the
Ctrl+Backspace ⌘+Backspace
beginning of the word.

Ctrl+Shift+ ⌘+Shift+ Delete the text from the cursor position to the
Backspace Backspace beginning of the sentence.
Slide Sorter and Slide Pane

Home Set the focus to the first slide.
End Set the focus to the last slide.
Left Arrow Left Arrow Set the focus to the previous slide.
Right Arrow Right Arrow Set the focus to the next slide.
Move selected slides down one position in Slide
Ctrl+Shift+Down ⌘+Shift+Down Sorter view. With multiple slides selected, the slides
Arrow Arrow are moved together with the last selected slide in the
list.
Ctrl+Shift+Up ⌘+Shift+Up Move selected slides up one position in Slide Sorter

view. With multiple slides selected, the slides are
Arrow Arrow
moved together with the first selected slide in the list.
Ctrl+Shift+End Move selected slides to end of Slide Sorter list.
Ctrl+Shift+Home Move selected slides to start of Slide Sorter list.
Change to Normal view with the active slide when in
Enter Enter Slide Sorter view. Add a new slide when in Slide
Pane.
Menu keyboard shortcuts

The keyboard shortcuts listed in the following tables are available in each menu category on the
Menu bar. The tables give the menu item or sub-item, operating system validity, and the effect or
purpose of the shortcut.
Note
The menus listed below are in the same order as displayed on the Menu bar from
left to right.
File menu
Menu item or Windows or
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
New > Ctrl+N ⌘+N Opens a new presentation
Presentation
Shift+
New > Templates ⌘+Shift+N Opens the Templates dialog
Ctrl+N
Opens a file browser for navigation to a folder
Open Ctrl+O ⌘+O
and selecting a document.
Save Ctrl+S ⌘+S Saves the open document.
Ctrl+ Opens the Save as file browser to save the
Save As ⌘+Shift+S
Shift+S open document as a new document.

macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Opens the Print dialog to select how the
Print Ctrl+P ⌘+P
document is printed
Exit LibreOffice Ctrl+Q ⌘+Q Closes the open file and quits LibreOffice
Edit Menu
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Undo Ctrl+Z ⌘+Z Undoes the previous editing action.
Redo Ctrl+Y ⌘+Y Reverses the action of the last Undo command.
Deletes the selected object and places it on the
Cut Ctrl+X ⌘+X
clipboard.
Copy Ctrl+C ⌘+C Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
Places the object on the clipboard into the
Paste Ctrl+V ⌘+V
document.
Paste Special > Ctrl+Shift+ ⌘+⌥+ Paste copied text at the cursor position without
Paste
Alt+V Shift+V any formatting.
Unformatted Text
Ctrl+ Opens the Paste Special dialog to paste the

Paste Special >
⌘+Shift+V contents of the clipboard at the cursor position
Paste Special Shift+V
in a format that is specified.
Select All Ctrl+A ⌘+A Selects all objects on a slide.
Find Ctrl+F ⌘+F Opens the Find toolbar
Find and Replace Ctrl+H ⌥+⌘+F Opens the Find and Replace dialog
Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is an
Points F8 F8 object on the slide that uses editable points, for
example a freeform line.
Ctrl+ Switches on or off the Impress edit mode.

Edit Mode ⌘+Shift+M When switched off, a slide show is displayed in
Shift+M
read only mode.
View menu
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Ctrl+ Switches the rulers off and on in the
Rulers ⌘+Shift+R
Shift+R Workspace.
Sidebar Ctrl+F5 Opens or closes the Sidebar.
Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
Styles F11 ⌘+T
Sidebar.
Ctrl+
Navigator ⌘+Shift+F5 Opens the Navigator.
Shift+F5

Insert menu
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Object > Ctrl+Alt+= ⌥+⌘+= Inserts a formula into the slide
Formula Object
F2 F2 Switches to text edit mode and opens the

Text Box
Text Formatting toolbar.
Inserts a new comment box onto the selected
Comment Ctrl+Alt+C ⌘+⌥+C
slide.
Hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘+K Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
Formatting Mark Ctrl+Shift+
⌘+Shift+ Inserts a non-breaking space at the cursor
> Insert non-
Space Space position.
breaking space
Formatting Mark Ctrl+
Inserts a no-breaking space at the cursor
> Insert Narrow ⌥+Shift+F5
Shift+F5 position.
No-break Space
Formatting Mark
Inserts a no-width no optional break at the
> No-width Ctrl+/ ⌘+/
cursor position.
Optional Break
Format menu
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Text > Bold Ctrl+B ⌘+B Applies Bold format to selected text.
Text > Italic Ctrl+I ⌘+I Applies Italic format to selected text.
Text > Ctrl+
⌘+⌥+C Applies superscript format to selected text.
Superscript Shift+P
Ctrl+
Text > Subscript ⌘+Shift+B Applies subscript format to selected text.
Shift+B
Text > Increase Ctrl+] ⌘+] Increases the point size of selected text.
Size
Text > Decrease Ctrl+[ ⌘+[ Decreases the point size of selected text.
Size
Spacing > Line Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to a single
Ctrl+1 ⌘+1
Spacing 1 line.
Spacing Line Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to one and
Ctrl+5 ⌘+5
Spacing 5 half lines.
Spacing > Line Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to two
Ctrl+2 ⌘+2
Spacing 2 lines.
Align > Left Ctrl+L ⌘+L Sets the paragraph alignment to left aligned.
Align > Center Ctrl+E ⌘+E Sets the paragraph alignment to center aligned.
Align > Right Ctrl+R ⌘+R Sets the paragraph alignment to right aligned.
Align > Justified Ctrl+J ⌘+J Sets the paragraph alignment to justified.

macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Shift+Alt+ Demotes a point to the next level when Outline
Lists > Demote
Right Arrow view.
Shift+Alt+ Promotes a point to the next level when in
Lists > Promote
Left Arrow Outline view.
Lists > Move Shift+Alt+ ⌥+Shift+ Moves a point down the order when in Outline
Down Down Arrow Down Arrow view.
Shift+Alt+ ⌥+Shift+Up Moves a point up the order when in Outline
Lists > Move Up
Up Arrow Arrow view.
Shift+ Removes direct formatting from the selection.

Clear Direct
˄+Shift+M Direct formatting is formatting that is applied
Formatting Ctrl+M
without using styles.
Styles > Manage Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
F11 ⌘+T
Styles Sidebar.
Object and
Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
Shape > Position F4 F4
selected object.
and Size
Arrange > Bring Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the front of other
⌘+Shift++
to Front Shift++ objects.
Arrange > Bring Moves a selected object in front of the forward
Ctrl++ ⌘++
Forward object.
Arrange > Send Moves a selected object behind the backward
Ctrl+- ⌘+-
Backward object.
Arrange > Send Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the back of other
⌘+Shift+-
to Back Shift+- objects.
Ctrl+
Group > Group ⌘+Shift+G Group selected objects.
Shift+G
Ctrl+Alt+ ⌘+ ⌥+
Group > Ungroup Ungroup selected group.
Shift+G Shift+G
Group > Enter F3 F3 Enter and edit a group of objects.
Group
Group > Exit Ctrl+F3 ⌘+F3 Exit a group of objects.
Group
Slide menu
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
New Slide Ctrl+M ˄+M Inserts a new slide into the slide show.
Jump to Last Alt+
⌥+Shift+F5 Opens the last slide edited in the document.
Edited Slide Shift+F5
Move > Slide to Ctrl+Shift+ Moves the selected slide to the beginning of the
Start Home slide show.
Ctrl+Shift+ ⌘+Shift+Up Moves the selected slide above the previous
Move > Slide Up
Up Arrow slide. No function on the first slide.

macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Move > Slide Ctrl+Shift+ ⌘+Shift+ Moves the selected slide below the next slide.
Down Down Down Arrow No function on the last slide.
Move > Slide to Ctrl+Shift+ Moves the selected slide to the end of the slide
End End show.
Navigate > To Switch to the previous slide. No function on the
Page Up Up Arrow
Previous Slide first slide.
Navigate > To Switch to the next slide. No function on the last
Page Down Down Arrow
Next Slide slide.
Slide Show menu

macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Start from First F5 F5 Starts a slide show from the first slide.
Slide
Start from Starts a slide show at the slide where the slide
Shift+F5 Shift+F5
Current Slide show was previously stopped at.
Tools menu
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Spelling F7 ⌘+Shift+; Start spelling checker.
Automatic Spell Shift+F7 Shift+F7 Switches on or off the automatic spell
Checking checking.
Opens the Thesaurus dialog for the language
Thesaurus Ctrl+F7 ⌘+F7 being used. Impress has to be in text editing
mode to access the thesaurus.
Extension Ctrl+Alt+E ⌘+⌥+E Opens the Extension Manager dialog.
Manager
Options Alt+F12 ⌘+, Opens the Options LibreOffice dialog.
Windows menu
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Closes the active window. If there is only one
Closes Window Ctrl+W ⌘+W
window, LibreOffice Impress closes.
Help menu
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Opens the browser application at the
LibreOffice Help F1 F1
LibreOffice Help pages.

Toolbar keyboard shortcuts
Impress provides several toolbars to help in creating slides and slide shows. Some of the tools
on these Impress toolbars can be activated using a keyboard shortcut.
Note
The toolbars are listed in the same order that is displayed in the submenu that
opens when clicking on View > Toolbars on the Menu bar.
Drawing
Windows, Linux, or
Tool name Effect
macOS
Insert Text Box F2
Formatting toolbar.
Opens the Position and Size dialog of a selected
Position and Size F4
object.
Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is an object on
Points F8 the slide that uses editable points, for example a
freeform line.
Find
Windows or
Tool name macOS Effect
Linux
Find and Replace Ctrl+H ⌥+⌘+F Opens the Find and Replace dialog
Form Design
Windows or
Linux
Position and Size F4 F4
selected object.
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the front of other
Bring to Front ⌘+Shift++
Shift++ objects.
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the back of other
Send to Back ⌘+Shift+-
Shift+- objects.
Ctrl+
Group ⌘+Shift+G Group selected objects.
Shift+G
Ctrl+Alt+ ⌘+⌥+
Ungroup Ungroup selected group.
Shift+G Shift+G
Enter Group F3 F3 Enter and edit a group of objects.
Exit Group Ctrl+F3 ⌘+F3 Exit a group of objects.

Image
Windows or
Linux
Shift++ objects.
Moves a selected object in front of the forward
Bring Forward Ctrl++ ⌘++
object.
Moves a selected object behind the backward
Send Backward Ctrl+- ⌘+-
object.
Shift+- objects.
Line and Filling

Windows or
Linux
selected object.
Shift++ objects.
Moves a selected object in front of the forward
Bring Forward Ctrl++ ⌘++
object.
Moves a selected object behind the backward
Send Backward Ctrl+- ⌘+-
object.
Shift+- objects.
Show the Styles F11 ⌘+T Opens the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
Sidebar
Outline
Windows or
Linux
Shift+Alt+ Demotes a point to the next level when Outline
Demote
Right Arrow view.
Shift+Alt+ Promotes a point to the next level when in
Promote
Left Arrow Outline view.
Shift+Alt+ ⌥+Shift Moves a point down the order when in Outline
Move Down
Down Arrow +Down Arrow view.
Shift+Alt+ ⌥+Shift+Up Moves a point up the order when in Outline
Move Up
Up Arrow Arrow view.
Slide Sorter
Windows or
Linux
Start from First F5 F5 Starts a slide show from the first slide
Slide

Standard
Windows or
Linux
New Ctrl+N ⌘+N Opens a new presentation document.
Ctrl+ Opens the Templates dialog to create a new
Templates ⌘+Shift+N
Shift+N document using a template.
Opens the Open file browser so you can
Open Ctrl+O ⌘+O
navigate to a folder and select a document.
Ctrl+ Opens the Save as file browser so you can
Save As ⌘+Shift+S
Shift+S save the open document as a new document.
Ctrl+ Switches on edit mode when a document is in
Edit Mode ⌘+Shift+M
Shift+M read only mode.
Print Ctrl+P ⌘+P
document is printed.
Deletes the selected object and places it on the
Cut Ctrl+X ⌘+X
clipboard.
Places the object on the clipboard into the
Paste Ctrl+V ⌘+V
document.
Clear Direct Ctrl+ Removes direct formatting that has been
⌘+Shift+M
Formatting Shift+M applied without using styles.
Find and Replace Ctrl+H ⌘+⌥+F Opens the Find and Replace dialog.
Spelling F7 F7 Starts the spelling checker.
Toggle Automatic Shift+F7 Shift+F7 Switches on or off the automatic spell checking.
Spell
Start from First F5 F5 Starts a slide show.
Slide
Shift+F5 Shift+F5
Insert Text Box F2 F2
Formatting toolbar.
Insert Hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘+K Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
Standard (Single Mode)

Windows or
Linux
New Ctrl+N ⌘+N Opens a new presentation document.
Opens the Open file browser for navigation to a
Open Ctrl+O ⌘+O
folder and select a document.

Windows or
Linux
Print Ctrl+P ⌘+P
document is printed
Formatting toolbar.
selected object.
Ctrl+
Group ⌘+Shift+G Group selected objects.
Shift+G
Ctrl+Alt+ ⌘+⌥+
Ungroup Ungroup selected group.
Shift+G Shift+G
Enter Group F3 F3 Enter and edit a group of objects.
Exit Group Ctrl+F3 ⌘+F3 Exit a group of objects.
Slide
Shift+F5 Shift+F5
Standard (Viewing Mode)

Windows or
Linux
Ctrl+ Opens the Save as file browser to save the
Save As ⌘+Shift+S
Shift+S open document as a new document.
Ctrl+ Switches on edit mode when a document is in
Edit Mode ⌘+Shift+M
Shift+M read only mode.
Print Ctrl+P ⌘+P
document is printed.
Find and Replace Ctrl+H ⌘+⌥+F Opens the Find and Replace dialog.
Slide
Text
Windows or
Linux
Formatting toolbar.

Impress Guide 7.6
Appendix B,
Toolbars
Introduction
In Impress several toolbars are available for creating a presentation. Each toolbar has a default
set of tools and an option to add additional tools to a toolbar.
Note
The icons displayed in the Impress toolbars illustrated in this appendix may differ
from what is displayed on a computer screen. Toolbar icons depend on the
computer operating system being used and how LibreOffice has been set up. For
more information on customizing LibreOffice and the toolbars, see the Getting
Started Guide.
Using toolbars
Displaying toolbars
There are two methods of opening toolbars in Impress, which are as follows:
• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar. A submenu opens with an alphabetical list of
toolbars available for creating presentations in LibreOffice Impress. Click on a toolbar
name to display it and make it active. Active toolbars are indicated by highlighting or a
check mark next to the toolbar name.
• When selecting some tools on a toolbar, a sub-toolbar may open providing more tools to
edit an object. For example, clicking on Color in the Image toolbar opens the Color
sub-toolbar to adjust the color settings of an image.
Note
Some toolbars when selected do not display until an object of the correct type is
selected in a presentation. For example, the Image toolbar only displays when an
image, or graphic, using an image file format is selected.
Closing toolbars
To close a toolbar, use one of the following methods:
• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and deselect the toolbar.
• Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar and select Close Toolbar from the context menu.
• Click on the X in the right corner of the title bar of a floating toolbar.
Moving toolbars
Docked toolbars
By default, some toolbars are docked into position in the Impress main window. For example, the
Standard toolbar is docked at the top of the main window. Docked toolbars can be undocked and
moved to a new docked position on the main window, or left as a floating toolbar.
1) Move the cursor over the small vertical handle at the left end of the toolbar (highlighted in
Figure 328). The cursor changes to the moving cursor used for the computer system and
setup.

Figure 328: Toolbar moving handles
2) Click and drag the toolbar to a new location. This can be a new docked position, or a
floating toolbar. A hashed border appears around the toolbar indicating the toolbar position
as it is dragged.
3) Release the cursor when the required position is reached.
Note
If the small vertical bar is not visible at the left end of a docked toolbar, then the
toolbar is locked into position. A docked toolbar must be unlocked before it can be
moved to a new position in the Impress main window. See “Locking toolbars” on
Floating toolbars
1) To move a floating toolbar, click on its title bar and drag it to a new floating location.
2) Release the cursor when the toolbar is in the required position.
Note
A floating toolbar does not have to be positioned on the Impress main window for
it to function.
Floating sub-toolbars
Some tools on a toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool indicating that more tools are
available on a sub-toolbar, for example Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar. Sub-toolbars can
be turned into floating sub-toolbars and moved into a new position as follows:
1) Move the cursor over the horizontal handle at the top of the sub-toolbar (highlighted in
Figure 329). The cursor changes to the moving cursor used for the computer system and
setup.
2) Click and drag the sub-toolbar to a new location to create a floating sub-toolbar.
3) Release the cursor when the required position is reached.
Figure 329: Creating floating sub-toolbar
Appendix B, Toolbars | 367

4) To close the floating sub-toolbar, right-click on the triangle ▼ in the sub-toolbar title bar
and select Close Toolbar from the context menu, or click on the X at the right end of the
sub-toolbar title bar.
Docking toolbar
To dock a floating toolbar, use one of the following methods:
• Click on the title bar and drag it to the top, bottom, left side, or right side of the main
window. When a toolbar reaches a docking position, a hashed border appears at the
docked position. Release the cursor and the toolbar is docked.
• Right-click on the toolbar and select Dock Toolbar from the context menu. The toolbar
moves into a docked position. If the position is not suitable, move the toolbar to a new
docked position.
• To dock all floating toolbars that are active, right-click on the toolbar and select Dock All
Toolbars from the context menu.
Locking toolbars
Docked toolbars
When a toolbar has been docked into position on the Impress main window, the toolbar can also
be locked into position preventing the toolbar from becoming a floating toolbar.
• To lock a toolbar into a docked position, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and
select Lock Toolbar Position from the context menu. A check mark appears against this
option indicating the toolbar is now locked. The small vertical or horizontal bar
disappears from the left end or top of the toolbar indicating that the toolbar is locked.
• To unlock a toolbar, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and click on Lock Toolbar
Position in the context menu. The check mark next to this option disappears indicating
the toolbar is now unlocked. The small vertical or horizontal bar appears at the left end or
top of the toolbar indicating that the toolbar is unlocked. This bar is also is used to move
the toolbar.
Note
Some toolbars cannot be docked or locked into position. This is indicated by the
options Dock Toolbar and/or Lock Toolbar Position being grayed out, making
the options unavailable.
Locking toolbars and sub-toolbars

To prevent toolbars and sub-toolbars from becoming floating toolbars or sub-toolbars, they can
be locked as follows:
1) Save the presentation that is open in Impress, then go to View > Toolbars on the Menu
bar and select Lock Toolbars from the submenu.
2) Select Restart Now in the Restart LibreOffice dialog that opens to activate the Lock
Toolbars option.
3) To unlock toolbars or sub-toolbars so they can become floating toolbars or sub-toolbars,
repeat Steps 1 thru 2. The Lock Toolbars option is an on/off switch.
Note
Using the Lock Toolbars option affects ALL toolbars and sub-toolbars available
in all LibreOffice modules.

Editing toolbars
When LibreOffice is installed on a computer, a set of toolbars suitable for each LibreOffice
component are also installed. Each toolbar has a default set of visible tools. Tools can be added
or deleted, and toolbars can be customized.
Adding tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of the
toolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on the tool required and the tool appears in the toolbar. The list of available tools
closes automatically. If there is a highlight or check mark next to the tool, then that tool is
already installed on the toolbar.
Note
When adding tools using Visible Buttons, the tool is added to the toolbar in the
same position as the tool appears in the Visible Buttons list. That is, the top tool
in Visible Buttons appears at the left end of the toolbar and the bottom tool
appears at the right end of the toolbar. Tool positions on a toolbar cannot be
changed.
Deleting tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of the
toolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on the tool no longer required and the tool is removed from the toolbar. The highlight
or check mark next to the tool is also removed. The list of available tools closes
automatically.
Customizing toolbars
Extra tools and commands that are not available in Visible Buttons can be added to a toolbar
using customization. Customization also allows the creation of new toolbars if a specific set of
tools are required for a specific task. For information on customizing toolbars, see the Getting
Started Guide.
Toolbars
The following bullet points provide information on the toolbars available for creating presentations
in Impress:
• The number of tools visible on a toolbar depend on the computer setup that is being used
to create a presentation.
• The tools displayed on the toolbars in this chapter are examples only
• The tools already installed on a toolbar are indicated in Visible Buttons either by the tool
icon being highlighted or by a check mark. This install indication depends on computer
setup and computer operating system being used.
• On some toolbars, tool icons may have a triangle ▼ to the right of the icon. Click on this
triangle to open one of the following: list of options, toolbar, or sub-toolbar.

• Some tools also have the option of using a keyboard shortcut instead of clicking on the
tool. Keyboard shortcuts are displayed on the right of the tool icon. For a full list of
keyboard shortcuts that are available in Impress, see Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts.
3D-Objects
Figure 330: 3D-Objects toolbar

The 3D-Objects toolbar (Figure 330) provides tools to create 3D objects in a slide. It is activated
by going to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar. Alternatively, click on the triangle ▼
next to 3D-Objects on the Drawing toolbar to open a sub-toolbar giving access to the same 3D
tools. The tools available on the 3D-Objects toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to
right when installed on the toolbar.
1) Cube 5) Pyramid
2) Sphere 6) Torus
3) Cylinder 7) Shell
4) Cone 8) Half Sphere
3D-Settings
Figure 331: 3D-Settings toolbar

The 3D-Settings toolbar (Figure 331) and its tools only become active when an object has been
converted to 3D using the tool Toggle Extrusion and the converted object is selected. The tools
available on the 3D-Settings toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1) Toggle Extrusion 6) Depth
2) Tilt Down 7) Direction
3) Tilt Up 8) Lighting
4) Tilt Left 9) Surface
5) Tilt Right 10) 3D Color
The following tools on the 3D-Settings toolbar have a triangle ▼ on the right of the icon. Click on
this triangle to open a drop-down menu giving access to various options as follows:
Depth
3D extrusion depth — 0cm; 1cm; 2.5cm; 5cm; 10cm; Infinity; Custom. The measurement
unit depends on the ruler settings in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > General
(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General).
Direction
3D extrusion direction and type — Parallel; Perspective.
Lighting
Lighting direction and lighting level of 3D extrusion — Bright; Normal; Dim.
Surface
Surface type of 3D extrusion — Wire Frame; Matt; Plastic; Metal.

3D Color
Color of 3D extrusion. Select a color from one of the available color palettes.
Align Objects
Figure 332: Align Objects toolbar

The Align Objects toolbar (Figure 332) provides tools for aligning several objects in a slide to
improve the visual impact of objects on a slide. The tools available on the Align Objects toolbar in
Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1) Left 4) Top
2) Centered 5) Center
3) Right 6) Bottom
The tools available on the Align Objects toolbar are as follows:
• Left — aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw
or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
• Centered — horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in
Draw or Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the horizontal centre of the page.
• Right — aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in
Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
• Top — vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is
selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page
margin.
• Centre — vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or
Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the vertical centre of the page.
• Bottom — vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is
selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page
margin.
Comments
Figure 333: Comments toolbar

The Comments toolbar (Figure 333) provides tools for adding, deletion, and navigation of
comments in a presentation. To use comments, it is recommended to add the name and initials of
all users in Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > User Data) so that comments can be easily identified. The tools available on the
Comments toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the
toolbar.
1) Comment 4) Delete Comment
2) Previous Comment 5) Delete All Comments
3) Next Comment

Distribute Selection
Figure 334: Distribute Selection toolbar

The Distribute Selection toolbar (Figure 334) provides tools to distribute three or more selected
objects evenly along the horizontal axis or vertical axis. Also, the spacing between objects can be
evenly distributed. The tools available on the Distribute Selection toolbar in Visible Buttons are
numbered from left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1) Distribute Horizontally Left 5) Distribute Vertically Top
2) Distribute Horizontally Center 6) Distribute Vertically Center
3) Distribute Horizontally Spacing 7) Distribute Vertically Spacing
4) Distribute Horizontally Right 8) Distribute Vertically Bottom
The tools available on the Distribute Selection toolbar provide the following options:
• Distribute Horizontally Left — distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of
the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
• Distribute Horizontally Center — distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal
centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
• Distribute Horizontally Spacing — distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that
the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
• Distribute Horizontally Right — distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges
of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
• Distribute Vertically Top — distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the
objects are evenly spaced from one another.
• Distribute Vertically Center — distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical
centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
• Distribute Vertically Spacing — distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the
objects are evenly spaced from one another.
• Distribute Vertically Bottom — distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom
edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
Drawing

The Drawing toolbar (Figure 335) provides the majority of the tools normally used to create
graphic objects on slides in a presentation. By default, this toolbar is normally docked on the left
side of the Workspace. The tools available on the Drawing toolbar in Visible Buttons are
1) Select 6) Insert Fontwork
2) Zoom & Pan 7) Line Color
3) Zoom 8) Fill Color
4) Text Box 9) Line
5) Vertical Text 10) Rectangle

11) Ellipse 27) Arrange
12) Line Ends with Arrow 28) Select at least three objects to distribute
13) Lines and Arrows (Distribution in Visible Buttons)
14) Curves and Polygons 29) Shadow
15) Connectors 30) Crop Image
16) Basic Shapes (Crop in Visible Buttons)
17) Symbol Shapes 31) Filter
18) Block Arrows 32) Points F8
(Arrow Shapes in Visible Buttons)) (Edit Points in Visible Buttons)
19) Flowchart 33) Show Gluepoint Function
(Flowchart Shapes in Visible Buttons) (Gluepoints in Visible Buttons)
20) Callouts 34) To Curve
(Callout Shapes in Visible Buttons) 35) To Polygon
21) Stars and Banners 36) To 3D
(Star Shapes in Visible Buttons) 37) T0 3D Rotation Object
22) 3D Objects 38) Toggle Extrusion
23) Position and Size 39) Insert
24) Rotate 40) Controls
25) Flip
26) Align Objects
Some tool shapes on the Drawing toolbar change depending on the last tool that was previously
selected and used.
• Where available, click on the triangle ▼ to the right of a tool to open a sub-toolbar, then
select the required shape to add to a drawing. For more information on sub-toolbars, see
“Sub-toolbars” on page 385.
• To create a floating sub-toolbar, click on the handle (Figure 2 on page 13) at the top of
the pop-up toolbar and drag to an empty area on the main window.
Edit Points
Figure 336: Edit Points toolbar

The Edit Points toolbar (Figure 336) provides tools for editing the points of a curve or polygon, or
an object that has been converted to a curve or polygon. The toolbar only becomes active when
an object is selected. To open, click on Edit Points on the Drawing or Standard toolbar, or use
the keyboard shortcut F8. The tools available on the Edit Points toolbar in Visible Buttons are
1) Edit Points 7) Split Curve
2) Move Points 8) Corner Point
3) Insert Points 9) Smooth Transition
4) Delete Points 10) Symmetric Transition
5) Convert to Curve 11) Eliminate Points
6) Close Bezier
Find
Figure 337: Find toolbar

The The
FindFontwork
toolbar (Figure
toolbar337) opens
(Figure 338)byisdefault
used toand is docked
create in the
graphical bottom
text leftincorner
objects a slideofand
the provide
Impress
the tools for editing the graphical text object. This toolbar only becomes active when aa Fontwork
main window above the Status bar. However, it can be undocked and made into
floating toolbar.
graphical The
text toolsinavailable
object on the
a slide has beenFind toolbarThe
selected. in Visible Buttonson
tools available arethe
numbered
Fontworkfrom left in
toolbar
to right when installed on the toolbar.
1) Insert Fontwork Text 4) Fontwork Alignment
2) Fontwork Shape 5) Fontwork Character Spacing
3) Fontwork Same Letter Heights 6) Toggle Extrusion
Some tools on the Fontwork toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool. Click on the triangle
to open a pop-up toolbar, or drop-down option list.
Fontwork Shape
Select the required shape for the Fontwork graphical text object from the options
available.
Fontwork Alignment
Select the paragraph alignment from the options available.
Fontwork Character Spacing
Select the required character spacing from the options available.
Form Controls
Figure 339: Form Controls toolbar

The Form Controls toolbar (Figure 339) provides the tools required to create an interactive form.
This allows controls to be added to a form in a text, drawing, spreadsheet, presentation, or HTML
document (for example a button that opens another presentation or slide). The tools available on
the Form Controls toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on
the toolbar.
1) Select 15) Formatted Field
2) Design Mode 16) Date Field
3) Toggle Form Control Wizards 17) Numerical Field
4) Form Design 18) Group Box
5) Control Properties 19) Time Field
6) Form Properties 20) Currency Field
7) Label 21) Pattern Field
8) Text Box 22) Table Control
9) Check Box 23) Navigation Bar
10) Option Button 24) Image Control
11) List Box 25) File Selection
12) Combo Box 26) Spin Button
13) Push Button 27) Scrollbar
14) Image Button
Form Design
Figure 340: Form Design toolbar

The Form Design toolbar (Figure 340) opens a form in Design Mode so that it can be edited.
Controls of the form cannot be activated or its contents edited when in Design Mode. However,
the position and size of the controls can be changed, other properties edited, and added or
deleted controls in Design Mode. The tools available on the Form Design toolbar in Visible
Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1) Select 11) Group
2) Control Properties 12) Ungroup
3) Form Properties 13) Enter Group
4) Position and Size 14) Exit Group
5) Form Navigator 15) Align Objects
6) Activation Order 16) Open in Design Mode
7) Add Field 17) Display Grid
8) Automatic Control Focus 18) Snap to Grid
9) Bring to Front 19) Helplines While Moving
10) Send to Back
Form Navigation
Figure 341: Form Navigation toolbar

The Form Navigation toolbar (Figure 341) provides tools to edit a database table or control the
data view. The toolbar is normally displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields that
are linked to a database. This toolbar is only active when forms are connected to a database,
which is why an inactivate toolbar is shown in Figure 341.
The Form Navigation toolbar also allows movement within records as well as inserting and
deleting records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. This
toolbar also provides tools providing sort, filter, and search functions for data records.
The tools available on the Form Navigation toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to
1) Find Record 13) Delete Record
2) Record 14) Refresh
3) Absolute Record 15) Refresh Control
4) Text -> Record 16) Sort
5) Total No. of Records 17) Sort Ascending
6) First Record 18) Sort Descending
7) Previous Record 19) AutoFilter
8) Next Record 20) Apply Filter
9) Last Record 21) Form-Based Filters
10) New Record 22) Reset Filter/Sort
11) Save Record 23) Data source as Table
12) Undo: Data entry
Gluepoints

The Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 342) provides tools to insert a glue point or modify the properties
of a glue point. A glue point is a point where a connector is attached to an object. By default,
LibreOffice automatically places a glue point at the center of each side of the bounding rectangle
for every object created. The tools available on the Gluepoints toolbar in Visible Buttons are
1) Insert Glue Point 7) Glue Point Horizontal Left
2) Exit Direction Left 8) Glue Point Horizontal Center
3) Exit Direction Top 9) Glue Point Horizontal Right
4) Exit Direction Right 10) Glue Point Vertical Top
5) Exit Direction Bottom 11) Glue Point Vertical Center
6) Glue Point Relative 12) Glue Point Vertical Bottom
Image
Figure 343: Image toolbar

The Image toolbar (Figure 343) provides tools to edit, modify, align, reposition and resize images.
The toolbar only becomes active and available when an image is selected in a presentation. The
Image toolbar automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar when it becomes active. The
tools available on the Image toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
1) Position and Size 18) Line Width
2) Align Objects 19) Line Color
3) Left 20) Area Style/Filling
4) Centered 21) Fill Color
5) Right 22) Shadow
6) Top 23) Filter
7) Center 24) Image Mode
8) Bottom 25) Crop
9) Arrange 26) Vertically
10) Bring to Front 27) Horizontally
11) Bring Forward 28) Transformations
12) Send Backward 29) Transparency
13) Send to Back 30) Color
14) In Front of Object 31) Line
15) Behind Object 32) Area
16) Reverse 33) Animation
17) Line Style 34) Interaction
Insert
Figure 344: Insert toolbar

The Insert toolbar (Figure 344) provides tools to insert different types of objects into a slide. The
tools available on the Insert toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when

1) New Page 6) Insert Audio or Video
2) Floating Frame (Media in Visible Buttons)
3) Insert Page from File 7) Formula Object
4) Table 8) Chart
5) Image 9) OLE Object
Legacy Circles and Ovals
Figure 345: Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar

The Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar (Figure 345) provides tools to insert different types of
circles and ovals into a drawing. The tools available on the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar in
1) Insert Ellipse 8) Circle, Unfilled
2) Circle 9) Ellipse Pie, Unfilled
3) Ellipse Pie 10) Circle Pie, Unfilled
4) Circle Pie 11) Ellipse Segment, Unfilled
5) Ellipse Segment 12) Circle Segment, Unfilled
6) Circle Segment 13) Arc
7) Ellipse, Unfilled 14) Circle Arc
Legacy Rectangles
Figure 346: Legacy Rectangles toolbar

The Legacy Rectangles toolbar (Figure 346) provides tools to insert different types of rectangles
and squares into a slide. The tools available on the Legacy Rectangles toolbar in Visible
1) Insert Rectangle 5) Rectangle, Unfilled
2) Square 6) Square, Unfilled
3) Rectangle, Rounded 7) Rounded Rectangle, Unfilled
4) Rounded Square 8) Rounded Square, Unfilled
Line and Filling

The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 347) provides tools and drop-down lists for editing lines,
arrows, and object borders. The tools available vary depending on the type of object selected for
editing. The tools available on the Line and Filling toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from
left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1) Position and Size 19) Line Color
2) Align Objects 20) Area Style/Filling
3) Left 21) Fill Color
4) Centered 22) Shadow
5) Right 23) Arrow Style
6) Top 24) Vertically
7) Center 25) Horizontally
8) Bottom 26) Transformations
9) Arrange 27) Line
10) Bring to Front 28) Area
11) Bring Forward 29) 3D Effects
12) Send Backward 30) Image Map
13) Send to Back 31) Animation
14) In Front of Object 32) Interaction
15) Behind Object 33) Show the Styles Sidebar
16) Reverse 34) Display Grid
17) Line Style 35) Helplines While Moving
18) Line Width
Master View
Figure 348: Master View toolbar

The Master View toolbar (Figure 348) provides tools to create a new master slide, rename a
master slide, delete a master slide, and close master view. This toolbar is only active when
Impress is in master view. The tools available on the Master View toolbar in Visible Buttons are
1) New Master 3) Delete Master
2) Rename Master 4) Close Master View
Media Playback
Figure 349: Media Playback toolbar

The Media Playback toolbar (Figure 349) provides the tools required to insert, view, play, and
listen to audio and video files. The toolbar only becomes active when an audio or video file is
selected. Impress supports many different media formats depending on the computer operating
system being used. The tools available on the Media Playback toolbar in Visible Buttons are
1) Insert Audio or Video 2) Play

3) Pause 7) Mute
4) Stop 8) Volume
5) Repeat 9) View
6) Position
Options

The Options toolbar (Figure 350) provides tools for editing various settings for newly created
presentations, for example how objects snap to the grid when being moved or resized. The tools
available on the Options toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed
on the toolbar.
1) Rotation Mode after Clicking Object 8) Snap to Object Borders
2) Display Grid 9) Snap to Object Points
3) Display Snap Guides 10) Allow Quick Editing
4) Helplines While Moving 11) Select Text Area Only
5) Snap to Grid 12) Double-click to edit Text
6) Snap to Snap Guides 13) Modify Object with Attributes
7) Snap to Page Margins 14) Exit All Groups
Outline

The Outline toolbar (Figure 351) provides tools for working with outlines. The tools available on
the Outline toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the
toolbar.
1) Demote 6) Black & White View
2) Promote 7) Show Only First Level
3) Move Down 8) Show All Levels
4) Move Up 9) Hide Subpoints
5) Show Formatting 10) Show Subpoints
Presentation
Figure 352: Presentation toolbar

The Presentation toolbar (Figure 352) provides tools for working with presentations. The tools
available on the Presentation toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
1) New Slide 5) Slide Layout
2) Duplicate Slide 6) Change Slide Master
3) Rename Slide 7) Expand Slide
4) Delete Slide 8) Go to First Slide

9) Go to Previous Slide 13) Move Slide Up
10) Go to Next Slide 14) Move Slide Down
11) Go to Last Slide 15) Move Slide to End
12) Move Slide to Start
Slide Sorter
Figure 353: Slide Sorter toolbar

The Slide Sorter toolbar (Figure 353) allows selection of slides in the current presentation and
start a presentation from the first slide. The tools available on the Slide Sorter toolbar in Visible
1) Select 2) Start from First Slide
Slide View

The Slide View toolbar (Figure 354) opens with the Slide Sorter view and provides tools to
rehearse timings of a slide show; hide and show slides, and change the number of slides
displayed in Slide Sorter view. The tools available on the Slide View toolbar in Visible Buttons
are numbered from left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1) Rehearse Timings 3) Hide Slide
2) Show Slide 4) Slides per Row
Standard

The Standard toolbar (Figure 355) is common to all LibreOffice modules and provides tools for
creating and editing documents using LibreOffice. The Standard toolbar differs between different
LO modules to allow for different toolsets used in creating the different types of documents. The
tools available on the Standard toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
1) Load URL 11) Print Directly
2) New 12) Print
3) Templates 13) Cut
4) Open 14) Copy
5) Open Remote 15) Paste
6) Save 16) Clone Formatting
7) Save As (Clone in Visible Buttons)
8) Email 17) Clear
9) Edit Mode 18) Undo
10) Export Directly as PDF 19) Redo

20) Find and Replace 35) Insert Audio or Video
21) Spelling) (Media in visible Buttons)
22) Auto Spellcheck 36) Insert Chart
23) Zoom & Pan (Chart in Visible Buttons)
24) Zoom 37) Text Box
25) Display Grid 38) Insert Special Characters
(Grid in Visible Buttons) (Symbol in Visible Buttons)
26) Helplines While Moving 39) Vertical Text
27) Display Views 40) Insert Fontwork Text
28) Views Tab Bar 41) Insert Hyperlink
29) Format Slide (Hyperlink in Visible Buttons)
30) Master Slide 42) Show Draw Functions
31) Start from First Slide (Draw Functions in Visible Buttons)
32) Start from Current Slide 43) Interaction
33) Table 44) LibreOffice Help
34) Insert Image 45) What’s That
(Image in Visible Buttons)
Standard (Single Mode)
Figure 356: Standard (Single Mode) toolbar

The Standard (Single Mode) toolbar (Figure 356) can be used instead of the Standard toolbar if
necessary. The Standard (Single Mode) toolbar is normally used when the user interface is
switched to single mode. For more information on selecting and using user interface variants, see
Chapter 12, User Interface Variants. The tools available on the Standard (Single Mode) toolbar in
1) New 22) Insert Audio or Video (Media in visible
2) Open Buttons)
3) Save 23) Insert Chart
4) Export Directly as PDF (Chart in Visible Buttons)
5) Print 24) Table
6) Print Preview 25) Insert Fontwork
7) Undo 26) Insert Line (Line in visible Buttons)
8) Redo 27) Rectangle
9) Find and Replace 28) Ellipse
10) Clone Formatting 29) Lines and Arrows
(Clone in Visible Buttons) 30) Curves and Polygons
11) Spelling 31) Connectors
12) Entire Page 32) Basic Shapes
13) New Slide 33) Symbol Shapes
14) Duplicate Slide 34) Block Arrows
15) Rename Slide (Arrow Shapes in Visible Buttons)
16) Delete Slide 35) Flowchart
17) Slide Layout (Flowchart Shapes in Visible Buttons)
18) Display Views 36) Callouts
19) Text Box (Callout Shapes in Visible Buttons)
20) Vertical Text 37) Stars and Banners
21) Insert Image (Star Shapes in Visible Buttons
(Image in Visible Buttons) 38) 3D Objects

39) Position and Size 47) Enter Group
40) Rotate 48) Exit Group
41) Flip 49) Select
42) Align Objects 50) Entire Page
43) Arrange 51) Zoom & Pan
44) Select at least three objects to distribute 52) Zoom
(Distribution in Visible Buttons) 53) Start from First Slide
45) Group 54) Start from Current Slide
46) Ungroup
Standard (Viewing Mode)
Figure 357: Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar

The Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar (Figure 357) provides tools to save, edit and distribute a
document. The tools available on the Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar in Visible Buttons are
1) Save As 7) Print Directly
2) Edit Mode 8) Print
3) Read Only Mode 9) Copy
4) Attach to Email 10) Find and Replace
(Email in Visible Buttons) 11) Zoom
5) Export Directly as PDF 12) Start from First Slide
6) EPUB
Table
Figure 358: Table toolbar

The Table toolbar (Figure 358) provides tools and options to edit and format a table placed on a
slide. This toolbar only becomes active when a table is selected. The tools available on the Table
toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1) Table 12) Align Bottom
2) Border Style (Bottom in Visible Buttons)
3) Border Color 13) Insert Row Above
4) Borders (Shift to overwrite) 14) Insert Row Below
5) Area Style/Filling 15) Insert Column Before
6) Fill Color 16) Insert Column After
7) Merge Cells 17) Delete Row
8) Split Cells 18) Delete Column
9) Optimize 19) Delete Table
10) Align Top (Top in Visible Buttons) 20) Select Table
11) Center Vertically 21) Select Column
(Center in Visible Buttons) 22) Select Row
23) Table Design

24) Table Properties
Text
Figure 359: Text toolbar

The Text toolbar (Figure 359) provides tools to insert text boxes and callouts into a slide. The
tools available on the Text toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
1) Insert Text Box 4) Insert Vertical Text
(Text Box in Visible Buttons) (Vertical Text in Visible Buttons)
2) Fit Text in Textbox Size 5) Fit Vertical Text to Frame
3) Callouts 6) Vertical Callouts
Text Formatting

The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 360) provides tools for formatting text and alignment
commands. This toolbar becomes active when text in a text box or graphic object has been
selected and it automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar. The tools available on the Text
Formatting toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the
toolbar.
1) Font Name 18) small capitals
2) Font Size 19) Font Color
3) Increase Font Size 20) Character Highlighting Color
(Increase in Visible Buttons) 21) Toggle Unordered List
4) Decrease Font Size (Unordered List in Visible Buttons)
(Decrease in Visible Buttons) 22) Toggle Ordered List
5) Bold (Ordered List in Visible Buttons)
6) Italic 23) Outline Format
7) Underline 24) Align Left
8) Double Underline (Left in Visible Buttons)
9) Strikethrough 25) Align Center
10) Overline (Center in Visible Buttons)
11) Superscript 26) Align Right
12) Subscript (Right in Visible Buttons)
13) Toggle Shadow 27) Justified
(Shadow in Visible Buttons) 28) Align Top
14) Apply outline attribute to font (Top in Visible Buttons)
(Outline Font Effect in Visible Buttons) 29) Center Vertically
15) Clear Direct Formatting (Center in Visible Buttons)
(Clear in Visible Buttons) 30) Align Bottom
16) lowercase (Bottom in Visible Buttons)
17) UPPERCASE

31) Set Line Spacing 35) Text direction from left to right
(Line Spacing in Visible Buttons) 36) Text direction from top to bottom
32) Character Spacing 37) Left-To-Right
33) Increase Paragraph Spacing 38) Right-To-Left
(Increase in Visible Buttons) 39) Select All
34) Decrease Paragraph Spacing 40) Character
(Decrease in Visible Buttons) 41) Paragraph
Transformations

The Transformations toolbar (Figure 361) provides tools to modify the shape, orientation, or fill of
selected objects. The tools available on the Transformations toolbar in Visible Buttons are
1) Rotate 6) Distort
2) Flip 7) Interactive transparency tool
3) In 3D Rotation Object (Transparency tool in Visible Buttons)
4) Set in Circle (perspective) 8) Interactive gradient tool
5) Set to circle (slant) (Gradient tool in Visible Buttons)
TSCP Classification
Figure 362: TSCP Classification toolbar

The TSCP Classification toolbar (Figure 362) provides tools to help in selecting the security of a
document. LibreOffice adds custom fields in the document properties (File > Properties >
Custom Properties on the Menu bar) to store the classification policy as document metadata.
TSCP stands for Transglobal Secure Collaboration Participation. The tools available on the TSCP
Classification toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the
toolbar.
1) Apply document classification (Level) 2) Manage Document Classification
Zoom
Figure 363: Zoom toolbar

The Zoom toolbar (Figure 363) provides tools to reduce or enlarge the screen display of the
current presentation. The tools available on the Zoom toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered
from left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1) Zoom In 5) Zoom Next
2) Zoom Out 6) Entire Page
3) 100% 7) Page Width
4) Zoom Previous

8) Optimal View 10) Zoom & Pan
(Optimal in Visible Buttons) 11) Shift
9) Object Zoom
Sub-toolbars
3D-Objects
Figure 364: 3D-Objects sub-toolbar

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D-Objects on the Drawing toolbar to open the 3D-Objects
sub-toolbar (Figure 364), then select a 3D object to add to a drawing. The tools available on the
3D-Objects sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the
toolbar.
1) Cube 5) Pyramid
2) Sphere 6) Torus
3) Cylinder 7) Shell
4) Cone 8) Half Sphere
Note
The 3D-Objects sub-toolbar is identical to the 3D-Objects toolbar available at
View > Toolbars on the Menu bar.
Basic Shapes
Figure 365: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar to open the Basic
Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 365), then select a basic shape to add to a drawing. The tools
available on the Basic Shapes sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right
when installed on the toolbar.
1) Rectangle 13) Isosceles Triangle
2) Rectangle, Rounded 14) Right Triangle
3) Square 15) Diamond
4) Square, Rounded 16) Regular Pentagon
5) Parallelogram 17) Hexagon
6) Trapezoid 18) Octagon
7) Ellipse 19) Cylinder
8) Circle 20) Cube
9) Circle Pie 21) Folded Corner
10) Circle Segment 22) Cross
11) Arc 23) Frame
12) Block Arc 24) Ring

Block Arrows
Figure 366: Block Arrows sub-toolbar

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Block Arrows on the Drawing toolbar to open the Block
Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 366), then select a block arrow to add to a drawing. The tools
available on the Block Arrows sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right
when installed on the toolbar.
1) Right Arrow 14) Pentagon
2) Left Arrow 15) Striped Right Arrow
3) Down Arrow 16) Up, right and Down Arrow
4) Up Arrow 17) Notched Right Arrow
5) Left and Right Arrow 18) Up and Right Arrow
6) Up and Down Arrow 19) Right Arrow Callout
7) Circular Arrow 20) Left Arrow Callout
8) S-shaped Arrow 21) Down Arrow Callout
9) Split Arrow 22) Up Arrow Callout
10) Right or Left Arrow 23) Left and Right Arrow Callout
11) 4-way Arrow 24) Up and Down Arrow Callout
12) Corner Right Arrow 25) 4-way Arrow Callout
13) Chevron 26) Up and Right Arrow Callout
Callouts
Figure 367: Callouts sub-toolbar

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Callouts on the Drawing toolbar to open the Callouts
sub-toolbar (Figure 367), then select a callout to add to a drawing. The tools available on the
Callouts sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the
toolbar.
1) Rectangular Callout 5) Line Callout 1
2) Rounded Rectangular Callout 6) Line Callout 2
3) Round Callout 7) Line Callout 3
4) Cloud
Color
The Color sub-toolbar (Figure 368) provides tools to edit the color properties of a selected object.
After selecting an image or graphic to open the Image toolbar, click on Color on the Image
toolbar. The tools available on the Color sub-toolbar are as follows:
• Red — specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic
object. Values from -100% (no red) to +100% (full red) are possible.
• Green — specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected
graphic object. Values from -100% (no green) to +100% (full green) are possible.

Figure 368: Color sub-toolbar
• Blue — specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
Values from -100% (no blue) to +100% (full blue) are possible.
• Brightness — specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object. Values from -
100% (only black) to +100% (only white) are possible.
• Contrast — specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image. Values from -
100% (no contrast at all) to +100% (full contrast) are possible.
• Gamma — specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects
the brightness of the mid-tone values. Values from 0.10 (minimum Gamma) to 10
(maximum Gamma) are possible.
Connectors

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open the Connectors
sub-toolbar (Figure 369), then select a connector to add to a drawing. The tools available on the
Connectors sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on the
toolbar.
1) Connector Ends with Arrow 13) Connector Ends with Circle
2) Straight Connector Ends with Arrow 14) Straight Connector Ends with Circle
3) Curved Connector Ends with Arrow 15) Curved Connector Ends with Circle
4) Line Connector Ends with Arrow 16) Line Connector Ends with Circle
5) Connector 17) Connector Starts with Circle
6) Straight Connector 18) Straight Connector starts with Circle
7) Curved Connector 19) Curved Connector Starts with Circle
8) Line Connector 20) Line Connector Starts with Circle
9) Connector Starts with Arrow 21) Connector with Circles
10) Straight Connector starts with Arrow 22) Straight Connector with Circle
11) Curved Connector Starts with Arrow 23) Curved Connector with Circle
12) Line Connector Starts Arrow 24) Line Connector with Circle

Curves and Polygons
Figure 370: Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar (Figure 370), then select a curve or polygon to add to a
drawing. The tools available on the Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are
1) Curve, Filled 5) Curve
2) Polygon, Filled 6) Polygon
3) Polygon (45°), Filled 7) Polygon (45°)
4) Freeform Line, Filled 8) Freeform Line
Flowchart
Figure 371: Flowchart sub-toolbar

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Flowchart on the Drawing toolbar to open the Flowchart
sub-toolbar (Figure 371), then select a flowchart shape to add to a drawing. The tools available
on the Flowchart sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when installed on
the toolbar.
1) Flowchart: Process 15) Flowchart: Card
2) Flowchart: Alternate Process 16) Flowchart: Punched Tape
3) Flowchart: Decision 17) Flowchart: Summing Junction
4) Flowchart: Data 18) Flowchart: Or
5) Flowchart: Predefined Process 19) Flowchart: Collate
6) Flowchart: Internal Storage 20) Flowchart: Sort
7) Flowchart: Document 21) Flowchart: Extract
8) Flowchart: Multidocument 22) Flowchart: Merge
9) Flowchart: Terminator 23) Flowchart: Stored Data
10) Flowchart: Preparation 24) Flowchart: Delay
11) Flowchart: Manual Input 25) Flowchart: Sequential Access
12) Flowchart: Manual Operation 26) Flowchart: Magnetic Disc
13) Flowchart: Connector 27) Flowchart: Direct Access Storage
14) Flowchart: Off-page Connector 28) Flowchart: Display
Image Filter

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Filter on the Drawing or Image toolbar to open the Image
Filter sub-toolbar (Figure 372), then select a filter to change how an image appears on the
display.

The filters available on the Image Filter sub-toolbar are as follows:
• Invert — inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a
greyscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect.
• Smooth — softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
• Sharpen — sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
• Remove Noise — removes noise by applying a median filter.
• Solarization — opens a dialogue box for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an
effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo
development. The colors become partly inverted.
• Aging — all pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color
channels are reduced by the amount specified. The red color channel is not changed.
• Posterize — opens a dialogue box to determine the number of poster colors. This effect
is based on the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings.
• Pop Art — converts an image to a pop-art format.
• Charcoal Sketch — displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image
are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed.
• Relief — displays a dialogue box for creating reliefs. Selecting the position of the
imaginary light source determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic
image looks in relief.
• Mosaic — joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The
larger the individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has.
Lines and Arrows
Figure 373: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 373), then select a line or arrow to add to a drawing. The
tools available on the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to
1) Line Ends with Arrow 6) Line with Arrow/Circle
2) Line with Circle/Arrow 7) Line with Arrow/Square
3) Line with Square/Arrow 8) Insert Line
4) Line with Arrows 9) Dimension Line
5) Line Starts with Arrow 10) Line (45°)
Stars and Banners
Figure 374: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Stars and Banners on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Stars and Banners sub-toolbar (Figure 374), then select a star or arrow to add to a drawing. The
tools available on the Stars and Banners sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left
to right when installed on the toolbar.
1) 4-Point Star 7) Explosion
2) 5-Point Star 8) Vertical Scroll
3) 6-Point Star 9) Horizontal Scroll
4) 8-Point Star 10) Signet
5) 12-Point Star 11) Doorplate
6) 24-Point Star 12) 6-Point Star, Concave
Symbol Shapes
Figure 375: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Symbol Shapes on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 375), then select a symbol shape to add to a drawing. The
tools available on the Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to
1) Smiley Face 10) Square Bevel
2) Heart 11) Octagon Bevel
3) Sun 12) Diamond Bevel
4) Moon 13) Double Bracket
5) Cloud 14) Left Bracket
6) Lightning Bolt 15) Right Bracket
7) Flower 16) Double Brace
8) Prohibited 17) Left Brace
9) Puzzle 18) Right Brace

Impress Guide
Working With Presentations
About this book:
This book is for beginners to advanced users and covers the main features of Impress,
the presentations component of LibreOffice. Using Impress, slides containing text,
unordered and ordered lists, tables, charts, clip art, and other objects can be created.
Impress comes with predefined text styles and slide backgrounds, but text styles and
slide backgrounds can be created to match the presentation requirements.
Impress is fully integrated into LibreOffice simplifying the exchanging of text, graphics
and data with Writer, Calc, and Draw.
About the authors:
This book was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community. Profits from the
sales of the printed edition are used to benefit the community.
A PDF version of this book can be downloaded free from:
https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/
About LibreOffice:
LibreOffice is the free, libre, and open source personal productivity suite from The
Documentation Foundation. It runs on Windows, macOS, and GNU/Linux. Support and
documentation is free from a large, dedicated community of users, contributors, and
developers.
Get involved as a volunteer and work in many areas: development, quality assurance,
documentation, translation, user support, and more.
Download LibreOffice for free from:
https://libreoffice.org/downloads/
392 |

IG76 ImpressGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IG76 ImpressGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Copyright

Publication date and software version

Documentation for LibreOffice is available at https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/

Impress Guide 7.6 | 3

4| Impress Guide 7.6

Impress Guide 7.6 | 5

6| Impress Guide 7.6

What is in this user guide?

Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice

How to get LibreOffice

8 | Impress Guide 7.6

Setting up and customizing LibreOffice

Extensions and add-ons

Where to get more help

10 | Impress Guide 7.6

Other free online support

Paid support and training

What you see may be different

12 | Impress Guide 7.6

Using LibreOffice on macOS

Windows or Linux macOS equivalent Effect

Who wrote this user guide?

Frequently asked questions

14 | Impress Guide 7.6

How can users contribute to LibreOffice?

What is new in LibreOffice 7.6?

Figure 3: New application icons

18 | Impress Guide 7.6

Figure 5: Select a Template dialog

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 19

Main Impress window

Figure 6: Workspace view tabs

20 | Impress Guide 7.6

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 21

22 | Impress Guide 7.6

Figure 8: Changing ruler units

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 23

Example selection Examples of information shown

24 | Impress Guide 7.6

Figure 10: Navigator dialog

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 25

The following toolbars are normally used when creating a presentation:

Figure 11: Standard toolbar

Figure 12: Drawing toolbar

26 | Impress Guide 7.6

Figure 14: Text Formatting toolbar

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 27

Figure 16: Outline toolbar

28 | Impress Guide 7.6

Figure 18: Example of Slide Sorter view

Figure 19: Slide View toolbar

Slide Sorter view

Customizing Slide Sorter view

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 29

Selecting a slide group

Working in Slide Sorter view

30 | Impress Guide 7.6

Figure 21: Presentation toolbar

Inserting new slide

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 31

Figure 22: Slide panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

32 | Impress Guide 7.6